manualshive.com logo in svg

Siemens HiPath 3000 V3.0 or later Gigaset M1 Professional, Service Manual, Page: 774 / 1202

Share
Download
Siemens HiPath 3000 V3.0 or later Gigaset M1 Professional Service Manual Download Page 774

Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway

    

 P31003-H3560-S403-54-7620, 09/05

7-6

HiPath 3000 V6.0, HiPath 5000 V6.0, Provisional Service Manual

start_3g.fm

Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway

7.5

Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway

7.5.1

Prerequisites 

Refer to Section 4.4.1 for information on the tools and resources needed to install the HiPath 
3500 system. 

7.5.2

Procedure for Installation and Startup 

7

Warning

Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.

>

To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer net-
work, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP address 
is assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again. 

Table 7-3

HiPath 3500 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup 

Step

Activity (Remarks)

HiPath 3500 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet) (Section 4.4)

1.

Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-189 (usually predetermined) 

2.

Unpacking the Components, page 4-190 

3.

Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall, page 4-191 

4.

Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet, page 4-192 

5.

Grounding the System, page 4-194 

6.

Connecting Cables and the Line Network, page 4-196 

7.

Configuration notes, page 4-197 

8.

Making trunk connections 
Refer to the following board descriptions for information: 

●

STLS4R - for S

0

 trunk connection 

●

TS2R

 - for the S

2M

 trunk connection 

●

TST1 (for U.S. only) - for T1 PRI trunk 

Note: Analog workpoint clients can be connected to the

 CBRC

’s T/R ports in emer-

gencies. This ensures telephone operation via the telecommunications network in 
the event of IP network failure. 

Summary of Contents for HiPath 3000 V3.0 or later Gigaset M1 Professional

Page 1: ...HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual ESHB 60 004 05 09 22 09 05 ...

Page 2: ...eed in the terms of contract The trademarks used are owned by Siemens AG or their respective owners The device conforms to the EU directive 1999 5 EG as attested by the CE mark This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified environmental management system ISO 14001 This process ensures that energy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to a minimum thus reduc...

Page 3: ...1 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3800 2 4 2 2 2 2 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3750 2 6 2 2 2 3 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3550 2 8 2 2 2 4 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3350 2 9 2 2 2 5 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3700 2 10 2 2 2 6 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3500 2 11 2 2 2 7 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3300 2 12 2 2 3 System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems 2 13 2 2...

Page 4: ...lculation Example 6 Connecting teleworkers via VPN 2 41 2 6 8 1 7 Calculation Example 7 Virtual Private Network VPN with Customer Specifications 1000 Kbps Bandwidth for Data Transfer Remaining Bandwidth for Voice Transmission 2 43 2 6 8 2 Notes on the Maintenance of Gateway Channels HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 or later 2 45 2 7 Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000 2 46 2 8 Interface to Interface Ran...

Page 5: ...3 96 3 3 4 HXGM3 3 100 3 3 5 HXGS3 HXGR3 3 106 3 3 6 IVML8 IVML24 3 115 3 3 7 IVMNL IVMN8 3 120 3 3 8 IVMP8 not for U S IVMP8R not for U S 3 125 3 3 9 IVMS8 IVMS8R 3 130 3 3 10 PBXXX for selected countries only 3 136 3 3 11 SLA8N not for U S SLA16N SLA24N 3 145 3 3 12 SLC16N Not for U S 3 152 3 3 13 SLCN Not for U S 3 169 3 3 14 SLMA SLMA8 3 176 3 3 15 SLMA2 for selected countries only 3 186 3 3 1...

Page 6: ...t for U S TS2R Not for U S 3 330 3 3 45 4SLA Not for U S 8SLA 16SLA Not for U S 3 335 3 3 46 8SLAR 3 338 3 4 Options 3 340 3 4 1 ALUM4 3 340 3 4 2 AMOM 3 344 3 4 3 ANI4 for selected countries only 3 346 3 4 4 ANI4R for selected countries only 3 350 3 4 5 Announcement and Music Modules 3 352 3 4 6 EVM 3 355 3 4 7 EXMNA for U S only 3 357 3 4 8 GEE8 not for U S 3 359 3 4 9 GEE12 nor for U S GEE16 no...

Page 7: ...talling Boards Configuration Notes 4 31 4 2 5 1 Board Slots in the Basic and Expansion Cabinet 4 31 4 2 5 2 Inserting or Removing Boards 4 34 4 2 5 3 Mounting Connector Panels if required 4 40 4 2 5 4 Installing the SIVAPAC SIPAC Board Adapter 4 42 4 2 5 5 Initializing the Boards 4 45 4 2 5 6 Distribution of the PCM Highway 4 46 4 2 5 7 Static Traffic Capacity 4 50 4 2 6 Connecting the Cable to th...

Page 8: ... the System Cabinets 4 93 4 3 3 4 1 Overview 4 93 4 3 3 4 2 Removing the Cabinet Covers 4 94 4 3 3 4 3 Setting Up a Single Cabinet 4 95 4 3 3 4 4 Mounting a One Cabinet System on the Wall for U S only 4 95 4 3 3 4 5 Stacking Two Cabinets 4 97 4 3 3 4 6 For U S only Mounting Two Cabinets Stacked on the Wall 4 100 4 3 3 4 7 Setting Up a Two Cabinet System Side by Side 4 103 4 3 3 4 8 Setting Up a St...

Page 9: ...0 and HiPath 3350 4 167 4 4 3 1 Selecting the Installation Site 4 167 4 4 3 1 1 For U S only AC outlet 4 169 4 4 3 2 Unpacking the Components 4 170 4 4 3 3 Not for U S Mounting the Main Distribution Frame HiPath 3550 only 4 170 4 4 3 4 Removing the System Housing Cover 4 172 4 4 3 5 Attaching the System to the Wall 4 174 4 4 3 6 Grounding the System and the Main Distribution Frame 4 175 4 4 3 7 In...

Page 10: ...5 15 5 3 4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type 5 15 5 3 5 Not for U S Entering the System Number 5 17 5 3 6 Customer Specific Programming 5 18 5 3 7 Performing a System Check 5 18 5 4 Starting Up HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 5 19 5 4 1 Startup Procedure 5 19 5 4 2 Supplying the System With Power 5 20 5 4 2 1 Assigning Station Numbers 5 21 5 4 ...

Page 11: ...ation 6 49 6 10 1 Configuring HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service 6 50 6 10 2 Reloading the HiPath ComScendo Service if required 6 51 6 10 3 Configuring HiPath 5000 RSM as a Central Administration Unit in an IP Network 6 52 6 10 3 1 Creating a Central Customer Database for IP Networking 6 52 6 10 3 2 Adding Individual Nodes for IP Networking 6 54 6 11 HiPath Manager PCM 6 56 6 12 GetAccount ...

Page 12: ...Path 3000 V5 0 8 28 8 5 3 Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 As Part of an Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 30 8 5 4 Upgrade optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 32 8 5 5 Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7 0 As Part of an Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 34 8 6 Protection Against License Manipulation 8 36 9 Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 9 1 9 1 Overview 9 1 9 2 E...

Page 13: ...add on device configurations 10 20 10 2 3 optiPoint 500 Adapters 10 21 10 2 3 1 optiPoint Analog Adapter 10 22 10 2 3 2 optiPoint ISDN Adapter 10 23 10 2 3 3 optiPoint Phone Adapter 10 24 10 2 3 4 optiPoint Acoustic Adapter 10 26 10 2 3 5 optiPoint Recorder Adapter 10 29 10 2 3 6 Possible optiPoint Adapter Configurations 10 30 10 2 3 7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters 10...

Page 14: ...iset E optiPoint 500 and optiPoint 600 office 10 71 10 7 1 2 AC Adapter for optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S 10 73 10 7 2 Headsets 10 74 10 8 optiClient 130 V5 0 10 77 10 9 HiPath AP 1120 10 78 10 10 Attendant console versions 10 79 10 10 1 optiPoint Attendant 10 79 10 10 2 optiClient Attendant 10 80 10 11 Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office 10 85 10 11 1 Gi...

Page 15: ... Systems Without HiPath Software Manager 12 11 12 2 3 1 1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC 12 11 12 2 3 1 2 APS transfer 12 12 12 2 3 2 APS Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems With HiPath Software Manager 12 16 12 2 4 Upgrading HiPath 3000 12 17 12 2 5 Determining System Information and Installed Software Components HiPath Inventory Manager 12 18 12 2 6 Backing Up System Compon...

Page 16: ... 3000 Connection Options 12 73 12 5 2 HiPath 5000 Connection Options 12 74 12 5 3 Remote System Administration 12 74 12 5 3 1 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 with HiPath 3000 Manager E 12 74 12 5 3 2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 12 75 12 5 4 Remote Correction of System Software APS 12 75 12 5 5 Remote Error Signaling 12 76 12 5 6 Controlled Release of a Remote Connection 12 77 12...

Page 17: ...optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 office C 13 C 8 HiPath AP 1120 C 16 C 9 Middleware for Call Control C 17 D Identifying System Power Requirements D 1 D 1 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement D 2 D 2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Board Power Requirement D 4 D 3 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement D 6 D 4 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement D 8 D 5...

Page 18: ...Contents P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 0 16 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual hp3hp5shTOC fm ...

Page 19: ...5 09 22 Chapter contents This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table Topic Structure of this Electronic Service Manual page 1 2 Electrical Environment page 1 4 Safety Information page 1 5 Safety Information Dangers Safety Information Warnings Safety information Cautions General Information What To Do in an Emergency Reporting Accidents Safety Information for Australia For Austr...

Page 20: ...nvironment capacity lim its technical data Chapter 3 Boards for HiPath 3000 describes all of the boards used for HiPath 3000 The hardware information such as connection cables and NT connections is presented for each board The actions necessary for the standard installation part of a standard system of the dif ferent HiPath 3000 systems are described in Chapter 4 Installing HiPath 3000 The procedu...

Page 21: ...IP Fundamen tals The following appendices contain lists with programming codes IP protocols port num bers Appendix A System Programming Codes Expert Mode Codes Appendix B Codes for Activating Deactivating Features and Appendix C IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 Appendix D Identifying System Power Requirements provides information about the resource requirements of the ...

Page 22: ...cted to a TN C S power supply system in which the PEN conductor is divided into a ground and a neutral wire TN S and TN C S systems are defined in the IEC 364 3 standard The device conforms to the EU directive 1999 5 EG as attested by the CE mark This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified envi ronmental management system ISO 14001 This process ensures that en ergy consumpti...

Page 23: ...y safety pre cautions do not appear to be in place such as in humid conditions or situations where there is a risk of gas explosions Safety symbols This manual uses the following symbols to indicate potential hazards Additional symbols identifying sources of potential hazard The following symbols are not generally used in the manual They explain symbols that may appear on equipment electrostatical...

Page 24: ...tems Potentially hazardous circuits are accessible in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 systems These systems should therefore only be operated with closed housing Dangerous voltages Voltages above 30 Vac alternating current or 60 Vdc direct current are dangerous Damage Replace the power cable immediately if it shows any signs of damage Replace any damaged safety equipment covers labels and protectiv...

Page 25: ...ot properly insulated Ensure that a machine cannot be powered on from another source or controlled from a dif ferent circuit breaker or disconnecting switch Before starting any work check whether the corresponding circuits are still on power Nev er take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been disconnected from the power supply when a fuse or a main switch has been switched off Use caut...

Page 26: ...r hair while working on machines Never wear rings watches and other jewelry or even clothing with metal coating or rivets when working with electrical circuits and components These could cause injury and short circuits Wear eye protection when you are working in any conditions that might be hazardous to your eyes Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling objects General s...

Page 27: ...nd when servicing cards panels and boards while the system is powered on Damage Only use tools and equipment which are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with visible damage Protecting electrostatically sensitive devices ESD To protect electrostatically sensitive devices ESD Wear a wristband before carrying out any work on PC boards and modules Transport PC boards only in electrostatic pack...

Page 28: ...pleted replace all safety equipment in the correct location Checking tools Check your tools regularly Only use intact tools Closing the housing cover After maintenance and testing work has been completed close all housing covers Condensation Condensation may form if equipment is brought onto the operating premises from a cold envi ronment Wait until the temperature of the equipment has adjusted to...

Page 29: ...aste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and elec tronic equipment For more detailed information about disposal of your o...

Page 30: ...restoration and burn treatment are essential in emer gencies of this kind Administer resuscitation immediately if the person is not breathing mouth to mouth or mouth to nose If you are trained and certified administer cardiac compression if the heart is not beating Calling for help Immediately call an ambulance or the emergency doctor Give details of the accident in the fol lowing order Where did ...

Page 31: ...s pow ering the system The mains socket shall be readily accessible Integrity of the main socket must be assured HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 may only be installed and maintained by authorized service personnel HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be earthed with a separate bonding earth if the sys tems are powered by a UPS CE customer equipment does not continue to support emergency dialing after loss...

Page 32: ...rets and personal data under the terms of the company s work rules In order to ensure that the statutory requirements during service whether on site or remote are consistently met you should always observe the following regulations This safeguards the interests of the customer and offers added personal protection Guidelines governing the handling of data A conscientious and responsible approach he...

Page 33: ...netinfo2 icn siemens de edoku3 search_de htm List of Frequently Asked Ques tions FAQ in the VD portal Questions and answers for HiPath customer scenarios Keyword Solutions_Products_Services German https vd icn siemens de cfdocs faq start cfm Knowledge Management for Oper ational Support and Services KMOSS Platform for the provision of service information successor to the Ser vice Information Syste...

Page 34: ...V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inform fm Information on the Intranet Setting up tracing for the Feature server Configuration notes and procedures German English https kmoss icn siemens de livelink livelink exe view INF 02 000326 Table 1 1 Information on the Intranet Contents Languages URL ...

Page 35: ...iPath 3300 System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems page 2 13 HiPath 3800 System Environment HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 System Environment HiPath 3550 System Environment HiPath 3350 System Environment HiPath 3500 System Environment HiPath 3300 System Environment HiPath 5000 page 2 19 System Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 page 2 22 Static Configuration Rules page 2 24 Dy...

Page 36: ...ace Ranges page 2 47 Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000 5000 page 2 48 Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000 page 2 49 CE Compliance Not for U S page 2 49 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards For U S and Canada Only page 2 49 SAFETY International page 2 54 Environmental Conditions page 2 55 Electrical Operating Conditions page 2 55 Mechanical Operating Conditions page 2 55 Topic ...

Page 37: ...diation refer to Section 2 11 HiPath 3000 systems This service manual contains information on all HiPath 3000 systems Information on marketing individual models in different countries can be obtained at the responsible locations System for standalone installation and for installation in 19 inch cabinets HiPath 3800 Systems for standalone installation HiPath 3750 only and wall mounting HiPath 3750 ...

Page 38: ...re available on the backplane for connecting the external main dis tribution frame MDFU E using CABLUs prefabricated cabling units or to connect external patch panels Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for connecting the peripheral device directly The con nector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane For U S only connector panels with CHAMP jack for connecting the peripheral...

Page 39: ...31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 2 5 System Data HiPath 3000 Dimensions Figure 2 1 HiPath 3800 Dimensions BC approx 440 mm approx 980 mm EC approx 430 mm ...

Page 40: ... system BC EC1 A three cabinet system BC EC1 EC2 Design The HiPath 3750 uses 8 slot cabinets where expansion cabinet 1 EC1 and expansion cab inet 2 EC2 are identical in design The BC has seven slots available for peripheral boards and each expansion cabinet has eight slots The UPSM power supply in all cabinets and the CPCPR central control board only in the BC have fixed positions Up to two cabine...

Page 41: ... V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 2 7 System Data HiPath 3000 Dimensions Figure 2 2 HiPath 3750 Dimensions Cable duct Depth of the MDFU or MDFU E 126 mm Depth of system cabinet 390 mm EC1 BC EC2 MDFU MDFU E MDFU MDFU approx 328 mm approx approx approx 980 mm approx 670 mm ...

Page 42: ...cending order from the at tachment side have the following assignments Slot levels 1 3 peripheral boards two slots per level Slot level 4 CBCC control board only Slot level 5 SIPAC slot for HiPath 3750 boards Slot level 6 Optional boards up to 5 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The connection cables to the peripherals telephones trunk connections etc can be connect ed d...

Page 43: ...07 numbered in ascending order from the attachment side have the following assignments Slot level 1 peripheral boards two slots Slot level 2 CBCC control board only Slot level 3 Optional boards up to 5 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The HiPath 3350 does not need an external main distribution frame The connection cables to the peripherals telephones trunk connections e...

Page 44: ...other and are accessible from the back A special mounting set enables installation in 19 inch cabinets Design The HiPath 3700 uses 8 slot cabinets The BC has seven slots and the expansion cabinet has eight slots available for peripheral boards The UPSM power supply in all cabinets and the CPCPR central control board only in the BC have fixed positions Dimensions Figure 2 5 HiPath 3700 Dimensions D...

Page 45: ...gure 4 112 Slot levels 1 3 slide in shelves for peripheral boards 2 boards can be plugged in on each level Slot level 4 slide in shelf for CBRC control board Slot level 5 Optional boards up to 3 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The connection to peripherals telephones trunks and others is set up using MW8 jacks on the boards front cover Dimensions Figure 2 6 HiPath 3500...

Page 46: ...represented in Figure 4 113 Slot level 1 slide in shelves for two peripheral boards Slot level 2 slide in shelf for CBRC control board Slot level 3 Optional boards up to 3 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The connection to peripherals telephones trunks and others is set up using MW8 jacks on the board s front cover Dimensions Figure 2 7 HiPath 3300 Dimensions 440 mm 88 ...

Page 47: ...th 3800 System Environment Table 2 1 Boards for HiPath 3800 HiPath 3800 Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S IVMN8 CBSAP DIU2U IVMNL CMS DIUN2 PBXXX1 1 for selected countries only DBSAP STMD3 SLCN IMODN STMI2 SLMA LIMS TM2LP SLMA21 LUNA2 TMC161 SLMA8 MMC TMDID SLMO2 MPPI TMEW2 SLMO8 PDMX2 2 used on the STMI2 board STMD3 PFT1 PFT4 STMI2 REALS RGMOD1 ...

Page 48: ...0 and HiPath 3700 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 systems Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S HXGM3 CBCPR HXGM3 IVML8 CMS STMD8 IVML24 CR8N TMDID8 SLA8N IMODN TIEL SLA16N LIM TML8W TMGL8 SLA24N MMC TMS2 TMST1 SLC16N UPSM TMAMF1 1 for Brazil India Malaysia Singapore and ATEA countries only SLMO8 TMCAS2 2 for selected countries only SLMO24 GEE8 STMD8 MPPI ...

Page 49: ...ards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S HXGS3 CBCC HXGS3 IVMS8 CMA STLS2 SLA8N CMS STLS4 SLA16N CUC STLSX2 SLA24N IMODN STLSX4 SLC16N LIM TLA2 TMGL4 SLMO24 MMC TLA4 TMQ4 SLU8 UPSC D TLA8 TST1 STLS2 TMAMF1 1 for Brazil India Malaysia Singapore and ATEA countries only STLS4 ALUM4 TMCAS2 2 for selected countries only STLSX2 ANI42 TS2 STLSX4 EVM 4SLA EXM 8SLA GEE12 EXMNA 16SLA GEE16 GEE50 UA...

Page 50: ...th 3350 HiPath 3350 Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S HXGS3 CBCC HXGS3 IVMP8 CMA STLS2 IVMS8 CMS STLS4 SLU8 CUP STLSX2 STLS2 IMODN STLSX4 STLS4 LIM TLA2 TMGL4 STLSX2 MMC TLA4 TMQ4 STLSX4 PSUP TLA8 4SLA UPSC D 8SLA 16SLA ALUM4 ANI41 1 for selected countries only EVM EXM GEE12 EXMNA GEE16 GEE50 UAM MPPI OPAL PDM1 STBG42 2 For France only STRB V24 1 ...

Page 51: ...3500 System Environment Table 2 5 Boards for HiPath 3500 HiPath 3500 Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S HXGR3 CBRC HXGR3 IVMS8R CMA STLS4R SLU8R CMS STLSX4R STLS4R CUCR TS2R TMGL4R STLSX4R IMODN TLA4R TST1 8SLAR LIM MMC UPSC DR ANI4R1 1 for selected countries only EVM EXMR MPPI OPALR PDM1 STRBR UAMR ...

Page 52: ... 3300 System Environment Table 2 6 Boards for HiPath 3300 HiPath 3300 Subscriber Line Modules Central Boards Options Trunk Boards ROW U S ROW U S ROW U S HXGR3 CBRC HXGR3 IVMP8R CMA STLS4R IVMS8R CMS STLSX4R SLU8R CUPR TLA4R TMGL4R STLS4R IMODN STLSX4R LIM 8SLAR MMC UPSC DR ANI4R1 1 for selected countries only EVM EXMR MPPI OPALR PDM1 STRBR UAMR ...

Page 53: ... Manager E while the HG 1500 resources see Page 10 38 are administered over Web based Management WBM Cross platform use of HiPath ComScendo features IP networking for example in conjunction with HiPath 4000 is implemented via CorNet IP CorNet NQ protocol tunnelled in H 323 via an nex M1 HG 1500 in HiPath 3000 and HG3550 V2 0 in HiPath 4000 are prerequisites for IP networking over CorNet IP Parts o...

Page 54: ...icense Man agement license file Central License Manager CLM CLA front end for reading in licenses in online and offline mode Personal Call Manager PCM Web based application for the configuration and administra tion of personal call forwarding operations HiPath FM Desktop V3 0 Java based application for error signaling GetAccount application that prepares generated call data records for further pro...

Page 55: ...iPath 3500 Central administration unit with Feature Server Presence Manager HiPath Software Manager HiPath 3000 Manager E Inventory Manager Central resourcing of applications possibly installed on a separate PC such as HiPath Xpressions HiPath ProCenter Office Personal Call Manager PCM HiPath Fault Management HiPath Cordless Office optiPoint 500 optiset E optiPoint 600 office HiPath 5000 RSM HiPat...

Page 56: ...Specific Capacity Limits Maximum Configuration System HiPath 38001 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 HiPath Com Scendo service Stations Workpoint Clients Total Number of TDM and IP Sta tions2 500 250 5003 1924 1925 966 967 IP stations system clients H 323 clients 500 250 5003 1928 1928 968 9 968 10 1000 Total number of TDM stations2 384 250 3843 9611 7711 12 5...

Page 57: ...se are administrative capacity limits 9 Due to the power consumption of HG 1500 a UPSC D must be used 10 Due to the power consumption of HG 1500 a UPSC DR must be used 11 If the total number of UP0 E stations analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 72 an external EPSU2 power supply unit must be used 12 4xa b 1xUP0 E 7xBS 32xHiPath Cordless Office stations...

Page 58: ...ces of the HG 1500 Boards Defined as Media Gate ways Resource HXGM3 HXGS3 HXGR3 STMI2 with out PDM1 with 1 x PDM1 with 2 x PDM1 with out PDM1 with 1 x PDM1 without PDMX1 Routing channels A routing channel is required for ex ample for making connections be tween two IP networks via ISDN IS DN routing 16 16 16 Gateway channels DSP channels A gateway channel is required for example for connection bet...

Page 59: ...DMX is not currently released 2 G 729 is not currently supported by optiClient 130 V4 0 3 The number of gateway channels available DSP channels is reduced as soon as the DMC interworking feature is acti vated with HiPath 3000 Manager E Table 2 9 HG 1500 Board Specific Capacity Limits Maximum Configuration Function HXGM3 HXGS3 HXGR3 STMI2 Function with out PDM1 with 1 x PDM1 with 2 x PDM1 with out ...

Page 60: ...nnel is necessary for the consultation call An IP workpoint client seizes a trunk A HG 1500 board is required for this trunk In the case of conferences the number of gateway channels seized corresponds to the number of stations and IP workpoint clients involved Channels required for gateway connections The following table shows the number of gateway channels HG 1500 boards necessary based on the e...

Page 61: ... of TDM lines The required number of HG 1500 boards for VoIP is determined by the sum of the gateway channels MOH channels and conference channels 17 38 8 39 54 10 55 70 12 71 86 14 87 96 15 97 101 16 102 136 20 137 172 24 173 210 28 211 247 32 248 324 40 325 402 48 403 481 56 482 562 64 563 726 80 727 890 96 891 1000 112 Table 2 10 Number of Required Gateway Channels HG 1500 Boards IP workpoint c...

Page 62: ... streams are needed simultaneously MOH should be activated on other HG 1500 boards HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service uses the MOH resources of the gateways logged on as described above The B channels used for MOH DSP channels are not licensed 2 6 3 IP Networking Channels PBX Networking Channels IP networking channels are used for connections between communication systems In this case a dis...

Page 63: ...on between HiPath 3000 and HiPath 4000 The fact that a DMC channel must serve both a master and slave connection re sults in a DSP channel reduction Note The number of gateway channels available DSP channels is reduced as soon as the DMC interworking feature is activated with HiPath 3000 Manager E In this case a Digital Sig nal Processor DSP can only provide up to 80 of all possible channels for e...

Page 64: ... Fax Modem Channels Fax and modem transmissions can be sent both over transparent G 711 gateway channels and T 38 channels fax only Although T 38 offers the more reliable method of fax transmission it can only be used to a max imum of 14 Kbps The number of T 38 channels available is limited by the higher processor speed required for T 38 Alternatively G 711 gateway channels can be used for fax tra...

Page 65: ... board This calculation is based on the assumption that the following performance point totals are available for each HG 1500 board HG 1500 board Total performance points per board HXGM3 980 HXGS3 HXGR3 780 STMI2 980 Note Any available extension modules PDM1 PDMX etc are included in the additional per formance requirement in Table 2 12 Table 2 12 Required Performance Level for Voice over IP Functi...

Page 66: ...ace 2 without encryption G 711 received 20 msec sent 20 msec 73 G 729 received 20 msec sent 20 msec 73 G 723 received 30 msec sent 30 msec 49 Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption G 711 received 20 msec sent 20 msec with AES encryption 89 G 711 received 20 msec sent 20 msec with 3DES encryption 104 G 729 received 20 msec sent 20 msec with AES encryption 89 G 729 received 20 ms...

Page 67: ...0 byte packet length 96 for 100 packets sec With AES encryption and 1400 byte packet length 198 for 100 packets sec With 3DES encryption and 1400 byte packet length 329 for 100 packets sec Without encryption with 500 byte packet length 79 for 100 packets sec With AES encryption and 500 byte packet length 119 for 100 packets sec With 3DES encryption and 500 byte packet length 166 for 100 packets se...

Page 68: ...included in the calculation The setting En hanced B Channels must be activated for this via the WBM The Virtual Private Network VPN and Firewall functions are automatically deactivated when this setting is activated The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating performance The specified performance requirement of 474 4 points is below the 980 total performance points that the HX...

Page 69: ...formance available is 980 points Performance requirement Thirty one gateway channels via LAN interface 1 should be included in the calculation The set ting Enhanced B Channels must be activated for this via the WBM The Virtual Private Net work VPN and Firewall functions are automatically deactivated when this setting is activated The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating per...

Page 70: ...nce requirement for the Signaling Gateway Gatekeeper HG 1500 G 711 is required for IP workpoint client connections The firewall must be activated for the DSL connection For this reason the calculation method with the WBM setting Enhanced B Chan nels deactivated should be used for the 14 gateway channels on each HXGM3 The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating performance The ...

Page 71: ...ow the 980 total performance points that the HXGM3 board can provide The configuration is feasible Upstream Downstream 24000 bps 256000 bps 17 packets sec 183 packets sec 1400 bytes packet 1400 bytes packet Function Resource require ment credit point Data transfer addi tional feature En hanced B Channels disabled over WBM DSL connection without encryption with 1400 bytes packet length performance ...

Page 72: ...tion 6 8 14 channels must be configured in the central offices six channels in branch office 1 and eight channels in branch office 2 An HXGM3 board without PDM module is sufficient for this configuration 2 DSPs per HXGM3 2 DSPs together supporting up to 16 channels Correspondingly the total performance available is 980 points Performance requirement The payload and the signaling load have to be ta...

Page 73: ...ary for this configuration Central office An HXGM3 2 DSPs per HXGM3 together supporting up to 16 channels Branch office One HXGR3 each 1 DSP per HXGR3 supporting up to 8 channels Correspondingly the total performance available in the central office is 980 points and 780 points in each of the branches Central office requirements Eight gateway channels via LAN interface 2 with AES encryption should ...

Page 74: ...oints is less than the overall performance of 780 points which the HXGR3 board can provide The branch configuration is feasible Function Resource require ment credit point Signaling without H 235 security inde pendent of the WBM setting Enhanced B Channels 30 x IP workpoint client System Client HFA client H 323 client eight calls an hour 30 x 0 51 15 3 4 x IP networking channel 25 calls per hour 4...

Page 75: ...bps 64000 bps per route The follow ing formula applies for 500 byte packet length Since VPN functionality is required the WBM setting Enhanced B Channels is deactivated The specified performance requirement of 788 72 points is below the 980 total performance points that the HXGM3 board can provide The configuration is feasible 64000 bps 128 packets route 256 packets s for both routes 500 bytes pac...

Page 76: ...les Bandwidth requirement For information on bandwidths refer to the System Description HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 A 1 Mbps connection would be sufficient for this configuration Bandwidth calculation Bandwidth Totals 8 channels with AES encryption G 723 with a sample rate of 30 msec 8 x 44 3 Kbps 354 4 Kbps Data transfer 512 0 Kbps Total 866 4 Kbps ...

Page 77: ...quired data exchange rate 1000kbps 1000 x 1000 8 bps 125000 bps per route The fol lowing formula applies for 500 byte packet length Number of possible simultaneous IP networking connections A performance requirement of 595 points is specified for the SDSL connection Since the HXGM3 board can provide total performance of 980 points 385 performance points are avail able for IP networking connections...

Page 78: ...rement For information on bandwidths refer to the System Description HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 A 2 Mbps connection would be sufficient for this configuration Payload additional feature Enhanced B Channels Disabled over WBM Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption G 729 received 20 msec sent 20 msec with AES encryption 89 0 Total 92 2 Bandwidth calculation Bandwidth Totals 4 channels ...

Page 79: ...teway channel per node Example B Channel Distribution in IP Networking Note on Music On Hold MOH A license is not required for the MOH channel If 8 B channels are licensed this means that the MOH channel can be used as a 9th channel The number of MOH Channels can be configured If 16 B channels are licensed and used exclusively for IP workpoint clients the 16th B channel must be used as the MOH cha...

Page 80: ... 2 6 A 115 230 VAC 1 3 A 115 230 VAC 5 4 2 7 A 115 230 VAC 2 6 A 115 230 VAC 1 3 A 115 230 VAC Line frequency 50 60 Hz Dimensions height x width x depth in mm 490 x 440 x 430 490 x 410 x 390 450 x 460 x 200 450 x 460 x 128 490 x 410 x 390 155 x 440 x 380 88 x 440 x 380 Height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 11 11 4 2 Weight Basic cabi net 16 5 kg Expansion cabinet 15 0 kg transport weight in cl...

Page 81: ...x0 6 0 6 mm diameter Telephone Interfaces Range in m Loop Resistance in Ohms ISDN S0 point to point 600 156 ISDN S0 extended bus connection 400 104 ISDN S0 bus connection1 1 Board specific 60 for the HiPath 3800 board STMD3 Q2217 120 for all other S0 boards 21 ISDN S0 wall outlet to terminal 10 Analog users 2000 520 UP0 E exchange to host master 1000 230 UP0 E host to client master slave 100 23 Ta...

Page 82: ...nk station number 7801 7920 7801 7920 7801 7920 801 816 7801 7920 Seizure codes external codes 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 80 84 850 859 80 84 850 859 80 84 850 859 82 88 8000 8062 USBS station number internal direct inward dialing 891 891 891 891 IMOD station number internal direct inward dialing 890 890 890 890 Digital modem internal direct inward dialing 879 879 ...

Page 83: ...l EN55024 EMC Immunity Residential ETS 300 329 DECT Emission Immunity TBR 06 ETS 301489 1 6 DECT Air Interface Table 2 18 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards For U S and Canada Only Category HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 Product securi ty UL 60950 1 First Edi tion CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 UL 60950 1 First Edi tion CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 UL 60950 1 First Edition CAN ...

Page 84: ...erates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If installation and handling are incorrect this can lead to disruptions in radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encoura...

Page 85: ...o determine the number of devices that can be connected to a telephone line so that all the devices ring when that telephone number is called In most areas but not all the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to a line should not exceed five Contact the local telecommunication company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes The off n...

Page 86: ...olation of Part 68 of the FCC rules Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision to the public switched telephone network PSTN when DID calls are Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision on all ...

Page 87: ... combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five 2 10 2 2 2 Equipment Attachment Limitations The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety re quirements as described in the appropriate Terminal Equi...

Page 88: ...rvice Manual sysdat fm Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000 2 10 3 SAFETY International IEC 60950 1 first edition 2001 modified 7 DANGER Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate ...

Page 89: ...ity 2 25 g H2O m3 Relative humidity 5 80 System ventilation is by convection only Automatic ventilation is required when using the HG 1500 in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 2 11 2 Mechanical Operating Conditions The systems are intended for stationary use 7 Caution Avoid exposing the system to direct sunlight and heaters excessive heat may dam age the system Systems covered with condensation must be ...

Page 90: ...System Data P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 2 56 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual sysdat fm Environmental Conditions ...

Page 91: ... To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning the following boards require secondary protection when their lines leave the building where the main distribution frame is housed CBCC CBRC DIU2U SLA16N SLA24N SLMA SLMA8 TIEL TMC16 TMDID TMDID8 TMEW2 TMGL4 TMGL4R TMGL8 TMST1 TM2LP TST1 8SLA If not connected to facility provider terminal equipment When this module is connected to the public net...

Page 92: ... S30777 Q751 Z HiPath 3300 DBSAP S30807 Q6722 X HiPath 3800 IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 HiPath 3000 LIM S30807 Q6930 X HiPath 3000 LIMS S30807 Q6721 X HiPath 3800 LUNA2 S30122 K7686 L1 S30122 K7686 M1 HiPath 3800 MMC S30122 X8002 X10 HiPath 3000 PSUP S30122 K5658 M HiPath 3350 RGMOD S30124 X5109 X HiPath 3800 for selected countries only UPSC D S30122 K5660 M300 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 UPSC DR S30122 K...

Page 93: ...8 X HiPath 3800 IVMP8 S30122 Q7379 X100 HiPath 3350 not for U S IVMP8R S30122 K7379 Z100 HiPath 3300 not for U S IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 IVMS8R S30122 K7379 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 PBXXX S30810 Q6401 X HiPath 3800 for selected countries only SLA8N S30810 Q2929 X200 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3700 not for U S SLA16N S30810 Q2929 X100 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3700 SL...

Page 94: ...Bxxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S TLA4 S30817 Q923 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S TLA4R S30817 Q923 Zxxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3300 not for U S TM2LP S30810 Q2159 Xxxx HiPath 3800 TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A200 S30810 Q2587 A400 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3550 for selected countries only TMC16 S30810 Q2485 X HiPath 3800 for selec...

Page 95: ...ath 3750 HiPath 3700 not for U S TST1 S30810 Q2919 X S30810 K2919 Z HiPath 3550 for U S only HiPath 3500 for U S only TS2 S30810 Q2913 X300 HiPath 3550 TS2R S30810 K2913 Z300 HiPath 3500 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 8SLAR S30810 K2925 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 16SLA S30810 Q2923 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S Table...

Page 96: ...30817 Q951 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 for U S only MPPI S30122 K5380 X200 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S MPPI S30122 K7275 B HiPath 3000 OPAL C39195 A7001 B130 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 PDM1 PDM1 S30807 Q5692 X100 HiP...

Page 97: ...Manual 3 7 Boards for HiPath 3000 Overview UAM S30122 X7217 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S UAMR S30122 X7402 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 not for U S V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S Table 3 1 HiPath 3000 Functional Overview of All Boards Used Board Part number Model ...

Page 98: ... S30122 H7688 X100 Peripheral board IVMNL S30122 H7688 X Peripheral board LIMS S30807 Q6721 X Central board LUNA2 S30122 K7686 L1 S30122 K7686 M1 Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI S30122 K7275 B Option PBXXX S30810 Q6401 X Peripheral board for selected countries only PDMX S30807 Q5697 X200 Option PFT1 PFT4 S30777 Q539 X S30777 Q540 X Option not for U S REALS S30807 Q6629 X Opti...

Page 99: ...Overview STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 Peripheral board TM2LP S30810 Q2159 Xxxx Peripheral board TMC16 S30810 Q2485 X Peripheral board for selected countries only TMDID S30810 Q2452 X Peripheral board for U S only TMEW2 S30810 Q2292 X100 Peripheral board Table 3 2 HiPath 3000 Overview of All Boards Models Used Board Part number Function ...

Page 100: ...0807 Q5913 X Option SLA8N S30810 Q2929 X200 Peripheral board not for U S SLA16N S30810 Q2929 X100 Peripheral board SLA24N S30810 Q2929 X Peripheral board SLC16N S30810 Q2193 X100 Peripheral board not for U S SLMO8 S30810 Q2901 X100 Peripheral board not for U S SLMO24 S30810 Q2901 X Peripheral board STMD8 S30810 Q2558 X200 Peripheral board TIEL S30810 Q2520 X Peripheral board TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A20...

Page 101: ...V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 11 Boards for HiPath 3000 Overview UPSM S30122 K5950 A100 S30122 K5950 S100 S30122 K5959 S121 for RSA only Central board Table 3 2 HiPath 3000 Overview of All Boards Models Used Board Part number Function ...

Page 102: ... only GEE12 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE16 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X Option for U S only HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI S30122 K5380 X200 not for ...

Page 103: ...pheral board not for U S TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A400 Peripheral board for selected countries only TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Peripheral board for selected countries only TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X Peripheral board for U S only TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X Peripheral board for U S only TST1 S30810 Q2919 X Peripheral board for U S only TS2 S30810 Q2913 X300 Peripheral board not for U S UAM S30122 X7217 X Option not for U S ...

Page 104: ... U S only GEE12 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE16 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X Option for U S only HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMP8 S30122 Q7379 X100 Peripheral board not for U S IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S3012...

Page 105: ...ripheral board not for U S TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx Peripheral board not for U S TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X Peripheral board for U S only TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X Peripheral board for U S only UAM S30122 X7217 X Option not for U S UPSC D S30122 K5660 M300 Central board V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 Option not for U S 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 Peripheral board not for U S 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 Peripheral board 16SLA S30...

Page 106: ...heral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMS8R S30122 K7379 Z Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI S30122 K7275 B Option OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 Cable PDM1 S30807 Q5692 X100 Option SLU8R S30817 K922 Z301 Peripheral board STLS4R S30817 K924 Z313 Peripheral board STLSX4R S30810 K2944 Z Peripheral board STRBR S30817 Q932 Z Option TLA4R S3...

Page 107: ...GR3 S30810 K2943 Z Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMP8R S30122 K7379 Z100 Peripheral board not for U S IVMS8R S30122 K7379 Z Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI S30122 K7275 B Option OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 Cable PDM1 S30807 Q5692 X100 Option SLU8R S30817 K922 Z301 Peripheral board STLS4R S30817 K924 Z313 Peripheral boa...

Page 108: ... For example UP0 E workpoint clients or BS3 1 base stations for HiPath Cordless Office can be connected here Four analog T R subscriber lines For U S only These interfaces do not support the connection of external extensions via OPS Off Premises Station signaling For Australia only The T R interfaces supply a ring voltage of 35 Veff Depending on the terminals connected we cannot exclude the possib...

Page 109: ... progress RUN LED LED status meaning is explained in the following table Please note that only one MPPI module may be connected In other words you can connect either MPPI S30122 K5380 X200 via X4 or MPPI S30122 K7275 B via X19 X20 Table 3 3 CBCC LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extin guished to...

Page 110: ... jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X7 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X20 X19 MPPI X12 LIM EVM X32 8 x UP0 E 1 X1 MMC X18 2 2 2 V24 1 1 X2 1 X3 2 X4 4 x T R MPPI or EXM Reset reload switch RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 in...

Page 111: ...3 UP0 E port 2b UP0 E port 6b T R port 2a Not used 4 UP0 E port 2a UP0 E port 6a T R port 2b EXMCLK 512 kHz data cycle 5 UP0 E port 3b UP0 E port 7b T R port 3a EXMDIR 8 kHz frame cycle 6 UP0 E port 3a UP0 E port 7a T R port 3b EXMRES high active reset 7 UP0 E port 4b UP0 E port 8b T R port 4a EXMD data line 8 UP0 E port 4a UP0 E port 8a T R port 4b EXMDET detect signal 9 5 V 10 Not used Table 3 5...

Page 112: ...terface Assignment SUB D Plug X18 pin Signal Description 1 Not used 2 RxD A Receive data channel A 3 TxD A Transmit data channel A 4 Not used 5 0 V Ground 6 Not used 7 RTS A Request to send channel A 8 CTS A Clear to send channel A 9 Not used Table 3 7 CBCC LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack via LIM Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive ...

Page 113: ... call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 100 100 UP0 E 1 101 101 UP0 E 2 102 102 UP0 E 3 103 103 UP0 E 4 104 104 UP0 E 5 105 105 UP0 E 6 106 106 UP0 E 7 107 107 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 500 500 UP0 E 1 501 501 UP0 E 2 502 502 UP0 E 3 503 503 UP0 E 4 504 504 UP0 E 5 505 505 UP0 E 6 506 506 UP0 E 7 507 507 UP0 E 8 T R 108 108 T R 1 109 109 T R 2 110 110 T R 3 111 111 T R 3 EVM 112 112 EVM 1 113 113 ...

Page 114: ... HiPath 3350 Station Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 11 11 UP0 E 1 12 12 UP0 E 2 13 13 UP0 E 3 14 14 UP0 E 4 15 15 UP0 E 5 16 16 UP0 E 6 17 17 UP0 E 7 18 18 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 51 51 UP0 E 1 52 52 UP0 E 2 53 53 UP0 E 3 54 54 UP0 E 4 55 55 UP0 E 5 56 56 UP0 E 6 57 57 UP0 E 7 58 58 UP0 E 8 T R 19 19 T R 1 20 20 T R 2 21 21 T R 3 22 22 T R 3 EVM 23 23 EVM 1 24 24 EVM 2 Line Code Port...

Page 115: ...digital UP0 E subscriber lines For example UP0 E workpoint clients or BS3 1 base stations for HiPath Cordless Office can be connected here Four analog T R subscriber lines For U S only These interfaces do not support the connection of external extensions via OPS Off Premises Station signaling For Australia only The T R interfaces supply a ring voltage of 35 Veff Depending on the terminals connecte...

Page 116: ... is explained in the following table Table 3 10 CBRC LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extin guished to acknowledge that a reload has begun On System boot Off for 0 1 s Load operation APS in SDRAM loadware and card data Flashing 0 5 s on 0 5 s off Normal operating state zero load 1 1 The flashin...

Page 117: ...nplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X12 LIM EVM X32 X18 2 X3 X20 X19 MPPI EXMR MMC 4 x T R Reset reload switch RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 interface 9 pin SUB D plug 2 x S...

Page 118: ... port 2a 25 UP0 E port 2b T R port 2b 34 UP0 E port 3a T R port 3a 35 UP0 E port 3b T R port 3b 44 UP0 E port 4a T R port 4a 45 UP0 E port 4b T R port 4b 54 UP0 E port 5a 55 UP0 E port 5b 64 UP0 E port 6a 65 UP0 E port 6b 74 UP0 E port 7a 75 UP0 E port 7b 84 UP0 E port 8a 85 UP0 E port 8b Table 3 12 CBRC S0 Interface Assignment RJ45 Jacks X9 Pin S0 port 1 X9 Pin S0 port 2 11 21 12 22 13 S0 port 1 ...

Page 119: ...terface Assignment SUB D Plug X18 pin Signal Description 1 Not used 2 RxD A Receive data channel A 3 TxD A Transmit data channel A 4 Not used 5 0 V Ground 6 Not used 7 RTS A Request to send channel A 8 CTS A Clear to send channel A 9 Not used Table 3 14 CBRC LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack via LIM Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive...

Page 120: ... call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 100 100 UP0 E 1 101 101 UP0 E 2 102 102 UP0 E 3 103 103 UP0 E 4 104 104 UP0 E 5 105 105 UP0 E 6 106 106 UP0 E 7 107 107 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 500 500 UP0 E 1 501 501 UP0 E 2 502 502 UP0 E 3 503 503 UP0 E 4 504 504 UP0 E 5 505 505 UP0 E 6 506 506 UP0 E 7 507 507 UP0 E 8 T R 108 108 T R 1 109 109 T R 2 110 110 T R 3 111 111 T R 3 EVM 112 112 EVM 1 113 113 ...

Page 121: ... HiPath 3300 Station Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 11 11 UP0 E 1 12 12 UP0 E 2 13 13 UP0 E 3 14 14 UP0 E 4 15 15 UP0 E 5 16 16 UP0 E 6 17 17 UP0 E 7 18 18 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 51 51 UP0 E 1 52 52 UP0 E 2 53 53 UP0 E 3 54 54 UP0 E 4 55 55 UP0 E 5 56 56 UP0 E 6 57 57 UP0 E 7 58 58 UP0 E 8 T R 19 19 T R 1 20 20 T R 2 21 21 T R 3 22 22 T R 3 EVM 23 23 EVM 1 24 24 EVM 2 Line Code Port...

Page 122: ...ic on hold optional V 24 interfaces To connect a service PC you can access the first V 24 interface 9 pin SUB D plug on the CBCPR from the front of the basic cabinet after removing the cover See Figure 3 3 You can access the second V 24 interface 25 pin SUB D plug via the backplane of the basic cabinet X7 Switches and indicators Reset reload switch Switch pressed 5 s Reset activated Switch pressed...

Page 123: ...3 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards Diagram of the CBCPR board Figure 3 3 CBCPR Board S30810 Q2936 X 1 X13 CMA X14 CMS X17 IMODN X16 X15 X20 1 1 X19 MPPI X12 1 X18 LIM MMC RUN LED Reset reload switch LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 interface 9 pin SUB D plug service PC or application 1 1 1 1 X27 Batt ...

Page 124: ...4 Interface Assignment SUB D Plug X18 pin Signal Description 1 Not used 2 RxD A Receive data channel A 3 TxD A Transmit data channel A 4 Not used 5 0 V Ground 6 Not used 7 RTS A Request to send channel A 8 CTS A Clear to send channel A 9 Not used Table 3 18 CBCPR LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 ...

Page 125: ...d new optional LIMS LAN interface module optional Contains two Ethernet 10BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks LAN1 administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI functions LAN2 not assigned MPPI music on hold optional V 24 interfaces 9 pin SUB D plug Service X50 for connecting the service PC Application X51 for connecting a printer or application Switches and indicators Reset reload switch Swi...

Page 126: ...sional Service Manual boards fm Central Boards Two LEDs for displaying the LAN interface status LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex FDX Off half duplex Diagram of CBSAP board Figure 3 4 CBSAP Board S30810 Q2314 X IMODN LIMS CMS MPPI MMC ...

Page 127: ...ncountered Reset reload switch Slide in shelf for MMC Two Ethernet 10BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks via LIMS LAN2 not assigned LAN1 administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI func tions The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex FDX Off half duplex V 24 interfaces 9 pin SUB D pl...

Page 128: ...nment SUB D Plug X50 X51 Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Data carrier detect not used 2 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Transmit data 4 DTR Data terminal ready not used 5 0 V Ground 6 DSR Data send ready not used 7 RTS Request to send 8 CTS Clear to send 9 RI Ring indicator not used Table 3 20 CBSAP LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5...

Page 129: ...d for special HiPath Cordless Office configurations All clock module small CMS functions are available when you insert a CMA module Please refer to Page 3 40 for recommendations on CMA module implementation 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMA subboard The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard so you should always mou...

Page 130: ...nection available no trunk analog trunk ISDN S0 or ISDN S2M and conse quently the possible provision of a digital reference clock HiPath Cordless Office 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMS subboard The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard so you should always mount them see Figure 3 6 Otherwise you may damage the bo...

Page 131: ...rking via ISDN S0 lines MASTER system SLAVE system s No trunk or analog trunk CMS or CMA see Table 11 1 No trunk or analog trunk Via ISDN S0 network ing line CMA2 ISDN S0 not al ways ac tive Via ISDN S0 trunk con nection if active CMS1 CMS or CMA see Table 11 1 ISDN S0 not al ways ac tive Via ISDN S0 network ing line CMA2 ISDN S0 always active Via ISDN S0 trunk con nection CMS1 CMA2 ISDN S0 always...

Page 132: ...c tive Via ISDN S0 trunk con nection if active CMS1 CMS or CMA see Table 11 1 ISDN S0 not al ways ac tive Via ISDN S2M network ing line CMA2 ISDN S0 always active Via ISDN S0 trunk con nection CMS1 CMA2 ISDN S0 always active Via ISDN S0 trunk con nection CMA2 ISDN S2M Via ISDN S2M trunk con nection CMS1 CMA2 ISDN S2M Via ISDN S2M trunk con nection CMA2 Table 3 21 Recommendations for CMA and CMS Ut...

Page 133: ...M trunk con nection CMA2 1 CMS is not necessary if the reference clock supplied by the CO is always available via the networking lines not a trans parent clock 2 CMA is not necessary if ADPCM conversion is not needed for HiPath Cordless Office see Table 11 1 3 CMS is not necessary but is recommended for the following reasons Although an Ethernet link is an asynchronous con nection buffer overflow ...

Page 134: ...in the system on the CBCPR are not sufficient Adding a CR8N board provides another eight code receivers and eight code transmitters Up to two CR8Ns can be installed in each sys tem A CR8N board and a CR8 board S30810 Q2513 X cannot be used in the same system simultaneously You can also install or remove a CR8N board during operation If you remove it while the system is in the operating state you r...

Page 135: ...Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Wait If the status does not change the loadware did not load correctly Board is faulty Replace board Flashing Off Loadware is being loaded On On Board test unsuccessful board is defective Replace board Off On Board test completed ...

Page 136: ...designations and slot assignments S30777 Q750 X CUCR connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q750 Z Figure 3 9 CUC Backplane S30777 Q750 X Figure 3 10 CUCR Backplane S30777 Q750 Z Slot 6 X40 Slot 8 X60 Slot 4 X20 Slot 7 X50 Slot 9 X70 Slot 5 X30 Slot 10 X10 Reserved PSU UPS X1 Slot 2 8 x UP0 E Slot 1 2 x S0 Slot 3 4 x T R HiPath 3750 board CUC Peripheral board CBCC Peripheral board Peri...

Page 137: ...tion Unit Point Rack S30777 Q751 Z Figure 3 12 for use in HiPath 3300 19 inch housing CUP connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q751 X CUPR connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q751 Z Figure 3 11 CUP Backplane S30777 Q751 X Figure 3 12 CUPR Backplane S30777 Q751 Z Slot 4 X20 Slot 5 X30 PSU UPS X1 CUP Slot 2 8 x UP0 E Slot 1 2 x S0 Slot 3 4 x T R Peripheral board CBCC Slo...

Page 138: ...inet receives HDLC PCM and clock signals from the basic cabinet In addition an ID signal is created which indicates the availability of an expan sion cabinet to the CBSAP Figure 3 13 DBSAP S30807 Q6722 X The cable C39195 Z7611 A10 is used as the connection cable between basic cab inet X201 jack and expansion cabinet DBSAP board To ensure smooth opera tion use only shielded cables with a maximum le...

Page 139: ...s fm P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 49 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards Figure 3 14 DBSAP on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet DBSAP ...

Page 140: ...hanging the IMODN subboard during a software upgrade IMODN loadware is au tomatically updated in V4 0 SMR 08 and later Updating the IMODN loadware takes approx 10 minutes beginning with the idle system status The red LED on the IMODN lights up repeatedly during the loading procedure IMODN is ready as soon as the green LED starts to flash If the IMODN loadware is not updated when the system is rese...

Page 141: ... Call At tempts number of connection attempts during busy traffic hours is restricted to 400 at a max imum of six TAPI ports The use of power dialers is not approved You cannot operate the LIM module and a HG 1500 board simultaneously in a HiPath 3000 RJ45 jack assignment 7 Caution The LAN interface module must not be plugged in or out when the system is ener gized Place the central control board ...

Page 142: ...ed to the grill on the backplane as shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Procedure for LAN Connection Figure 3 16 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Adapter Cable C39195 Z7213 A1 X12 X18 LIM Adapter cable C39195 Z7213 A1 see Figure 3 16 approx 300 mm CBCPR Standard patch cable see Figure 3 17 For shielding reasons the stripped part of the ca ble must be fastened to t...

Page 143: ... S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 53 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards Figure 3 17 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Attachment of the Patch Cable to the Backplane Grill ...

Page 144: ...a HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI functions LAN2 not assigned The LIMS module can be used for administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and for CTI func tions TAPI 120 V2 0 However bear in mind that the number of BHCAs Busy Hour Call At tempts number of connection attempts during busy traffic hours is restricted to 400 at a max imum of six TAPI ports The use of power dialers is not approved You canno...

Page 145: ...Path 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 55 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards RJ45 jack assignment Table 3 24 LIMS RJ45 Jack Assignment Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 146: ...ing modes cannot be combined LUNA2 supports power supply and battery management functions No other components are required if it is operated as a power supply To maintain short term battery emergency operation after a power failure that is to use uninterruptible power supply functions you must also con nect a battery pack per system cabinet or a BSG 48 38 battery cabinet including battery charg er...

Page 147: ... battery pack S30122 K5950 Y200 48 V 7 Ah and battery housing BSG 48 38 S30122 K5950 F300 Table 3 25 LUNA2 Bridging Times with Battery Pack 48 V 7 Ah and Upright Battery Housing BSG 48 38 System Power supply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time HiPath 3800 2 x LUNA2 per system cabinet as PSU 1 x LUNA2 per system cabinet as battery charger 1 x battery pack 48 V 7 Ah per sys tem cabinet 60 nomina...

Page 148: ...tolerance zone In this case a the voltage feed for LUNA2 may not be sufficient an additional LUNA2 module is required For information on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required see Page 3 62 b LUNA2 may be defective the board must be replaced Figure 3 19 LUNA2 Front Panel Switches for setting the operating mode ON OFF switch for secondary operating voltag es system supply voltages LU...

Page 149: ...NA2s during maintenance work that requires the system to be de energized for example central board replace ment The system is only in de energized state if the switches on ALL LUNA2s are set to DC OFF position The system is only restarted if all LUNA2 switches are returned to the DC ON position From a technical viewpoint there are no differences between the LUNA2 slots A LUNA2 can be used in all s...

Page 150: ... power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system cab inet shelf until you hear a click see Figure 4 19 The power supply unit slots must be covered with the outer panel shown in Figure 3 20 basic cabinet and in Figure 3 21 expansion cabinet before the system is started up Figure 3 20 LUNA2 Slots in the Basic Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted ...

Page 151: ... P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 61 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards Figure 3 21 LUNA2 Slots in the Expansion Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted ...

Page 152: ...ur peripheral boards A second LUNA2 is required for five or more peripheral boards A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundant LUNA2 b Basic cabinet with CBSAP and peripheral boards with PBXXX STMI2 SLMA and or SLCN Two LUNA2s are always required to supply a CBSAP peripheral boards and PBXXX STMI2 SLMA and or SLCN A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundan...

Page 153: ...ct connection to the HiPath 3800 communication sys tem The DC power cable S39195 A7985 B10 provided lets you connect any system cabinet to the battery cabinet do not connect to extension cables Figure 3 23 is a schematic display of the connections between the battery cabinet BSG 48 38 and HiPath 3800 For detailed information about safety precautions as well as using and connecting the battery cabi...

Page 154: ... Cabinet and HiPath 3800 DC Output 1 48 V 1 2 3 BSG 48 38 with batt set 38 Ah 48 V 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz AC input Note For reasons of clarity the system cabinets are shown sepa rately and without grounding DC connection cable DC connection cable X210 X211 X210 X211 Basic cabi net 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz X210 X211 X210 X211 Expan sion cabi net 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz X210 DC port X211 AC power HiPath 3800...

Page 155: ...nly supports 64 MB multimedia cards MMC64 MMC16 16 MB cards cannot be used The MMC is checked during system startup If the system detects an MMC16 the startup is aborted Table 3 27 Multimedia Card Models and Applications MMC Part number Applica tion in countries Application in HiPath 3000 HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3350 with CBCC HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 HiPa...

Page 156: ... 0 MMC64 64 MB S30122 X8002 X10 leere Basis MMC Welt X X X X X X X X X P30152 P1205 P2 X P30152 P1205 P1 X X X X X X X X Table 3 27 Multimedia Card Models and Applications MMC Part number Applica tion in countries Application in HiPath 3000 HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3350 with CBCC HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 HiPath 3300 with CBRC ...

Page 157: ...d A monitoring LED indicates the presence of the 5 V output voltage Technical specifications Nominal voltage range 100 VAC 240 VAC Nominal frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Ring generator 75 VAC 20 25 50 Hz Partial voltages 5 Vdc 48 V Power consumption 70 W PSUP interfaces S30122 K5658 M 7 Caution System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug Figure 3 24 PSUP Interface S30...

Page 158: ...oltage and ring frequency are set using jumpers 7 Danger RGMOD must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized In normal mode the ring generator operates with voltages ranging from 75 V to 170 V The prescribed measures for protection against high voltage must be taken when working on or close to the board When the ring generator is removed no ring tone is generated for the analog tele p...

Page 159: ...ovisional Service Manual 3 69 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards 75 Veff 50 Hz France 85 Veff 20 Hz U S Ring voltage Ring frequency Setting Standard Table 3 28 RGMOD for selected countries only Setting the Ring Voltages and Ring Fre quencies 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 160: ...Central Boards Installing RGMOD The ring generator RGMOD is plugged in on the backplane Basic cabinet When using one or more SLMA2 boards in the basic cabinet RGMOD must be plugged into the 10 pin port X214 of the basic cabinet see Figure 3 25 Figure 3 25 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Basic Cabi net X214 ...

Page 161: ... 3 71 Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Boards Expansion cabinet When using one or more SLMA2 boards in the expansion cabinet RGMOD must be plugged into the 10 pin port X214 of the expansion cabinet see Figure 3 26 Figure 3 26 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet X214 ...

Page 162: ...he UPSC D The UPSC D s internal 48 V output is de activated when the external power supply is connected Licensed battery pack S30122 K5928 X 48 V 4 x 12 V 1 2 Ah battery pack This is the only battery pack released for connection to UPSC D 7 Warning The UPSC D power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply Permanent operation at a direct current system is not allowed A DC power su...

Page 163: ...V 1 2 Ah depending on the sys tem Table 3 29 UPSC D Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122 K5928 X 48 V 1 2 Ah System Power sup ply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time HiPath 3350 UPSC D Normal output load 5 V 3 A 48 V 0 5 A ringing approx 2 VA 19 min HiPath 3550 UPSC D Normal output load 100 5 V 8 A 48 V 1 1 A ringing approx 4 VA 6 min HiPath 3550 UPSC D Normal output load 60 5 V 4 8 A 48 V ...

Page 164: ...K5660 M300 Figure 3 28 UPSC D S30122 K5660 M300 LED yellow X1 To CUC CUP 1 50 Slide switch for setting the ring frequen cy Slide switch for activating deactivating the battery voltage battery pack up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 25 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz B a t t e r y p a c k E P S U 2 P o w e r p l u g LED yellow LED green ...

Page 165: ... U S 50 Hz France Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage battery pack up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 7 Caution System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug If using an uninterruptible power supply switch off the battery voltage first Figure 3 29 UPSC D Switches...

Page 166: ...0 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 76 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Central Boards Connectors Figure 3 30 UPSC D Connectors Power plug Connector for EPSU2 Connector for battery pack ...

Page 167: ...ermanent operation at a direct current system is not allowed A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure emergency battery operation If a 48 V direct current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC power supply connection must be performed as for a battery pack The 48 V direct current system must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode during loading...

Page 168: ... 4 x 12 V 7 Ah batteries de pending on the system 7 Danger Do not use 24 V batteries S30122 K5403 X in conjunction with UPSC DR as an explosive gas hydrogen oxygen escapes when the battery is overloaded Table 3 30 UPSC DR Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah Batteries System Power sup ply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time HiPath 3300 UPSC DR Normal output load 5...

Page 169: ...t conditions All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 23 C 73 4 F The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started Figure 3 31 UPSC DR S30122 K7373 M900 Table 3 30 UPSC DR Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah Batteries System Power sup ply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time LED yellow LED green ...

Page 170: ...R installed in the ECR Slide switch for setting the ring frequen cy Slide switch for activating and deactivat ing the battery voltage batteries up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 25 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz LED yellow Battery connector as signment 48 VBatt 48 VBatt 48 V from EPSU2 R 48 V from EPSU2 R Caution The screw marked performs the...

Page 171: ... Hz U S 50 Hz France Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage batteries up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 7 Caution System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug If using an uninterruptible power supply switch off the battery voltage first Figure 3 33 UPSC DR Switche...

Page 172: ...03 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 82 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Central Boards Connectors Figure 3 34 UPSC DR Connectors Power plug Connector for batteries and EPSU2 R installed in the ECR ...

Page 173: ...related reasons there are two different UPSM models Technically identical the two models have minor mechanical dif ferences and are fully compatible with each other The only exception is the UPSM model S30122 K5950 S121 which supplies a ring voltage of 60 Veff and is only implemented in the Republic of South Africa RSA 7 Warning The UPSM power supply is only released for permanent AC power supply ...

Page 174: ... connected Battery 12 V 38 Ah S30122 X5950 F320 Four batteries necessary for each BSG 48 38 For U S only The UPSM can be installed in the following cabinets BC Expansion cabinet 1 S30777 U709 X Expansion cabinet 2 S30777 U709 X100 The UPSM can also be installed on new backplanes with re oriented CHAMP con nectors Uninterruptible power supply functions in the form of a UPSM are not used in the U S ...

Page 175: ...wer failure with battery pack S30122 K5950 Y200 48 V 7 Ah The battery recharging time is approx 8 5 h Specifications of the modular ring generator Rated output voltages 75 Vact 60 Veff in UPSM model for RSA Output frequencies 20 25 50 Hz Output power continuous 4 0 VA peak 8 0 VA temporary 3 min load 15 min break Table 3 31 UPSM Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122 K5950 Y200 48 V 7 Ah System P...

Page 176: ...y plug in or unplug the connector when in de ener gized state switch OFF Connector socket for system supply voltages AC outlet OFF ON Connector for battery pack or battery cabinet Assignment Modular ring generator Modular ring generator Ring frequency selector 20 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz 1 Contact max 100 mA closes when battery mode is ac tivated A relay connected in series can be used for signaling purpose...

Page 177: ...ctor for system supply voltages AC outlet OFF ON Modular ring genera tor ON OFF switch for secondary operating voltages system sup ply voltages Overload protection for battery mode 1 4 3 2 DIP switches for example 25 Hz Off On Modular ring generator Ring frequency selector DIP switch settings S4 used for factory testing 1 2 3 4 Frequency On Off Off 20 Hz Off On Off 25 Hz Off Off On 50 Hz Connector...

Page 178: ...iPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 com munication system The DC power cable S30122 X5950 F310 provided lets you connect any UPSM to the battery cabinet do not connect to extension cables A schematic diagram shows the connections between the BSG 48 38 battery cabinet and the communication system UP SM Figure 3 38 For detailed information about safety precautions as well as using and connecting the battery ...

Page 179: ...can be used for signaling purposes for example UPSM 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz UPSM UPSM Expansion cabi net 2 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz DC Output 1 48 V 1 2 3 BSG 48 38 with batt set 38 Ah 48 V 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz AC input HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 For reasons of clarity the cabinets are shown separately and without grounding to UPSM to BSG 48 38 DC connection cable S30122 X5950 F310 DC c...

Page 180: ...art number S30124 X5166 X and two slide in shelves for the Embedded Appli cation Server EAS CSAPE is required when using HiPath All in One applications Information about the supported applications can be found in the HiPath All in One product documentation Installation of the cPCI box CSAPE in the system is a purely mechanical operation There is no electrical connection between the system and the ...

Page 181: ...3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 91 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Front panel Figure 3 39 CSAPE S30807 U6630 X Fan drawer AC power supply unit ACPCI Slide in shelves for the Embed ded Application Server EAS Fan drawer ...

Page 182: ...0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Slot Figure 3 40 shows the slot for the cPCI box CSAPE in the basic cabinet Please refer to Special board attachments for installation information Figure 3 40 HiPath 3800 Board Slots in the Basic Cabinet ...

Page 183: ...er optic cable is only connected via the front panel The opto electronic converter AMOM must be used to connect a fiber optic cable to the 15 pin Sub D jacks on the front panel Copper cable The copper cable is connected to T1 CSU Customer Service Unit or DSU Data Service Unit via the adapter cable C39195 A7269 B625 shown in Figure 3 41 Adapter cable C39195 A7269 B625 Figure 3 41 DIU2U Adapter Cabl...

Page 184: ...ire R transmit blu wht 15 41 a wire T receive wht ora 8 16 b wire R receive ora wht Figure 3 42 DIU2U for U S only Front Panel S30810 Q2216 X Table 3 32 DIU2U for U S only adapter cable assignment C39195 A7269 B625 15 pin Sub D connector pin 50 pin Amphenol connector pin Function Color code Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED red Interface 2 Interface 1 ...

Page 185: ...eiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi ...

Page 186: ...s 3 3 3 DIUN2 Introduction The DIUN2 Digital Interface Unit ISDN provides 2 x 30 B channels voice channels for HiPath 3800 These are used for the S2M trunk connection via NT for S2M networking via S2M lines In HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and later the B channels in the DIUN2 board are subject to license Information on licensing can be found in Chapter 8 ...

Page 187: ... HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 97 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Front panel Figure 3 43 DIUN2 Front Panel S30810 Q2196 X Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED red Interface 2 Interface 1 ...

Page 188: ... LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated n...

Page 189: ... for the 5 V power supply Input output 6 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Input 7 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Input 8 RTIP0 a wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Input 9 TRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Output 10 5 V 5 V power supply Output 11 LWLI0_FRONT Fibre optic data input Input 12 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 14 5 V 5 V power supply Output 15 RRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Input No other pins...

Page 190: ...based management WBM which enables the administra tion of HG 1500 without any special software requirements For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500 see Section 2 6 8 Board versions Eight simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP Digital Signal Processor A combination of up to eight HXGM3 boards can be used per system but the follow ing restri...

Page 191: ...board has three HGA HiPath Gateway Accelerator slots which can be used to connect the extension modules Table 3 38 HXGM3 Extension Modules Extension module Part number Function Notes PDM1 PMC DSP modules S30807 Q5692 X100 Used for expansion for an additional eight DSP channels Up to two PDM1 modules per HXGM3 Installed at HGA slots 0 and 2 only Figure 3 44 HXGM3 S30810 Q2942 X ...

Page 192: ...connector SU Xx8 or SU Xx9 for a LAN connection The LAN ca ble is connected via the RJ45 socket of the adapter For U S only The LAN connection is made using a special adapter cable CHAMP in ac cordance with RJ45 see Figure 3 47 Both LAN interfaces allow access to the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration Manual configuration is also possible Figure 3 45...

Page 193: ...g H1 green Off Board is active but there are no active calls On At least one call is active H0 red On Error Flashing Start after a restart Transmission rate 19 200 Data bits 8 Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Data flow control None It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC Table 3 40 HXGM3 Assignment of V 24 Interface X10 Pin Signal I O Remark 1 2 RxD I Intern...

Page 194: ...RJ45 jack Signal B1 1 TDP Transmit Data C2 2 TDN Transmit Data B3 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 C4 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 B5 3 RDP Receive Data C6 6 RDN Receive Data B7 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 C8 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 Signals TT1 2 and RT1 2 are not needed for transmitting data They represent a signal termi nation of 100 ohms so called Bob Smith termination for the two unused wire p...

Page 195: ...y CHAMP connec tor RJ45 jack Signal LAN connection 34 1 TDP Transmit Data LAN 2 35 2 TDN Transmit Data 36 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 37 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 38 3 RDP Receive Data 39 6 RDN Receive Data 40 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 41 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 42 1 TDP Transmit Data LAN 1 43 2 TDN Transmit Data 44 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 45 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 46 3 RDP Re...

Page 196: ...administra tion of HG 1500 without any special software requirements For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500 see Section 2 6 8 Up to three boards can be used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 To support this maximum configuration slot 10 board in HiPath 3750 format must remain free A maximum of one board is permitted in HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300 Two HG 1500 boa...

Page 197: ... can be used to connect extension modules Table 3 43 HXGS3 HXGR3 Board Versions Board Part number Services DSPs B channels DSP channels HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Voice and Data 1 8 HXGR3 S30810 K2943 Z Voice and Data 1 8 When using the extension module PDM1 the number of DSP channels for HXGS3 and HXGR3 boards can be expanded by eight per board Table 3 44 HXGS3 HXGR3 Extension Modules Extension module ...

Page 198: ...for HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 108 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Figure 3 48 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Figure 3 49 HXGR3 S30810 K2943 Z ...

Page 199: ...tor edge connector to the system X2 8 pin RJ45 jack for LAN interface 1 X3 8 pin RJ45 jack for LAN interface 2 Both LAN interfaces allow access to the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration Manual configuration is also possible X4 9 pin Sub D plug for V 24 interface Figure 3 50 HXGS3 HXGR3 Interfaces HGA slot 1 HGA slot 0 V 24 interface X4 LAN connectors...

Page 200: ...nd X3 Pin of RJ45 con nector Signal 1 1 TDP Transmit Data 3 2 TDN Transmit Data 4 3 RDP Receive Data 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 6 6 RDN Receive Data 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 Signals TT1 2 and RT1 2 are not needed for transmitting data They represent a signal termi nation of 100 ohms so called Bob Smith termination for the two unused wir...

Page 201: ...onnected to the V 24 interface Transmission rate 19 200 Data bits 8 Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Data flow control None It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC Table 3 46 HXGS3 HXGR3 Assignment of V 24 Interface X10 Pin Signal I O Remark 1 2 RxD I Internal pull up resistor in level switch MAX211E 3 TxD O 4 DTR O 5 0 V Ground 6 DSR I Internal pull up resi...

Page 202: ...ep Activity 1 Disconnect system from power supply Caution System voltage can only be switched off by taking out the power plug Switch off the battery voltage first for an uninterruptible power supply 2 Open the system Warning Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which can cause cuts see Section 4 4 3 4 Removing the Sy...

Page 203: ... fm P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 113 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Figure 3 51 HXGS3 Installation of the Fan Kit in HiPath 3550 B A ...

Page 204: ...00 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 114 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Figure 3 52 HXGS3 Securing Clips for Fan Kit Figure 3 53 HXGS3 Connection of the Fan Kit C D ...

Page 205: ...on see the manual for the product see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Electronic Documenta tion on Com ESY Products A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 is permitted for each HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 This board may only be inserted into the slot beside the power supply in the basic cabinet or in the expansion cabinets Furthermore the ferrite bead C39022 Z7000 C7 included with the board must...

Page 206: ...Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 54 IVML8 and IVML24 Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 207: ...nnections are locked The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 55 IVML8 IVML24 S30122 X7380 X100 X LE...

Page 208: ...eck whether the board was deactivated using Hi Path 3000 Manager E or lockout switch Off Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test start of the application de pending on hard disk status lasts approx 3 8 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error occurred Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch During Operatio...

Page 209: ...Xx9 SIPAC 1 SU connector Only shielded cables may be used for the LAN connector RJ45 jack Figure 3 56 LAN Adapter SIPAC 1 SU RJ45 Table 3 48 LAN Adapter Assignment SIPAC 1 SU RJ45 SIPAC 1 SU jack RJ45 jack Signal B1 1 TDP Transmit Data C2 2 TDN Transmit Data B3 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 1 1 Not used in 4 wire cable C4 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 1 B5 3 RDP Receive Data C6 6 RDN Receive Data B7...

Page 210: ... Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Electronic Documenta tion on Com ESY Products The Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface in the front panel of the boards allows HiPath Xpressions Compact administration fast APS transfer backup and restore activities HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPa...

Page 211: ...s Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 57 IVMNL IVMN8 Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 212: ...3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Front panel Figure 3 58 IVMNL IVMN8 Front Panel S30122 H7688 X X100 Lockout switch Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED yellow Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface 8 pin RJ45 jack ...

Page 213: ...both LEDs flash for approximately five seconds in confirmation LED statuses and their meanings Table 3 49 IVMNL IVMN8 LED Statuses LED Red Green LED Meaning Action During Startup and Initialization Off Off 1 Boot procedure lasts approx 8 12 s On On 2 LED test lasts approx 10 s On Off 3 Lockout switch state signaling by red LED lasts approx 5 s blocked On free Off Possibly check if board was de act...

Page 214: ...00 ms Lockout switch activated during a call On Off Board locked or board error occurred Check whether board was deacti vated using HiPath 3000 Manag er E or lockout switch Table 3 50 IVMNL IVMN8 RJ45 Jack Assignment Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used Table 3 49 IVMNL IVMN8 LED Statuses LED Red Green LED Meaning ...

Page 215: ...nts in V5 0 or later In addition the boards have an Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface which can be used for HiPath Xpressions Compact administration fast APS transfer backup and restore activities For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Electronic Documenta tion on Com ESY Products Only...

Page 216: ...g protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 59 IVMP8 and IVMP8R not for U S Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 217: ...ED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 60 IVMP8 IVMP8R S30122 Q7379 X100 K7379 Z100 not for U S 2 50 X1 con ne...

Page 218: ...10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 The signals are output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2 Table 3 51 IVMP8 and IVMP8R not for U S Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Con nector RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description Printed Circuit Con nector X2 Pin 1 Tx Transmit 1 2 Tx Transmit 3 3 Rx Receive 7 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 9 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 219: ...ibly check if board was de activated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch Off Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test start of the applica tion depending on hard disk status lasts approx 3 8 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was de activated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch During Operatio...

Page 220: ...net 10 100BaseT interface which can be used for HiPath Xpressions Compact administration fast APS transfer backup and restore activities For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Electronic Documenta tion on Com ESY Products Only one IVMS8 or IVMS8R may be installed per system For ther...

Page 221: ...Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 61 IVMS8 and IVMS8R Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 222: ... LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 62 IVMS8 and IVMS8R S30122 Q7379 X K7379 Z 2 50 X1 con nection to CUC...

Page 223: ... HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 133 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Front view of IVMS8R Figure 3 63 IVMS8R Front View S30122 K7379 Z X3 LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack LED yellow LED green Lockout switch ...

Page 224: ...ernet 10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 The signals are output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2 Table 3 53 IVMS8 and IVMS8R Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Connector RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description Printed Circuit Con nector X2 Pin 1 Tx Transmit 1 2 Tx Transmit 3 3 Rx Receive 7 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 9 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 225: ...eck if board was de activated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch Off Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test start of the applica tion depending on hard disk sta tus lasts approx 3 8 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was deac tivated using HiPath 3000 Man ager E or lockout switch During Operation Off...

Page 226: ...lled in a cabinet Administration of the CAS protocol converter Use the ECGM tool for administration For information on installing the software on the service PC and on the required settings see Page 3 293 The C39195 Z7267 C2 cable can be used with a C39334 Z7080 C2 adapter 9 pin Sub D jack 25 pin Sub D jack to connect the PBXXX port M and the service PC Notes on setup using HiPath 3000 Manager E B...

Page 227: ... Service Manual 3 137 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Front panel Figure 3 64 PBXXX S30810 Q6401 X for selected countries only Front Panel Seven segment display Port A not used Port B not used Port C not used Port D not used Port M for connecting the service PC with the ECGM tool ...

Page 228: ...BXXX software download Starting the PBXXX software download PBXXX software download Writing the PBXXX software extender software to the flash memory Loading the PBXXX software extender software from the flash memory Waiting for ECGM command 10 s Error while writing the software to flash memory No software in the flash memory waiting for reload Flash memory erased changing display PBXXX card active...

Page 229: ...onnection 1x DIUN2 1 x PBXXX The figure below shows an example of a DIUN2 with PBXXX in the basic cabinet Figure 3 65 HiPath 3800 Basic Cabinet 1x DIUN2 1 x PBXXX Connection cable DIUN2 PBXXX C39195 A7700 B7 Note The cable must run under the cabinet The CAS cable is connected to the backplane using an APPCU adapter see Figure 3 66 Cable to service PC ...

Page 230: ...re 3 66 PBXXX for selected countries only Connecting the CAS Cable Using the APPCU Adapter The backplane of the PBXXX board must be closed with the adapter panels provided C39165 A7050 C35 Figure 3 67 Connection cable DIUN2 PBXXX C39195 A7700 B7 APPCU adapter S30807 K5415 X on the backplane CAS cable connection see Assigning both CAS cables on page 3 144 ...

Page 231: ...1003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 141 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Figure 3 67 PBXXX for selected countries only Adapter Panel C39165 A7050 C35 ...

Page 232: ...tion 1x DIUN2 2 x PBXXX The figure below shows an example of a DIUN2 with two PBXXXs in the basic cabinet Figure 3 68 HiPath 3800 Basic Cabinet 1x DIUN2 2 x PBXXX Connection cable DIUN2 PBXXX C39195 A7700 B7 Note The cables must run under the cabinet The CAS cables are connected to the backplane using two APPCU adapters see Figure 3 69 Cable to service PC ...

Page 233: ...3 69 PBXXX for selected countries only Connecting the CAS Cable Using Two APPCU Adapters The backplane of both PBXXX boards must be closed with the adapter panels pro vided C39165 A7050 C35 Figure 3 67 Connection cable DIUN2 PBXXX C39195 A7700 B7 APPCU adapter S30807 K5415 X on the backplane CAS cable connections see Assigning both CAS cables on page 3 144 ...

Page 234: ...open end coaxial line 75 ohms Table 3 56 Assigning the CAS cable S30267 Z167 A100 15 pin Sub D connector Pin Function Color code 9 a wire T transmit wht blu 1 b wire R transmit blu wht 15 a wire T receive wht ora 8 b wire R receive ora wht Table 3 57 Assigning the CAS cable S30267 Z80 A100 15 pin Sub D connector Pin Function Wire 15 a wire T receive BNC line cable 1 8 b wire R receive BNC shield c...

Page 235: ...s not for U S SLA16N 16 analog interfaces SLA24N 24 analog interfaces can be used in HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700 Switches and LEDs The operating mode short or long line with the appropriate flash times can be set up for each subscriber line interface with HiPath 3000 Manager E the menu Settings Set up station Station Parameters Flags Figure 3 70 SLA8N not for U S SLA16N SLA24N S30810 Q...

Page 236: ... is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully complet ed Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated us...

Page 237: ... 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used in SLA8N brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk b...

Page 238: ...wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 not used in SLA8N SLA16N brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20b 5 13 blk grn 15 21a Port 2...

Page 239: ...Port 4 4 4a brn wht 46 4b 29 4b 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5a gry wht 45 5b 30 5b 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6 6a blu red 44 6b 31 6b 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7 7a ora red 43 7b 32 7b 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8 8a grn red 42 8b 33 8b 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9 9a brn red 31 9b 34 9b 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10 10a gry red 22 10b 35 10b 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11 11a blu blk 33 11b 36 11b 12 blk ora 04 12a ...

Page 240: ...b 19 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 11 11a blu blk 33 19b 36 11b 20 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 12 12a ora blk 24 20b 37 12b 21 blk grn 15 21a Port 21 13 13a grn blk 35 21b 38 13b 22 blk brn 06 22a Port 22 14 14a brn blk 26 22b 39 14b 23 blk gry 17 23a Port 23 15 15a gry blk 37 23b 40 15b 24 yel blu 08 24a Port 24 16 16a blu yel 28 24b 41 16b Table 3 61 SLA16N SLA24N Assignment SU Xx8 Xx9 For U S Only a Wire T...

Page 241: ...nnection conditions Maximum supply current approximately 34 mA maximum supply voltage approximately 40 Vdc Ring voltage against negative supply voltage a wire tip RING two telephones maximum Range see Section 2 8 Loop current detection 10 mA Ground button detection 20 mA The transmission method can be configured country specifically by entering the country code ...

Page 242: ...racy for HiPath Cordless Office Install the plug in CMS subboard on the CBCPR board HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 or the plug in CMA or CMS subboard on the CBCC board for HiPath 3550 to ensure clock accuracy see Table 11 1 For initial installation of the HiPath Cordless Office the HiPath cordless system num ber DECT ID must be ordered together with the SLC16N board Replacement boards are always deli...

Page 243: ... blocked Ac tive mobile telephones are not locked until their release keys are pressed Before unplugging the SLC16N board always activate the lockout switch and wait until green LED stops flashing This precaution ensures that none of the mobile tele phones are active Table 3 62 SLC16N Not for U S LED Statuses Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in corre...

Page 244: ...e board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi Path 3000 Manager E If not replace board Flashing Off Loadware is being loaded Off On Board test completed successfully Board is OK idle state Off Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is ...

Page 245: ...gry 05 5a Access 5 5a 4 BS x UP0 E port x gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Access 6 6a 4 BS x UP0 E port x blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Access 7 7a 4 BS x UP0 E port x ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Access 8 8a 4 BS x UP0 E port x grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Access 9 9a 4 BS x UP0 E port x brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Access 10 10a 4 BS x UP0 E port x gry red 22 10b 10...

Page 246: ...p to two SLC16s or SLC16Ns can be installed in the basic cabinet Sixteen BS3 1s or eight BS2 2s and BS3 3s can also be connected Expansion cabinets EC1 and EC2 The four SLC16s or SLC16Ns can be installed in a single expansion cabinet And up to sixteen BS3 1s or eight BS2 2s and BS3 3s can be connected per SLC16N To avoid overloading the power supply when operating four SLC16s or SLC16Ns in a singl...

Page 247: ... For distances of up to 1000 m at 2x0 6 mm between the SLC16N and base station the BS2 2 and BS3 3 must each be connected via two UP0 E interfaces Only one UP0 E inter face is required for BS3 1 base stations Table 3 64 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Maximum Number of SLA24N and SLMO24 User Groups Depending on the Number of Base Stations Connected at SLC16N Not for U S HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Number of S...

Page 248: ...d to the system Table 3 65 through Table 3 67 show which telephone configurations work without ad ditional power supply Table 3 65 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 1 Base Stations Connected to SLC16N and BS4 connect ed to SLC16N not for U S Number of BS3 1s and BS4s connectedvia 1xUP0 E to SLC16N Maximum number of corded telephones analog telephones 0 ...

Page 249: ...0 46 41 2 58 53 49 45 40 36 3 53 48 44 40 35 31 4 47 43 39 34 30 26 5 42 38 33 29 25 20 6 37 33 28 24 20 15 7 32 27 23 19 14 10 8 27 22 18 13 9 5 Table 3 67 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 3 Base Stations Connected to SLC16N and BS4 connect ed to SLC16N not for U S Number of BS3 3s and BS4s connectedvia2xUP0 E to SLC16N Maximum number of corded teleph...

Page 250: ... The following options are available for supplying power to the base stations Power supply via one UP0 E interface Page 3 161 Power supply via two UP0 E interfaces Page 3 162 Power supply via three UP0 E interfaces Page 3 163 for BS3 3 only If the power supplied by the UPSC D HiPath 3550 is insufficient additional power can be sup plied by installing the external power supply EPSU2 Page 3 163 Sign...

Page 251: ...ply via one UP0 E interface Connect the base station to a free interface on SLC16N as shown in Figure 3 72 Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths 1000 m for 2x0 6 mm Figure 3 72 Base Station Power Supply via One UP0 E Interface Not for U S a b 1 CABLU MDFU MDFU E 1 2 UP0 E BS3 1 for in doors Splitting strip HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3700 SLC16N ...

Page 252: ...wo free interfaces on SLC16N as shown in Figure 3 73 Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths 1000 m for 2x0 6 mm Using two UP0 E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in BS2 2 and BS3 3 base stations Figure 3 73 Base Station Power Supply via Two UP0 E Interfaces Not for U S a b 1 CABLU MDFU MDFU E 2 3 4 5 UP0 E1 UP0 E2 BS2 2 or BS3 3 for indoors Splitting strip HiPath 375...

Page 253: ... EPSU2 To do this connect the DC port on the EPSU2 to the special DC input on the UPSC D As described on the preceding pages the base stations must be connected to one BS3 1 or two BS2 2 and BS3 3 or three BS3 3 free UP0 E interfaces on SLC16N If you need an additional external power supply for the 19 inch housing in HiPath 3500 or Hi Path 3300 you should use the EPSU2 R power supply This is insta...

Page 254: ...nal power supply EPSU2 comes in two versions S30122 K7221 X1 This version is always supplied with four built in batteries These bat teries guarantee approx 30 minutes of bridging time in the event of a power failure S30122 K7221 X2 This version is supplied without batteries To use this model s uninter ruptible power supply function four batteries must be ordered separately and installed The new EP...

Page 255: ...3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 165 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Figure 3 75 EPSU2 Indicators and Ports Housing cover AC port for 100 240 Vac DC port for UPSC D Note polarity Mounting screws LED 1 LED 2 Battery fuse ...

Page 256: ...y fuse Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm 2 5 A slow blowing AC port input IEC 320 16 grounding power cable IEC DC port output Screw terminal connections for insulated lines 0 5 2 5 mm2 56 V 140 W EPSU2 S30122 K7221 X1 2 wire power cable to UPSC D pre installed soldered ends Note polarity EPSU2 S30122 K7221 X2 2 wire power cable to UPSC D with Phoenix terminal block Table 3 69 EPSU2 Technical Specifications E...

Page 257: ...load protection CSB EVX 1270 Hitachi HP6 5 12 Yuasa NP6 12 Varta Noack 43720303 Sonnenschein 0719143200 Panasonic LCR12 7P 4 units 12 V each 7 Ah 48 V fully charged 54 V discharge to 44 V Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm 2 5 A slow blowing Nominal current 2 5 A Overload protection Electronic current limiting circuit Ambient temperature In buildings 5 to 45 C 41 to 113 F Humidity 95 non condensing Cooling Na...

Page 258: ... Do not block the ven tilation holes When selecting the location keep in mind the necessary lengths of the following cables AC cable grounding plug IEC 320 socket DC cable to UPSC D length 2 m Procedure EPSU2 wall mounting Step Activity 1 Drill two holes for anchors 5 mm in diameter in the wall as shown in Figure 3 76 Depending on the wall materials you may have to use a different kind of attach m...

Page 259: ...ll up to four SLCN boards in one system Chapter 11 contains basic information on the options available for operating HiPath Cordless Office Base stations must be clocked with a high degree of accuracy for HiPath Cordless Office For this the subboard CMS must be plugged into the CBSAP board see Table 11 1 Front panel Figure 3 77 SLCN S30810 Q2193 X300 LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient sh...

Page 260: ...ing power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test l...

Page 261: ...b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Port 12 12a ora blk 27 12b ...

Page 262: ...ards fm Peripheral Boards Table 3 72 SLCN Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLCN Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 263: ... 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 173 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards 17 4 Free 5 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 72 SLCN Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLCN Notes No Pin ...

Page 264: ... 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11a 4 blu blk 33 11b 11b 5...

Page 265: ...SLCN boards Supplying power to base stations Power is supplied to the base stations primarily via the internal PSU in the system in question If the correct number of LUNA2 modules was calculated the system s internal power supply unit provides sufficient power to supply the HiPath Cordless Office system configuration spec ified in Table 11 1 To guarantee uninterrupted operation of the HiPath 3800 ...

Page 266: ...0810 Q2191 C100 eight analog T R interfaces The boards generate their own ring voltages and do not require an external ring generator Front panel For Australia only The ring voltage is 35 Veff Depending on the terminals connect ed we cannot exclude the possibility of errors occurring during ringing state Figure 3 78 SLMA SLMA8 LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the boar...

Page 267: ...D Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deacti...

Page 268: ... wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a Not used in SLMA8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Port 12 12a ...

Page 269: ...rn yel 46 18b 18b 19 yel brn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b Table 3 75 SLMA SLMA8 SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane Pair a Wire Tip b Wi...

Page 270: ...ral Boards Table 3 76 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a Not used for SLMA8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 271: ...ce Manual 3 181 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards 17 4 17a Not used for SLMA8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 76 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes No Pin ...

Page 272: ... 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 Not used in SLMA8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 14 1...

Page 273: ... SLMA8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 77 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack For U S Only CHAMP jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes ...

Page 274: ... 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used in SLMA8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11a 4 blu b...

Page 275: ... wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 Not used in SLMA8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20b 5 13 blk grn 15 21a Port 2...

Page 276: ...oltages RGMOD is plugged in on the backplane of the basic and or expansion cabinet The ring voltage and ring frequency are set using jumpers Front panel A system cabinet can be fitted with a mix of SLMA SLMA8 and SLMA2 boards RG MOD has no effect on SLMA and SLMA8 as these boards generate their own ring voltage Figure 3 79 SLMA2 S30810 Q2246 X for selected countries only LED s on the Front Panel T...

Page 277: ...uses Red LED Green LED Status Action off off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board on off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Boar...

Page 278: ... 3 wht grn 5 3a port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 bl...

Page 279: ...8 18a grn yel 46 18b 18b 19 yel brn 47 19a port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b Table 3 81 SLMA2 for selected countries only SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the ...

Page 280: ...ral Boards Table 3 82 SLMA2 for selected countries only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA2 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 281: ...ice Manual 3 191 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards 17 4 17a 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 82 SLMA2 for selected countries only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA2 Notes No Pin ...

Page 282: ... 2a 2 Ring port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring port 9 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 14 14...

Page 283: ... TIP 18 18a 18 Ring port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 83 SLMA2 for selected countries only Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jacks U S only CHAMP jack SLMA2 Notes ...

Page 284: ... 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 11a port 11 11a 4 blu ...

Page 285: ... 2 wht ora free ora wht 3 wht grn free grn wht 4 wht brn free brn wht 5 wht gry free gry wht 2 6 red blu free blu red 7 red ora free ora red 8 red grn free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a port 17 17a 4 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a port 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20b 5 13 blk grn 15 21a port ...

Page 286: ...ber Line Module Optiset provide UP0 E interfaces for use in HiPath 3800 SLMO2 S30810 Q2168 X10 24 UP0 E interfaces SLMO8 S30810 Q2168 X100 eight UP0 E interfaces Front panel Figure 3 80 SLMO2 SLMO8 LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 2 5 2 Two LEDs indicating the board status ...

Page 287: ...LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deac...

Page 288: ...4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a Not used in SLMO8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Port 12 12a...

Page 289: ...n yel 46 18b 18b 19 yel brn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b Table 3 87 SLMO2 SLMO8 SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane Pair a Wire Tip b Wi...

Page 290: ...al Boards Table 3 88 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a Not used for SLMO8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 291: ...e Manual 3 201 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards 17 4 17a Not used for SLMO8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 88 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes No Pin ...

Page 292: ... 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 Not used for SLMO8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 14 ...

Page 293: ... SLMO8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 89 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack For U S Only CHAMP jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes ...

Page 294: ...b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used in SLMO8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11a 4 blu ...

Page 295: ... wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 Not used in SLMO8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20b 5 13 blk grn 15 21a Port 2...

Page 296: ... SLMO24 Introduction The SLMO8 and SLMO24 Subscriber Line Module Cost Optimized UP0 E boards provide 8 and 24 connections for connecting optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones to HiPath 3750 Hi Path 3550 and HiPath 3700 Switches and LEDs Figure 3 81 SLMO8 Not for U S SLMO24 S30810 Q2901 X100 S30810 Q2901 X H1 green H2 red LEDs Lockout switch S1 position free factory default ...

Page 297: ...ing power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi Pat...

Page 298: ...rn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Access 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Access 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Access 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Access 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Access 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Access 9 9a 4 Not used in SLMO8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Access 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu ...

Page 299: ... grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Access 17 17a 4 Not used in SLMO8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Access 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Access 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Access 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20b 5 13 blk grn 15 21a Access 21 21a 4 g...

Page 300: ...4 4a brn wht 46 4b 29 4b 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5a gry wht 45 5b 30 5b 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6 6a blu red 44 6b 31 6b 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7 7a ora red 43 7b 32 7b 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8 8a grn red 42 8b 33 8b 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9 9a brn red 31 9b 34 9b 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10 10a gry red 22 10b 35 10b 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11 11a blu blk 33 11b 36 11b 12 blk ora 04 12a Port 12...

Page 301: ...9 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 11 11a blu blk 33 19b 36 11b 20 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 12 12a ora blk 24 20b 37 12b 21 blk grn 15 21a Port 21 13 13a grn blk 35 21b 38 13b 22 blk brn 06 22a Port 22 14 14a brn blk 26 22b 39 14b 23 blk gry 17 23a Port 23 15 15a gry blk 37 23b 40 15b 24 yel blu 08 24a Port 24 16 16a blu yel 28 24b 41 16b Table 3 95 SLMO24 Assignment SU Xx8 Xx9 For U S Only a Wire Tip b Wire ...

Page 302: ...connected in host client operation master slave operation Interfaces Figure 3 82 SLU8 Interfaces S30817 Q922 A301 7 Caution After deactivating the power supply you must wait a short while before plugging the SLU8 in or out If you do not wait before doing so the CBCC CBCP may be dam aged Table 3 96 SLU8 Contact Assignments Contact X2 UPo E ports 1 4 X3 UP0 E ports 5 8 1 a 1 a 5 2 b 1 b 5 3 a 2 a 6 ...

Page 303: ...ting optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch housing Interfaces Figure 3 83 SLU8R Interfaces S30817 K922 Z301 Table 3 97 SLU8R Contact Assignments MW8 jack X2 pin UP0 E ports 1 4 MW8 jack X2 pin UP0 E ports 5 8 1 14 a 1 5 54 a 5 15 b 1 55 b 5 2 24 a 2 6 64 a 6 25 b 2 65 b 6 3 34 a 3 7 74 a 7 35 b 3 75 b 7 4 44 a 4 8 84 a 8 45 b 4 85 b 8 UP0 E ports 1 8 8 pin M...

Page 304: ...unk interfaces or as subscriber line interfaces see Page 3 216 The STLS2 is an underequipped variant with two S0 ports Interfaces The board does not supply terminals with power Power must be supplied locally us ing a local plug in power supply or a bus power supply unit for example Figure 3 84 STLS2 Not for U S STLS4 Interfaces S30817 Q924 B313 A313 Not in STLS2 X1 50 2 X2 STLS2 STLS4 1 2 3 4 S0 p...

Page 305: ...e For information see Figure 3 88 The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply The system assigns the MSN only after the S0 port is configured on the Euro bus not for U S and can be read out via the administration Assistant T Code 20 4 3 S0 Bus MSN Table 3 98 STLS4 Module Interface Assignments For U S Only Pin Port Assignment Pin Port Assignment 2 1 Signal transmit 2 3 Signal transmit...

Page 306: ...Use the S0 interface S01 for connection to the public telecommunications network ISDN trunk You can also connect S0 interfaces S02 to S04 to the ISDN trunk or to ISDN terminals ISDN telephone group 4 fax device PC dialing aid via an S0 bus The connection networking to HiPath 3000 and HiPath 4000 CorNet NQ can also be set up via S0 interfaces S01 to S04 S0 connection options Point to point PP defau...

Page 307: ...first free station number in the system The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN without an outgoing sei zure Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini Western jack not for U S S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLS board s Mini Western jack via the cable supplied You must first install a jack with cross connected cables see Figure 3 86 If no MSN is entered in the terminal a d...

Page 308: ...eration you must cross the SR and SX wires be fore the first jack UAE connector Additional power supply 230 V Mini Western through jack MW8 8 pin SR 1 Receive 5 SX 1 Transmit 3 SX 2 Transmit 6 SR 2 Receive 4 1st Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 2nd to 8th Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 100 Ω 0 25 W Terminating resistor in last jack System S01 to S04 twisted pair 8 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 SX SX SR SR Not crossed in ...

Page 309: ...Figure 3 88 Contact is always established using the center pins of MW jacks Figure 3 87 shows the pin assignments for jacks of different sizes The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply Plug the ISDN terminal connecting cord into the MW jack Connecting an ISDN S0 telephone requires a local power supply e g manufactured by Sedlbauer Pin Assignment of MW Jacks Figure 3 87 MWxx Jack Pi...

Page 310: ... 8 pin Cross the transmit and receive wires from the STLS port not required in S0 bus from ISDN adapter 8 7 4 1 2 6 3 5 8 7 4 1 2 6 3 5 6 4 1 3 5 2 STLS port in system 6 8 7 4 1 3 5 2 100 ohms 0 25 W Terminating resistor in last jack Last device jack 8 pin MW8 0 ABC DEF MNO GHI PQRS TUV 123 456 789 0 ABC DEF MNO JKL GHI PQRS TUV WXYZ optiset E ISDN adapter Device jacks 1 to 7 8 pin MW8 Device jack...

Page 311: ...d either as external trunk interfaces in TE terminal equipment mode or as internal S0 buses PMP bus in NT net work terminator mode with cross connected RX TX lines Interfaces The board does not supply terminals with power In this case power must be sup plied locally using a local plug in power supply or a bus power supply unit for exam ple Figure 3 89 STLS4R Interfaces S30817 K924 Z313 X1 50 2 X2 ...

Page 312: ...13 S0 port 1 transmit 14 S0 port 1 receive 15 S0 port 1 receive 16 S0 port 1 transmit 2 23 S0 port 2 transmit 24 S0 port 2 receive 25 S0 port 2 receive 26 S0 port 2 transmit 3 33 S0 port 3 transmit 34 S0 port 3 receive 35 S0 port 3 receive 36 S0 port 3 transmit 4 43 S0 port 4 transmit 44 S0 port 4 receive 45 S0 port 4 receive 46 S0 port 4 transmit Refer to Page 3 216 for information on connecting ...

Page 313: ...Path 3350 STLSX2 S30810 Q2944 X100 two S0 basic rate accesses for use in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 STLSX4R Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX Rack S30810 K2944 Z four S0 basic rate accesses for use in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 These are operated either as external trunk interfaces in TE terminal equipment mode or as internal S0 buses PMP bus in NT network terminator mode with cross connecte...

Page 314: ... X2 Pin S0 port 31 1 Not for STLSX2 X2 Pin S0 port 41 11 21 31 41 12 22 32 42 13 Transmit 23 Transmit 33 Transmit 43 Transmit 14 Receive 24 Receive 34 Receive 44 Receive 15 Receive 25 Receive 35 Receive 45 Receive 16 Transmit 26 Transmit 36 Transmit 46 Transmit 17 27 37 47 18 28 38 48 CUP CUC for STLSX2 STLSX4 CUPR CUCR for STLSX4R X2 X1 50 2 4 S0 ports MW8 RJ45 jacks 11 48 S0 port 1 S0 port 4 8 1...

Page 315: ...nnection with HiPath ProCenter Office HPCO H300 Optimized for interconnection with HiPath 4000 Direct or fixed connection defines the type of connection for a network and controls the supply of clock pulses Direct Communication systems are connected to one another by means of a direct cable connection The master system supplies the reference clock pulse for the net worked system Fixed connection C...

Page 316: ...SN is the first free station number in the system The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN without an outgoing sei zure Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini Western jack S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLSX board s Mini Western jack via the ca ble supplied You must first install a jack with cross connected cables see Figure 3 86 If no MSN is entered in the terminal a d...

Page 317: ...on you must cross the SR and SX wires be fore the first jack UAE connector Additional power supply 230 V Mini Western through jack MW8 8 pin SR 1 Receive 5 SX 1 Transmit 3 SX 2 Transmit 6 SR 2 Receive 4 1st Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 2nd to 8th Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 100 Ω 0 25 W Terminating resistor in last jack System S01 to S04 twisted pair 8 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 SX SX SR SR Not crossed in TA S0...

Page 318: ... eight Terminal Equipment Identifiers TEI is limited to approximately 60 m If longer cables are required the S0 bus type must be set to Long in HiPath 3000 Manager E developer mode This provides a range of approximately 160 m This set ting can be made in V5 0 SMR 05 5 CV or later Figure 3 93 STMD3 S30810 Q2217 X10 LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shie...

Page 319: ...ED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deact...

Page 320: ... wht brn 7 2Sa 4a brn wht 8 2Sb 4b 5 wht gry 9 3Ea Basic rate access 3 5a gry wht 10 3Eb 5b 6 red blu 11 3Sa 6a blu red 12 3Sb 6b 7 red ora 13 4Ea Basic rate access 4 7a ora red 14 4Eb 7b 8 red grn 15 4Sa 8a grn red 16 4Sb 8b 9 red brn 17 5Ea Basic rate access 5 9a brn red 18 5Eb 9b 10 red gry 19 5Sa 10a gry red 20 5Sb 10b 11 blk blu 24 6Ea Basic rate access 6 11a blu blk 25 6Eb 11b 12 blk ora 26 ...

Page 321: ...in Trunk connection Pin 1 3 4 1Ea Basic rate access 1 6 5 1Eb 4 3 1Sa 5 6 1Sb 2 3 4 2Ea Basic rate access 2 6 5 2Eb 4 3 2Sa 5 6 2Sb 3 3 4 3Ea Basic rate access 3 6 5 3Eb 4 3 3Sa 5 6 3Sb 4 3 4 4Ea Basic rate access 4 6 5 4Eb 4 3 4Sa 5 6 4Sb 5 3 4 5Ea Basic rate access 5 6 5 5Eb 4 3 5Sa 5 6 5Sb 6 3 4 6Ea Basic rate access 6 6 5 6Eb 4 3 6Sa 5 6 6Sb 7 3 4 7Ea Basic rate access 7 6 5 7Eb 4 3 7Sa 5 6 7S...

Page 322: ...ceive Basic rate access 2 28 S0 Receive 4 S0 Transmit 29 S0 Transmit 5 S0 Receive Basic rate access 3 30 S0 Receive 6 S0 Transmit 31 S0 Transmit 7 S0 Receive Basic rate access 4 32 S0 Receive 8 S0 Transmit 33 S0 Transmit 9 S0 Receive Basic rate access 5 34 S0 Receive 10 S0 Transmit 35 S0 Transmit 11 S0 Receive Basic rate access 6 36 S0 Receive 12 S0 Transmit 37 S0 Transmit 13 S0 Receive Basic rate...

Page 323: ... 5 4 wht brn 16 2Sa 4a 4 3 brn wht 46 2Sb 4b 5 6 5 wht gry 05 3Ea Basic rate access 3 5a 3 4 gry wht 45 3Eb 5b 6 5 2 6 red blu 14 3Sa 6a 4 3 blu red 44 3Sb 6b 5 6 7 red ora 23 4Ea Basic rate access 4 7a 3 4 ora red 43 4Eb 7b 6 5 8 red grn 32 4Sa 8a 4 3 grn red 42 4Sb 8b 5 6 9 red brn 11 5Ea Basic rate access 5 9a 3 4 brn red 31 5Eb 9b 6 5 10 red gry 02 5Sa 10a 4 3 gry red 22 5Sb 10b 5 6 3 11 blk b...

Page 324: ...ontains eight S0 basic rate ac cesses for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 which are used for the S0 trunk connection via NT not for U S for a Point to point or point to multipoint connection for S0 networking not for U S CorNet N CorNet NQ or QSig for an S0 bus for connecting ISDN telephones not for U S separate power supply re quired Switches and LEDs Figure 3 94 STMD8 S30810 Q2558 X200 H300 H301 H30...

Page 325: ...Meaning Action During Startup and Initialization Flickering 50 50 ms Board test unsuccessful Replace board Flashing 100 100 ms Board not configured Inspect visually remove and re insert board if necessary Replace board if flashing continues On Loading in progress Flashing 100 100 ms Code could not be loaded Replace board Off Board loaded Flashing 500 500 ms Board loaded but not yet activated Durin...

Page 326: ... trunks Figure 3 95 S0 Trunk Connection Example for HiPath 3750 Figure 3 96 S0 NT Connection Not for U S When starting up S0 ports during operation with PABXs it is important to ensure that the NT switch is in the POINT TO POINT position MDFU cable CABLU HiPath 3750 STMD8 MDFU or MDFU E NT Public network NT network termination The connection depends on the country specific NT S0 basic rate access ...

Page 327: ...t three MSNs per basic rate access When setting the system wide ISDN parameters select EURO CO PMP under Port configuration code 20 4 1 for the port you are using Enter the MSN in the table for DID numbers For each MSN assigned callers can di rectly dial a station group or hunt group in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system Leave the PABX number parameter unchanged Always configure HiPath 3750 an...

Page 328: ...ples for HiPath 3750 HiPath 3750 STMD8 MDFU or MDFU E HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 MDFU Cable CABLU STMD8 S0 networking in a plant without NT MDFU or MDFU E 4 S0 HiPath 3750 STMD8 MDFU or HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 STMD8 S0 networking in a plant with NT 2 MDFU or MDFU E NT NT Fixed line cabling must be approved by NT suppliers MDFU Cable CABLU HiPath 3750 STMD8 MDFU or HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 STMD8 S0 net...

Page 329: ... Universal wall socket UAE 8 8 8 AP L30460 X951 X UP L30460 X952 X Combination socket UAE 2 x 8 8 L30460 X958 X Terminating resistors 2x100 ohms V39230 Z4101 F Max of 8 terminals HiPath 3750 STMD8 MDFU or MDFU E MDFU cable CABLU ISDN terminal Max 10 m ISDN terminal Max 10 m The maximum permitted S0 bus length between the MDFU and the last wall socket is 150 m 490 ft Assignment of MW jack pins 1 8 ...

Page 330: ...o be connected to available optiPoint 500 series telephones ex cept for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy using an optiPoint ISDN Adapter UAE connector 230 Vac 1 Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin SR 1 Receive 6 SX 1 Transmit 4 SX 2 Transmit 5 SR 2 Receive 3 2nd to 8th Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin Terminating resistors in the last jack 2 x 100 ohms V39230 Z4101 F from MDFU patch panel 7 SR 6 5...

Page 331: ... 4 grn wht 47 2Eb 3b 6 5 4 wht brn 16 2Sa 4a 4 3 brn wht 46 2Sb 4b 5 6 5 wht gry 05 3Ea Basic rate access 3 5a 3 4 gry wht 45 3Eb 5b 6 5 2 6 red blu 14 3Sa 6a 4 3 blu red 44 3Sb 6b 5 6 7 red ora 23 4Ea Basic rate access 4 7a 3 4 ora red 43 4Eb 7b 6 5 8 red grn 32 4Sa 8a 4 3 grn red 42 4Sb 8b 5 6 9 red brn 11 5Ea Basic rate access 5 9a 3 4 brn red 31 5Eb 9b 6 5 10 red gry 02 5Sa 10a 4 3 gry red 22 ...

Page 332: ...5 3 Receive gry wht 45 3Rb 30 3 Receive 6 red blu 14 3Sa 6 3 Transmit blu red 44 3Sb 31 3 Transmit 7 red ora 23 4Ra Port 4 7 4 Receive ora red 43 4Rb 32 4 Receive 8 red grn 32 4Sa 8 4 Transmit grn red 42 4Sb 33 4 Transmit 9 red brn 11 5Ra Port 5 9 5 Receive brn red 31 5Rb 34 5 Receive 10 red gry 02 5Sa 10 5 Transmit gry red 22 5Sb 35 5 Transmit 11 blk blu 13 6Ra Port 6 11 6 Receive blu blk 33 6Rb ...

Page 333: ...ust have their own local power supply S0 bus wiring from STMD8 port on MDF or from optiset E ISDN adapter for U S only Figure 3 101 STMD8 S0 Bus Wiring from STMD8 Port or from ISDN Adapter for U S only MW8 jack 2 8 pin MW8 jack 1 8 pin STMD8 port on MDF port 1 shown MW8 jack 1 8 pin MW8 Cross the wires as shown not required in S0 bus from ISDN adapter 0 ABC DEF MNO GHI PQRS TUV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0...

Page 334: ...ircuit switched networks ISDN PSTN Configuration is performed via Web based management WBM which enables the administra tion of HG 1500 without any special software requirements For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500 see Section 2 6 8 Board versions Sixteen simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP Digital Signal Proces sor A combination of ...

Page 335: ...les The STMI2 board has two HGA HiPath Gateway Accelerator slots which can be used to con nect the extension modules Table 3 110 STMI2 Extension Modules Extension module Part number Function Notes PDMX PMC DSP Module Ex tended S30807 Q5697 X200 The PDMX extension module is not released at present Figure 3 102 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 HGA Slots HGA slot 1 HGA slot 0 ...

Page 336: ...ards fm Peripheral Boards Connections The STMI2 board features the following connections on the front panel Two RJ45 jacks for LAN interfaces These provide access to the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration Manual configuration is also possible 9 pin Sub D plug for V 24 interface ...

Page 337: ... the board status Run green on at least 1 B channel busy off normal operation Fail red error encountered V 24 interface 9 pin Sub D plug Two Ethernet 10 100BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks LAN2 only released for service applications LAN1 The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex FDX Of...

Page 338: ... the V 24 interface Transmission rate 38 400 default Data bits 8 Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Data flow control None It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC Table 3 111 STMI2 V 24 Interface Assignment Pin Signal I O Remark 1 DCD Not used 2 RxD I Internal pull up resistor in level switch MAX211E 3 TxD O 4 DTR O 5 0 V Ground 6 DSR I Internal pull up resist...

Page 339: ...5 Jacks Pin Signal 1 TDP Transmit Data 2 TDN Transmit Data 3 RDP Receive Data 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 6 RDN Receive Data 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 Signals TT1 2 and RT1 2 are not needed for transmitting data They represent a signal termi nation of 100 ohms so called Bob Smith termination for the two unused wire pairs in a 4 pair twist...

Page 340: ...on quality on analog networks this description deals only with four wire mode The advantage of separate speech paths for the incoming and outgoing directions is that the stability echo of a connection is not adversely affected In addition repeaters in the transmis sion equipment compensate for attenuation loss on the line E M signaling paths The E M signaling paths carry the signals that control c...

Page 341: ...require negative power feeding This type uses only two signal wires The two M wires are con nected to 0 V potential only meaning that no special measures are required to prevent short circuit currents in the event of ground leakage The communication system and transmission equipment are non floating so they are not protected from longitudinal volt age E M interface type 2 Figure 3 108 The interfac...

Page 342: ...end signal It is most useful for connecting systems that are not immediately ready for digit input Delay signal protocol Dial delay with delay signal with answer signal This protocol permits the transmission of dialing information to be delayed until the receiv ing exchange is ready It differs from the wink signal protocol only in that the remote system returns a backward signal immediately after ...

Page 343: ...witches and LEDs Figure 3 104 TIEL S30810 Q2520 X S403 2 3 1 5 6 4 S404 2 3 1 5 6 4 Lockout switches S1 1 to 4 S1 5 to 8 used for factory testing S1 1 S1 8 H0 H1 H2 H3 S103 2 3 1 5 6 4 S104 2 3 1 5 6 4 S304 2 3 1 5 6 4 v S204 2 3 1 5 6 4 S102 2 3 1 S202 2 3 1 S302 2 3 1 S402 2 3 1 S203 2 3 1 5 6 4 S303 2 3 1 5 6 4 DIP FIX switches factory default LEDs ...

Page 344: ...2 S403 S402 1 2 4 6 1 2 Type 1A Figure 3 106 S103 S102 1 3 4 6 1 2 S203 S202 1 3 4 6 1 2 S303 S302 1 3 4 6 1 2 S403 S402 1 3 4 6 1 2 Type 1B or 5 Figure 3 107 S103 S102 1 3 4 5 1 2 S203 S202 1 3 4 5 1 2 S303 S302 1 3 4 5 1 2 S403 S402 1 3 4 5 1 2 Type 2 Figure 3 108 and Figure 3 109 factory default S103 S102 Open 1 2 S203 S202 Open 1 2 S303 S302 Open 1 2 S403 S402 Open 1 2 Type 3 S103 S102 1 2 4 6...

Page 345: ...verter must be taken into account 4 wire speech 8 km for 0 6 mm 2 wire speech 6 km for 0 6 mm Figure 3 105 E M Interface Type 1 Not for U S E 1E 1M 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 E 48 V 1E 1M TIEL Remote system transmission equipment with TIEL 48 V S102 S202 S302 S402 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 S102 S202 S302 S402 System A System B ...

Page 346: ...eripheral Boards E M interface type 1A not for U S Figure 3 106 E M Interface Type 1A Not for U S 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 E 48 V E M TIEL 48 V S102 S202 S302 S402 E M M Remote system transmission equipment with TIEL 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 S102 S202 S302 S402 ...

Page 347: ...eral Boards E M interface type 1B or 5 not for U S Figure 3 107 E M Interface Type 1B or 5 Not for U S 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 E 48 V E M TIEL S102 S202 S302 S402 E E M Remote system transmission equipment with TIEL 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 S102 S202 S302 S402 48 V ...

Page 348: ...eral Boards E M interface type 2 not for U S Figure 3 108 E M Interface Type 2 Not for U S SB E E SG M 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 E 48 V E SG M SB TIEL Remote system transmission equipment with TIEL S102 S202 S302 S402 2 3 1 5 6 4 2 3 1 CCT 1 S103 CCT 2 S203 CCT 3 S303 CCT 4 S403 S102 S202 S302 S402 48 V ...

Page 349: ... E Numbering Not for U S 1 4 5 6 2 3 a2 b2 a1 b1 2 2 3 1 5 6 4 S104 48 V E SG M SB TIEL Circuit 1 E M interface type 2 4 speech wires Splitting strip in MDFU MDFU E CCT 1 CCT 2 CCT 3 CCT 4 Notes 1 a 5 a 9 a 13 a Outgoing speech 1 b 5 b 9 b 13 b 2 a 6 a 10 a 14 a Incoming speech 2 b 6 b 10 b 14 b 3 a 7 a 11 a 15 a Incom ing signal ing 3 b 7 b 11 b 15 b 4 a 8 a 12 a 16 a Out going signaling 4 b 8 b ...

Page 350: ...spect visually remove and re insert board if necessary Replace board if flashing continues On Loading in progress Flashing 100 100 ms Code could not be loaded Replace board Off Board loaded Flashing 500 500 ms Board loaded but not yet activated During Operation On Circuit seized Flashing in ring cadence Circuit in ringing state Flickering 450 50 ms Dependability test loopback test in progress Flas...

Page 351: ...1a 5 Ring Transmit with 4 wire speech Transmit receive with 2 wire speech blu wht 39 1kb 1b 4 Tip 2 wht ora 38 1ga 2a 6 Ring Receive with 4 wire speech ora wht 48 1gb 2b 3 Tip 3 wht grn 27 1E 3a 1 Ear Signal wires grn wht 47 1SG 3b 2 System ground 4 wht brn 16 1M 4a 7 Mouth brn wht 46 1SB 4b 8 System battery 5 wht gry 05 2ka Port 2 5a 5 Ring Transmit with 4 wire speech Transmit receive with 2 wire...

Page 352: ... blu blk 33 3SG 11b 2 System ground 12 blk ora 04 3M 12a 7 Mouth ora blk 24 3SB 12b 8 System battery 13 blk grn 15 4ka Port 4 13a 5 Ring Transmit with 4 wire speech Transmit receive with 2 wire speech grn blk 35 4kb 13b 4 Tip 14 blk brn 06 4ga 14a 6 Ring Receive with 4 wire speech brn blk 26 4gb 14b 3 Tip 15 blk gry 17 4E 15a 1 Ear Signal wires gry blk 37 4SG 15b 2 System ground 4 16 yel blu 08 4M...

Page 353: ...2Rb 28 System ground 4 wht brn 16 2Sa 4 M brn wht 46 2Sb 29 System battery 5 wht gry 05 3Ra Port 2 5 Ring Transmit with 4 wire speech Transmit receive with 2 wire speech gry wht 45 3Rb 30 Tip 6 red blu 14 3Sa 6 Ring 1 Receive with 4 wire speech blu red 44 3Sb 31 TIP 1 7 red ora 23 4Ra 7 E Signal wires ora red 43 4Rb 32 System ground 8 red grn 32 4Sa 8 M grn red 42 4Sb 33 System battery 9 red brn 1...

Page 354: ...speech Transmit receive with 2 wire speech grn blk 35 7Rb 38 Tip 14 blk brn 06 7Sa 14 Ring 1 Receive with 4 wire speech brn blk 26 7Sb 39 TIP 1 15 blk gry 17 8Ra 15 E Signal wires gry blk 37 8Rb 40 System ground 16 yel blu 08 8Sa 16 M blu yel 28 8Sb 41 System battery No other wires used Table 3 116 TIEL Assignment SU Xx8 For U S Only a Wire Tip b Wire Ring SU connec tor TIEL CHAMP jack MDF Notes B...

Page 355: ...sing Interfaces Figure 3 110 TLA2 TLA4 Not for U S Interfaces S30817 Q923 Bxxx Axxx Table 3 117 TLA2 TLA4 Not for U S Contact Assignments Contact Connector X2 Connector X4 1 a trunk 1 GND for GEE50 FKR otherwise free 2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1 3 a trunk 2 a trunk 1 4 b trunk 2 b trunk 2 5 a trunk 31 1 Not for TLA2 a trunk 2 6 b trunk 31 b trunk 31 7 a trunk 41 a trunk 31 8 b trunk 41 b trunk 41 9 a tru...

Page 356: ...X2 Connector X4 Connector X5 1 GND a trunk 1 a trunk 5 GND 2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1 b trunk 5 b trunk 5 3 a trunk 1 a trunk 2 a trunk 6 a trunk 5 4 b trunk 2 b trunk 2 b trunk 6 b trunk 6 5 a trunk 2 a trunk 3 a trunk 7 a trunk 6 6 b trunk 3 b trunk 3 b trunk 7 b trunk 7 7 a trunk 3 a trunk 4 a trunk 8 a trunk 7 8 b trunk 4 b trunk 4 b trunk 8 b trunk 8 9 a trunk 4 a trunk 8 10 GMZ 1 GMZ 2 GMZ Call c...

Page 357: ...he transmission and function oriented characteristics of the TLA4R are completely identical to those of the TLA boards that are used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 The only differences are the two ALUMs which are only available on the TLA4R the call metering receiving equipment interface which is only on the TLA boards Interfaces Figure 3 112 TLA4R Not for U S Interfaces S30817 Q923 Zxxx Table 3 1...

Page 358: ... Peripheral Boards 3 34 a trunk 3 35 b trunk 3 4 44 a trunk 4 45 b trunk 4 MW8 Jack X5 pin ALUM 1 2 5 54 TB1 ALUM1 Stn card connection 55 TA1 6 64 TB2 ALUM2 Stn card connection 65 TA2 7 74 BE1 ALUM1 Analog telephone connection 75 AE1 8 84 BE2 ALUM2 Analog telephone connection 85 AE2 Table 3 119 TLA4R Not for U S Contact Assignments ...

Page 359: ...e TM2LP Trunk Module Loop Procedure board connects up to eight analog trunks to Hi Path 3800 using the loop start protocol Front panel Figure 3 113 TM2LP Front Panel S30810 Q2159 Xxxx To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 2 5 2 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 360: ...LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated no...

Page 361: ... ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk blu 24 Free blu blk 25 12 blk ora 26 Free ora...

Page 362: ... Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Table 3 122 TM2LP Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TM2LP Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 Free 5 10 4 Free 5 11 4 Free 5 12 4 Free 5 13 4 Free 5 14 4 Free 5 15 4 Free 5 16 4 Free 5 ...

Page 363: ...000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 273 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards 17 4 Free 5 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 122 TM2LP Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TM2LP Notes No Pin ...

Page 364: ...ment with CHAMP Jack For U S Only CHAMP jack TM2LP Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free 40 16 Free 41 ...

Page 365: ... 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn red 31 10 red gry 02 Free gry red 22 3 11...

Page 366: ...ect inward dialing The system supports MFC R2 signaling default setting MFC R2 with caller ID tone dialing and dial pulsing It is not possible to use DTMF and MFC R2 with or without caller ID simultaneously There are two versions of this board S30810 Q2587 A200 for use in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 S30810 Q2587 A400 for use in HiPath 3550 Switches and LEDs Figure 3 114 TMAMF S30810 Q2587 Axxx H0 ...

Page 367: ...s The subminiature D connector provides information about MFC R2 signaling To activate the trace function you must connect a PC with a terminal emulation program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal Terminal configuration Bits per second 19 200 Data bits 8 Stop bit 1 Parity none Flow control none Pin assignments of the diagnostic cable Figure 3 115 Pin Assignments of the TMAMF Diagnostic Cable PC RS 23...

Page 368: ...Initialization Off Flashing 250 250 ms The DSP digital signal processor is waiting for DID digits On The DSP is being reset During Operation Off The DSP is idle Flashing 250 250 ms Error the DSP has not yet received the DID digits Replace board On The MFC R2 filter is on Table 3 126 TMAMF LED Statuses H0 to H7 LED Status on off Meaning Action During Operation Off The trunk is idle no seizure On Th...

Page 369: ... wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn red 31 10 red gry 02 Free gry r...

Page 370: ... trunk module TMC16 Trunk Module Central Office connects up to 16 analog ground start or loop start trunks with the HiPath 3800 Front panel Figure 3 116 TMC16 for selected countries only S30810 Q2485 X Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 2 5 2 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red ...

Page 371: ...Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors de...

Page 372: ...a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Port 12 12a...

Page 373: ... Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 14 14a 14 ...

Page 374: ... 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11a 4 blu ...

Page 375: ...otocol The board functions only in connection with a TMS2 HiPath 3750 Hi Path 3700 or TS2 HiPath 3550 There is no direct connection between the TMCAS board and the system s central control unit The TMS2 TS2 handles all signaling and data traffic Switches and display Administration of the CAS protocol converter Use the ECGM tool for administration For information on installing the software on the s...

Page 376: ...2 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 or TS2 HiPath 3550 board Switches S4 5 to S4 8 Impedance on the CAS Side Switch settings S4 1 S4 2 120 ohms default Off Off 100 ohms On Off 75 ohms Off On No function On On Impedance on the S2M Side Switches S4 3 S4 4 120 ohms default Off Off 100 ohms On Off 75 ohms Off On No function On On Switches Function S4 5 Reserved S4 6 Flash memory only for laboratory purposes the...

Page 377: ...ions for the GND connection symmetric line 120 ohms Ground the cable s shield on the side of the connected device NT MUX modem coaxial line 75 ohms Do not ground the shield on both ends of the cable Tx Ground the cable s shield on the TMCAS side Rx Ground the cable s shield on the side of the connected device NT MUX modem GND connection Jumper setting no signal ground default S2 1 2 S3 1 2 signal ...

Page 378: ...egment Display H1 Display Meaning Waiting for the TMCAS software download TMCAS software download start TMCAS software download Writing the TMCAS software extender software into the flash memory Loading the TMCAS software extender software from the flash memory Waiting for ECGM command 10 s Calculating the checksum No TMCAS software in the flash memory waiting for reload Flash memory erased changi...

Page 379: ...ated TMS2 An example of a TMCAS in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinet is shown in Figure 3 118 Page 3 291 has information on the assignments for the two C39195 A9700 B512 B514 TM CAS cables Figure 3 118 TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Backplane View of the 8 Slot Basic Cabinet Table 3 133 Assignment of the TMS2 TMCAS Connection Cable C39195 A9700 B510 SU connector Xx9 pin Function 6 a wi...

Page 380: ... C39195 A9700 B512 B514 TM CAS cables Figure 3 119 TMCAS in HiPath 3550 Table 3 134 Assignment of the TS2 TMCAS Connection Cable C39195 A9700 B511 TS2 Wieland terminal X2 pin Function TMCAS SU connector X9 pin 1 2 3 4 5 V for board detection 33 5 a wire T receive 6 6 b wire R receive 26 7 a wire T transmit 2 8 b wire R transmit 22 TS2 TMCAS X2 X8 X9 TMCAS TS2 X2 X8 X9 PSU UPS TMCAS cable C39195 A9...

Page 381: ... MUX or modem to the TMCAS board symmetric line 120 ohms coaxial line 75 ohms Table 3 135 Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195 A9700 B512 SU connector Xx8 pin Function Color code 2 a wire T receive grn 22 b wire R receive blk 6 a wire T transmit red 26 b wire R transmit blk Table 3 136 Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195 A9700 B514 SU connector Xx8 pin Function Wire 2 a wire T receive BNC shield ...

Page 382: ...2 and TMCAS 8 If necessary configure with HiPath 3000 Manager E Possible problems TMCAS not entered in HiPath 3000 Manager E The TMCAS is displayed automatically after the generation regeneration of the database in a system with a correctly inserted and connected TMCAS TMS2 TS2 combination Missing electrical connection between TMS2 TS2 and TMCAS No TMCAS entry in the database If a correctly config...

Page 383: ... download server for information on this contact your local ITSC and copy the following files into the directory c ecginst e1v0xx exe for example e140ah exe Ee1v0yy exe for example Ee140am exe Ecgm_vzz exe for example Ecgm_4aa exe Explanation of the variables v software version xx country version of a file yy file version for channels zz file version for maintenance 3 Run exe files This will extra...

Page 384: ... then restart ecgm exe 9 Enter the COM interface under COMM and the customer name in the Set tings ECG Name menu All other windows are updated automatically 10 Channel configuration Define the channel parameters in the View Database menu reserve unused channels with Out of Service Protocol Signaling method incoming and outgoing Clock master always central office Operator number corresponds to the ...

Page 385: ...e LED of the desired trunk flashes Lockout switch which can be used to manually block the selected trunk circuit LED statuses and their meanings The peripheral board slots on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connec tors Since the TMDID board has SIVAPAC connector strips you will have to install a SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapter in order to be able to use it in HiPath 3800 For information on ...

Page 386: ...tor on the backplane Table 3 138 For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack Table 3 139 For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors Table 3 140 Figure 3 120 TMDID for U S only S30810 Q2452 X Front Panel LEDs green for displaying the trunk status Trunk circuit 0 Trunk circuit 1 Trunk circuit 2 Trunk circuit 3 Trunk circuit 4 Trunk circuit 5 Trunk circuit 6 Trunk c...

Page 387: ...b 2 wht ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk blu 24 Free blu blk 25 12 blk ora 26 F...

Page 388: ...r Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack CHAMP jack TMDID Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free 40 16 Free 41 ...

Page 389: ...t 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn red 31 10 red gry 02 Free gry red ...

Page 390: ...ialing provides direct inward dialing from the central office CO to HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 The board has eight trunk circuits that connect to analog trunks The circuits can be set up for immediate start or wink start Switches and LEDs Figure 3 121 TMDID8 for U S only S30810 Q2507 X T4 T3 T2 T1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 T8 T7 T6 T5 S4 S3 Trunk 7 Trunk 8 Trunk 5 Trunk 6 S2 S1 Trunk 3 Trunk 4 Trun...

Page 391: ...unk cir cuit Loop 1800 ohms Open switch Loop 1800 ohms Close switch 1 S1A S1B S1C S1D S1A S1B S1C S1D 2 S1E S1F S1G S1H S1E S1F S1G S1H 3 S2A S2B S2C S2D S2A S2B S2C S2D 4 S2E S2F S2G S2H S2E S2F S2G S2H 5 S3A S3B S3C S3D S3A S3B S3C S3D 6 S3E S3F S3G S3H S3E S3F S3G S3H 7 S4A S4B S4C S4D S4A S4B S4C S4D 8 S4E S4F S4G S4H S4E S4F S4G S4H Table 3 142 TMDID8 for U S only LED Statuses Status of LEDs ...

Page 392: ...ht blu 19 1a Port 1 1 1 a b wire blu wht 39 1b 26 1 b a wire 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2 2 a b wire ora wht 48 2b 27 2 b a wire 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3 3 a b wire grn wht 47 3b 28 3 b a wire 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4 4 a b wire brn wht 46 4b 29 4 b a wire 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5 a b wire gry wht 45 5b 30 5 b a wire 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6 6 a b wire blu red 44 6b 31 6 b a wire 7 red ora 23 7a Por...

Page 393: ... is that the stability echo of a connection is not adversely affected In addition repeaters in the transmis sion equipment compensate for attenuation loss on the line E M signaling paths The E M signaling paths carry the signals that control connection setup and cleardown Vari ous interfaces can be selected depending on the requirements of the remote system or trans mission equipment These interfa...

Page 394: ...onal Service Manual boards fm Peripheral Boards Front panel Figure 3 122 TMEW2 Front Panel S30810 Q2292 X100 To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 2 5 2 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 395: ...contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether...

Page 396: ...y 9 1ga Port 1 5a Ring Receive gry wht 10 1gb 5b Tip 6 red blu 11 1ga Port 2 6a Ring Receive blu red 12 1gb 6b Tip 7 red ora 13 1ga Port 3 7a Ring Receive ora red 14 1gb 7b Tip 8 red grn 15 1ga Port 4 8a Ring Receive grn red 16 1gb 8b Tip 9 red brn 17 1E Port 1 9a Ear brn red 18 1M 9b Mouth 10 red gry 19 1E Port 2 10a Ear gry red 20 1M 10b Mouth 11 blk blu 24 1E Port 3 11a Ear blu blk 25 1M 11b Mo...

Page 397: ...d HiPath 3350 Ground start is the default Interfaces 7 Warning You must disconnect the power and remove the slip on connectors from the TMGL4 board before removing it from the system Do not connect the slip on connectors to the TMGL4 board until the board is seated in its slot and the system power is on Failure to follow these instructions may severely damage the system Figure 3 123 TMGL4 For U S ...

Page 398: ...s shown are at the board itself The main distribution frame cable MDF cable sup plied reverses the signal order before the MDF Table 3 146 TMGL4 For U S Only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X2 Port 1 b wire ring trunk 1 1 2 a wire tip trunk 1 3 b wire ring trunk 2 2 4 a wire tip trunk 2 5 b wire ring trunk 3 3 6 a wire tip trunk 3 7 b wire ring trunk 4 4 8 a wire tip trunk 4 ...

Page 399: ... connects up to four analog ground start or loop start trunks to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Ground start is the default Interfaces Figure 3 124 TMGL4R for U S only S30810 K2918 Z If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2 TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4 6 or 8 slots 6 and 8 are not available with HiPath 3300 X1 50 2 To CUPR CUCR X4 4 MW4 jacks 11 To trunk 1 To trunk 4 To ANI4R 1 X5 MW10 jack ...

Page 400: ...ble 3 147 TMGL4R for U S only Contact Assignment Port X3 Pin To GEE X4 Pin To trunks 1 4 X5 Pin To ANI4R Signal 1 3 12 3 b wire ring trunk 1 2 13 2 a wire tip trunk 1 2 5 22 5 b wire ring trunk 2 4 23 4 a wire tip trunk 2 3 7 32 7 b wire ring trunk 3 6 33 6 a wire tip trunk 3 4 9 42 9 b wire ring trunk 4 8 43 8 a wire tip trunk 4 10 10 Call charging module assignment GMZ ...

Page 401: ...cts up to eight analog ground start or loop start trunks to Hi Path 3750 and HiPath 3700 Ground start is the default Switches and LEDs Switches The TMGL8 board has an eight path microswitch under a flip up cover The following settings apply for each channel ON right Channel is enabled OFF left Channel is disabled no new seizures are permitted Figure 3 125 TMGL8 for U S only S30810 K2703 Z H1 H8 LE...

Page 402: ...L8 for U S only Assignment SU Xx8 a Wire Tip b Wire Ring SU connector backplane TMGL8 CHAMP jack MDF Notes Xx8 1 wht blu 19 1a Port 1 1 1 a b wire blu wht 39 1b 26 1 b a wire 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2 2 a b wire ora wht 48 2b 27 2 b a wire 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3 3 a b wire grn wht 47 3b 28 3 b a wire 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4 4 a b wire brn wht 46 4b 29 4 b a wire 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5 a b wi...

Page 403: ...a ÜFS trunk is connected to the TML8W remove the jumpers W300 to W650 to activate silent reversal If silent reversal is inactive users in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 would hear a busy signal following backward release instead of being released W650 W600 W300 H100 green H101 red Lockout switch S100 factory default On 1 8 LEDs Jumpers W703 W709 W803 W809 W700 W706 W806 W800 Jumpers only avail ab...

Page 404: ...eiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi ...

Page 405: ... 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn red 31 10 red gry 02 Free...

Page 406: ...DN BRI trunk module connects up to four digital trunks to the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 The TMQ4 board provides basic rate interface BRI ISDN via a U2B1Q interface The interface supports the following central office protocols AT T 5Ess NI 1 AT T 5ESS Custom Nortel DMS100 NI 1 Siemens EWSD NI 1 Interfaces Figure 3 127 TMQ4 for U S only S30810 Q2917 X X1 50 2 TMQ4 board To CUP CUC To trunks 1 8 X2...

Page 407: ...t the board itself The main distribution frame cable MDF cable sup plied reverses the signal order before the MDF Table 3 152 TMQ4 for U S only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X2 Port Contact Connector X2 Port 1 b wire ring trunk 1 1 5 b wire ring trunk 3 3 2 a wire tip trunk 1 6 a wire tip trunk 3 3 b wire ring trunk 2 2 7 b wire ring trunk 4 4 4 a wire tip trunk 2 8 a wire tip trunk 4 ...

Page 408: ...It can also be used for the following layer 1 operating modes Super Frame SF Extended Super Frame ESF A maximum of eight TMST1 modules can be used in a HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame MDF the TMST1 board connects to a channel service unit CSU The CSU supplies the required secondary protection Switches and LEDs The lockout switch alerts the system soft...

Page 409: ...test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi Path 3000 Manager E If ...

Page 410: ...signment Figure 3 129 TMST1 Adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C C39228 A7195 A12 for U S only Table 3 154 TMST1 Adapter For U S Only Cable Assignment MW8 RJ48C SIPAC 1 SU jack SU connector backplane TMST1 Xx9 1 C2 22 b wire ring receive 2 E2 2 a wire tip receive 3 4 C6 26 b wire ring transmit 5 E6 6 a wire tip transmit 6 7 8 SIPAC 1 SU jack Xx9 back plane MW8 RJ48C jack to the CSU or networked system ...

Page 411: ...can use the Euro ISDN CAS gateway ECG The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that converts the Euro ISDN protocol into the Channel Associated Signaling CAS protocol Refer to the installation instructions which are provided with each ECG cabinet for information on the connection and power supply For HiPath 3000 V1 0 and later you can also use the new TMCAS board to support country specific CAS pro...

Page 412: ...67 Z69 Axxx SU connector assignment backplane and cable color codes TMS2 Interface Jumper X300 Jumper X301 Jumper X302 120 ohms factory default 2 3 2 3 2 3 75 ohms 1 2 1 2 1 2 Table 3 155 TMS2 Not for U S SU Connector Assignment and Cable Color Codes SU connector Xx8 Xx91 Pin 1 SU connector Xx8B is used in board status 4 and lower whereas SU connector Xx9 is used in board status 5 and higher Funct...

Page 413: ...power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to errors detected by test loops ...

Page 414: ...ystem using sheath wires is not sufficient For operating reasons keep the ground connection from the NT to the system as short as possible Power supply The NT must be fed over the 48 V max 10 W observe the power requirements of the NTs of the UPSM see Figure 3 132 The voltage is fed out on backplane connector X06 pins 17 37 48 V Use the CABLU supplied to connect the system with the MDFU This place...

Page 415: ...ir no 15 48 V X06 NT HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 CABLU NT 1 PE a b a b Shield Receive direction Transmit direction B A C K P L A N E TMS2 HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 NT 2 Earth connection min 2 5 mm2 Power supply see Figure 3 132 Backplane connection to Xx8 XX9 board release 5 or later Cable S30267 Z57 Axxx Length 6 not in Germany 10 and 20 m Color code see Table 3 155 The wires in a wire pair may be i...

Page 416: ...2M b a UK2 s b Signal receive Signal trans FPE 48 V s UBatt 0 V a s b S2M a s b S2M 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 10 9 NTPMGF NTPMKU Shield Receive direction Transmit direction B A C K P L A N E TMS2 HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 NT 2 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 10 9 5 12 11 16 15 14 13 Earth connection min 2 5 mm2 Power supply Power supply see Figure 3 132 Backplane connection to Xx8 Xx9 board release 5 or later Cable S30267 Z...

Page 417: ... Germa TMS2 S2M networking in site without NT 4 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 TMS2 HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 TMS2 S2M networking in site with NT NT NT Fixed connection cabling must be approved by NT supplier HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 TMS2 HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 TMS2 S2M networking using leased lines NT NT Fixed connection via public network NT connection ac cording to Figure 3 133 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 T...

Page 418: ...HiPath 3550 wall housing S30810 K2919 Z for use in the HiPath 3500 19 inch housing The board can also be used for the following layer 1 operating modes Super Frame SF Extended Super Frame ESF Board usage is subject to the following restrictions Only one TST1 board allowed primary multiplex access For slot 7 or 9 only Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame MDF the TST1 connects to a ch...

Page 419: ... Manual 3 329 Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral Boards Contact assignment Table 3 157 TST1 For U S Only Contact Assignment Contact X2 Contact X2 1 b wire ring receive 5 a wire tip transmit 2 a wire tip receive 6 not connected 3 not connected 7 not connected 4 b wire ring transmit 8 not connected ...

Page 420: ...or use in HiPath 3550 wall housing TS2R Trunk Module S2M Rack S30810 K2913 Z300 Figure 3 138 for use in Hi Path 3500 19 inch housing Board usage is subject to the following restrictions Only one TS2 TS2R board allowed primary multiplex access For slot 7 or 9 only To support country specific CAS protocols you can use the Euro ISDN CAS gateway ECG The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that convert...

Page 421: ...Peripheral Boards TS2 interfaces TS2R interfaces Figure 3 137 TS2 Not for U S Interfaces S30810 Q2913 X100 X300 Figure 3 138 TS2R Not for U S Interfaces S30810 K2913 Z100 Z300 X1 50 2 X2 8 1 To CUC TS2 S2M interface Wieland termi nal symm line X5 1 MW8 RJ48C jack MW line X1 50 2 To CUCR TS2R X5 1 S2M interface MW8 RJ48C jack MW line ...

Page 422: ... operation Connect the cable to the X2 using an 8 pin Wieland terminal TS2 only MW line MW8 jack RJ48C The shielded 8 pin MW8 RJ48C jack X5 is provided for connecting MW lines The maxi mum cable length approx 100 m depends on the quality of the cable used and its signal attenuation Table 3 158 Contact Assignments for X2 Connector Contact X2 TS2 only 1 48 V NT1 feeding max 15 W 2 0 V NT1 feeding 3 ...

Page 423: ...is voltage which the system feeds over the CUC TS2R board The NT1 power supply must come from an S30122 X7321 X S30122 X7321 X100 with UPS operation power supply unit Figure 3 139 S2M Trunk Connection 7 Caution There should be absolutely no ground connection between the HiPath 3550 wall housing and the NT Do not connect the shield of the connection cable you are using either on the HiPath 3550 sid...

Page 424: ...erter S30122 X7357 X Cable 1 Patch cable MW8 RJ48C 10 m C39195 Z7208 A100 Cable 2 2 units coaxial adapter cable 30 cm S30267 Z354 A3 TS2 TS2R upgrade kit for Portugal L30252 U600 A190 containing the following Cable 3 2 units Mini coaxial cable 10 cm S30267 Z353 A1 Figure 3 140 S2M NT Connections for Spain and Portugal Cable 1 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 NT Public network Interface converter Cable 2 Po...

Page 425: ... HiPath 3350 wall housing to conventional analog telephones and sup plementary equipment such as group 3 fax machines and entrance telephone adapters Interfaces Figure 3 141 4SLA Not for U S 8SLA Interfaces S30810 Q2923 X200 X100 Table 3 160 4SLA Not for U S 8SLA Contact Assignments Contact X2 T R ports 1 to 4 X3 T R ports 5 to 8 1 a 1 a 5 2 b 1 b 5 3 a 2 a 6 4 b 2 b 6 5 a 3 a 7 6 b 3 b 7 7 a 4 a ...

Page 426: ...a tion Param Flags Figure 3 142 16SLA Not for U S Interfaces S30810 Q2923 X Table 3 161 16SLA Not for U S Contact Assignments Contact X2 T R ports 1 to 4 X3 T R ports 5 to 8 X4 T R ports 9 to 12 X5 T R ports 13 16 1 a 1 a 5 a 9 a 13 2 b 1 b 5 b 9 b 13 3 a 2 a 6 a 1 a 14 4 b 2 b 6 b 10 b 14 5 a 3 a 7 a 11 a 15 6 b 3 b 7 b 11 b 15 7 a 4 a 8 a 12 a 16 8 b 4 b 8 b 12 b 16 T R ports 1 4 Stns 1 to 4 T R...

Page 427: ...nnection conditions Maximum supply current approximately 34 mA maximum supply voltage approximately 40 Vdc Ring voltage against negative supply voltage a wire tip RING two telephones maximum Range see Section 2 8 Loop current detection 10 mA Ground button detection 20 mA The transmission method can be configured country specifically by entering the country code ...

Page 428: ...nes and supplementary equipment such as group 3 fax machines and TFE adapters in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch housing Interfaces Figure 3 143 8SLAR Interfaces S30810 K2925 Z Table 3 162 8SLAR Contact Assignments MW8 jack X2 pin T R ports 1 4 MW8 Jack X2 pin T R ports 5 8 1 14 a 1 5 54 a 5 15 b 1 55 b 5 2 24 a 2 6 64 a 6 25 b 2 65 b 6 3 34 a 3 7 74 a 7 35 b 3 75 b 7 4 44 a 4 8 84 a 8 45 b 4 ...

Page 429: ...nnection conditions Maximum supply current approximately 34 mA maximum supply voltage approximately 40 Vdc Ring voltage against negative supply voltage a wire tip RING two telephones maximum Range see Section 2 8 Loop current detection 10 mA Ground button detection 20 mA The transmission method can be configured country specifically by entering the country code ...

Page 430: ... The only kind of telephone that can be used is an analog telephone The signaling method of the connected telephones should be the same as that on the trunk line otherwise signaling will not be possi ble When the system is deactivated or if an error occurs the trunk lines are connected directly to the telephones When normal operation is resumed the transfer represented in the figure be low takes p...

Page 431: ...ts Not for U S Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X6 1 R1 from trunk 1a AE1 to Stn 1a AT1 to TLA a 2 T1 from trunk 1b BE1 to Stn 1b BT1 to TLA b 3 R2 from trunk 2a AE2 to Stn 2a AT2 to TLA a 4 T2 from trunk 2b BE2 to Stn 2b BT2 to TLA b 5 R3 from trunk 3a AE3 to Stn 3a AT3 to TLA a 6 T3 from trunk 3b BE3 to Stn 3b BT3 to TLA b 7 R4 from trunk 4a AE4 to Stn 4a AT4 to TLA a 8 T4 from trunk ...

Page 432: ...2 T from trunk 1 T to station 1 2 R to TMGL4 port 1 10 R to analog port 1 3 R from trunk 2 R to station 2 3 T to TMGL4 port 2 11 T to analog port 2 4 T from trunk 2 T to station 2 4 R to TMGL4 port 2 12 R to analog port 2 5 R from trunk 3 R to station 3 5 T to TMGL4 port 3 13 T to analog port 3 6 T from trunk 3 T to station 3 6 R to TMGL4 port 3 14 R to analog port 3 7 R from trunk 4 R to station ...

Page 433: ...ice Manual 3 343 Boards for HiPath 3000 Options ALUM module block diagram Figure 3 146 ALUM4 Basic Structure K1 B HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 K2 B R1 T1 Relay K1 C K2 C AE1 BE1 Relay Trunk board Station board Connector X6 TB1 TA1 AT1 R1 BT1 T1 Connector X3 Trunk ALUM Connector X4 Analog telephone ...

Page 434: ...e 3 147 AMOM Connection to DIUN2 and DIU2U AMOM variant Wave length Op fiber cable Cable length km Cable attenua tion dB km Maximum at tenuation1 dB 1 Maximum optical attenuation in an AMOM to AMOM connection a reserve of 4 dB attenuation must be included for ageing and splicing S30807 K5480 X100 850 820 nm multimode 50 µm 62 5 µm 2 5 3 3 3 5 11 5 14 5 S30807 K5480 X200 1300 nm multimode 50 µm and...

Page 435: ...al description Route 4 LWLO0_FRONT Data output on the optical fiber in terface Input 5 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 6 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Output 7 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Output 10 5 V 5 V power supply Input 11 LWLI0_FRONT Data input on the optical fiber inter face front Output 12 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 14 5 V 5 V power supply I...

Page 436: ...terface The trunks are transferred directly on the board between the trunk and the trunk board interfaces Interfaces on the ANI4 module LED statuses and their meanings On the ANI4 board two LEDs are implemented that show the status of trunk channel 1 After system startup the green LED is on and the red LED is off This signals that the layer 1 firmware has started correctly If ANI4 is recognized pr...

Page 437: ...not yet started Start up system On but glowing weakly The Mitel chip interprets the signal on the line as an FSK carrier signal However this could mean that there is noise or speech on the line too The firmware is in the state of recognition On for ap prox 1 s A valid caller ID signal correct channel seizure mark bit sequence valid message byte on the line is be ing recognized at the moment If a m...

Page 438: ...nnector X3 Component Side Connector X3 Solder Side Connector X4 1 Not assigned a wire tip trunk 1 2 b wire ring trunk 1 b wire ring trunk 1 3 a wire tip trunk 1 a wire tip trunk 2 4 b wire ring trunk 2 b wire ring trunk 2 5 a wire tip trunk 2 a wire tip trunk 3 6 b wire ring trunk 3 b wire ring trunk 3 7 a wire tip trunk 3 a wire tip trunk 4 8 b wire ring trunk 4 b wire ring trunk 4 9 a wire tip t...

Page 439: ... cable to the ANI4 board 5 Use the ribbon cable supplied with the board to connect ANI4 and TMGL4 making sure that the colored markings pin 1 at both ends of the cable are facing upwards Figure 3 149 Figure 2 6 Connect the trunk slip on connectors to the ANI4 Figure 3 149 Figure 3 7 Restart the system by reconnecting the power plug 7 Caution Remove the trunk slip on connectors from the TMGL4 board...

Page 440: ...h 3500 or HiPath 3300 base system In V4 0 SMR 7 or later the station name is analyzed in addition to the call number and shown on the telephone display Each ANI4R module can serve four trunks It contains the external trunk board hardware inter faces TMGL4R and the options bus interface Interfaces If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2 TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4 6 or 8 slots 6 and 8 no...

Page 441: ... Options Contact assignment Table 3 168 ANI4R for selected countries only Contact Assignment X3 Pin Signal X3 Pin Signal 1 6 a wire tip trunk 3 2 a wire tip trunk 1 7 b wire ring trunk 3 3 b wire ring trunk 1 8 a wire tip trunk 4 4 a wire tip trunk 2 9 b wire ring trunk 4 5 b wire ring trunk 2 10 Call charging module assignment GMZ ...

Page 442: ... U S HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 IVMS8 IVMS8R HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Elec tronic Documentation on Com ESY Products Table 3 169 Announcement and Music Modules Module Board Part number Notes EXM S30817 Q902 B401 Used in HiPat...

Page 443: ...he ALUM4 module cannot be displayed Slot for EXM UAM not for U S S30122 X7217 X Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 wall housing Connected to OPAL and analog interface for the an nouncement function UAMR not for U S S30122 X7402 Z Used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch hous ing Connected to OPALR and analog interface for the an nouncement function Figure 3 151 EXM Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiP...

Page 444: ... 05 3 354 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Options Connection of EXMR Figure 3 152 EXMR Connection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Front panel of the system Cinch jack X1 X2 Cable C39195 Z7001 C79 EXMR component side ...

Page 445: ...o 24 standard mailboxes and four Auto Attendant mailboxes Information on administering HiPath Entry Voice Mail for HiPath 3000 can be found in the Hi Path 3000 Manager E Help 7 Caution The EVM subboard must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the EVM subboard The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insert...

Page 446: ...3 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 356 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Options Interfaces Figure 3 153 EVM S30807 Q6945 X Interfaces Spacing bolts X2 26 pin socket strip X1 not used for HiPath 3000 ...

Page 447: ...n ca ble Ribbon cable connected External music Ribbon cable not connected Internal music Expert mode code 22 11 allows you to choose between music on music off ring tone or music on unscreened transfer If the EXMNA module is connected you must select Music on using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E The module is operational as soon as it is plugged in Interfaces Figure 3 154 EXMNA For U S Only ...

Page 448: ... V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Options Contact assignment Table 3 170 EXMNA for U S only Contact Assignments Contact Connector X1 Connector X2 1 GND Input 2 Not assigned Input 3 Not assigned Not assigned 4 EXMCL Not assigned 5 EXMDIR 6 HRES 7 EXMD 8 EXMDET 9 5 V 10 Not assigned ...

Page 449: ...not for U S Introduction The Call Metering Receiving Equipment GEE8 12 16 kHz can be plugged into the TML8W board to record call charge pulses HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Interfaces X10 and X11 connect to the board Switch for setting the level per circuit On 24 dBm Off 10 dBm Switch on GEE8 Figure 3 156 GEE8 Not for U S S30817 Q664 xxxx X10 X11 On 1 8 ...

Page 450: ...iving units for recording and preprocessing call charge pulses in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 The call charge detection channel is looped in the trunk and then routed to the TLA Interfaces Table 3 171 GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 Not for U S Modules Module Frequency Remarks GEE 12 12 kHz also for Silent Reversal GEE 16 16 kHz GEE 50 50 Hz Figure 3 157 GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 Not for U S Interfaces S30817 Q951 Axxx...

Page 451: ...6 GEE50 Not for U S Contact Assignments Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X5 1 a GND CO 1 AL1 0V 2 b CO 1 BN 1 CO 1 BL1 0V 3 a CO 1 AN 1 CO 2 AL2 RTS 4 b CO 2 BN 2 CO 2 BL2 CTS 5 a CO 2 AN 2 CO 3 AL3 RxD 6 b CO 3 BN 3 CO 3 BL3 TxD 7 a CO 3 AN 3 CO 4 AL4 0V 8 b CO 4 BN 4 CO 4 BL4 5V 9 a CO 4 AN 4 0V 10 Call charging module as signment 5V for GEE 50 in France otherwise free ...

Page 452: ...il system The software load diagnostic button is for software loads for example loading a specific language The digital station connector connects the HOPE board to the corresponding digital ports using a modular cable The HOPE board does not identify itself to the system and is therefore not visible in the HiPath 3000 Manager E card map When expanding a system such as HiPath 3350 or HiPath 3550 e...

Page 453: ...fice PhoneMail system on and off The PCMCIA slot is for Office PhoneMail software cards for example voice cards The card ejector ejects the software cards from the PMCIA slot Installation servicing and connectivity For information on installing connecting and servicing the HOPE board refer to the Hicom Of fice PhoneMail Entry Installation and System Administration Guide ...

Page 454: ...oard to the first optional board comes in two ver sions OPAL Options Adapter Cable Long C39195 A7001 B130 Figure 3 159 for use in Hi Path 3550 and HiPath 3350 wall housing OPALR Options Adapter Cable Long Rack C39195 A7001 B142 Figure 3 160 for use in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch housing OPAL interfaces Figure 3 159 OPAL C39195 A7001 B130 CBCC CBCP interface Option board connection Ribbon c...

Page 455: ...3 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 3 365 Boards for HiPath 3000 Options OPALR interface Figure 3 160 OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 CBRC interface Option board connection ...

Page 456: ... analog trunk with a PFT1 Power Failure Transfer board 4 analog trunks with a PFT4 board can be transferred ALUM to designated analog telephones Figure 3 161 When using an analog telephone for outgoing calls you may need to adapt its signaling method to match the signaling method of the connected trunk ALUM using PFT1 PFT4 Figure 3 161 ALUM Using PFT1 PFT4 Not for U S R E L A I S TMB TMA SMA SMB T...

Page 457: ... HiPath 3000 Options Installation location of the PFT1 and PFT4 board MDFU MDFU E Wire PFT1 or PFT4 into the MDFU or MDFU E The boards require 48 V For the assignments of both boards see Figure 3 163 Figure 3 162 Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 MDFU MDFU E Not for U S 2 x PFT1 or 1 x PFT4 System side Line network ...

Page 458: ...nt Figure 3 163 PFT1 S30777 Q539 X and PFT4 S30777 Q540 X Board Assignment X3 X4 X1 X2 10 1 10 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 1 10 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 10 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B PFT 48 X1 10 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B PFT 48 TMA TMB Trunk circuit A B a b Telephone company SMA SMB SLA board SLA SLB Analog telephone PFT1 PFT4 ...

Page 459: ...ad capacity of max 15 W Power Failure Transfer ALUM REAL This function is provided by two relays K5 K6 with two switch contacts each In the event of a power failure or a system restart or reload an analog trunk is transferred from the sys tem to an analog telephone The system monitors the line s loop current to avoid discon necting any trunk calls in progress when the power is restored In normal m...

Page 460: ...voltage Trunk failure transfer contact load 60 mA at 60 V nominal voltage Maximum trunk failure transfer contact load with atmospheric influence 8 A Contact load for relays K1 to K4 1 A with 250 Vac Maximum current drain 48 VF 80 mA Installation location of the REAL board backplane The REAL board basic cabinet only is connected to the backplane using a ribbon cable X05 It is connected to the MDFU ...

Page 461: ...ne PFTTSa b Subscriber board SLA RK Normally closed contact UK Switch contact AK Normally open contact 32 43 23 44 8a 7b 7a 6b 10a 9b 10b 11a 11b 31 22 13 33 02 11 9a 35 12a 12b 13b 14b 15 24 06 26 14a 04 42 14 6a 8b 13a GND 45 05 5b 5a UK2 AK2 48 V max 80 mA UK1 AK1 UK3 AK3 Relay K1 Relay K2 Relay K3 Relay K4 Relay K5 Relay K5 Relay K6 Relay K6 PFTASa PFTASb PFTALb PFTALa PFTTLb PFTTLa PFTTSb PFT...

Page 462: ...46 48 V max 80 mA 4b 5 wht gry 05 PFTTSa 5a 4 Station board SLA gry wht 45 PFTTSb 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 PFTTLa 6a 4 Subsc line telephone blu red 44 PFTTLb 6b 5 7 red ora 23 PFTALa 7a 4 Trunk ora red 43 PFTALb 7b 5 8 red grn 32 PFTASa 8a 4 Circuit board grn red 42 PFTASb 8b 5 9 red brn 11 RK1 opener 9a 3 brn red 31 AK1 closer 9b 2 10 red gry 02 UK1 10a 1 gry red 22 UK2 10b 3 3 11 blk blu 13 RK2 opene...

Page 463: ...voltage 5 V Contact current max 1 25 A Contact power max 30 W Trunk failure transfer ALUM In the event of a power failure or a system restart or reload an analog trunk is transferred from the system to an analog telephone If the power supply voltage returns after an inter ruption and a trunk call is in progress activation of the trunk failure transfer relay is prevent ed by optocoupler ALUM relay ...

Page 464: ...V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Options Figure 3 166 REALS S30807 Q6629 X To the SIPAC 4SU connector X17 Signals are picked up via SIVAPAC connec tor X116 on the backplane Removal tab You can insert a screwdriver here to remove REALS from the shelf ...

Page 465: ...l you hear a click see Figure 4 22 The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws see Figure 3 167 Cable and connector assignment Table 3 174 shows the assignment of the SIVAPAC connector X116 on the backplane and the assignment of the jumper strip in the MDFU E Fig...

Page 466: ... 3 wht grn 16 0 V 3a grn wht 15 3b 4 wht brn 14 0V_F 4a brn wht 13 M48VF2 4b 48 V max 300 mA 5 wht gry 12 5a gry wht 11 0 V 5b 6 red blu 10 AK1 6a Relay 1 Normally open contact blu red 9 AK2 6b Relay 2 Normally open contact 7 red ora 8 AK3 7a Relay 3 Normally open contact ora red 7 AK4 7b Relay 4 Normally open contact 8 red grn 6 0 V 8a grn red 5 PFTASa 8b ALUM Trunk board 9 red brn 4 PFTASb 9a br...

Page 467: ...ne module blu yel 23 PFTTSa 16b 17 yel ora 58 17a ora yel 57 S5 17b 18 yel grn 56 0 V 18a grn yel 55 18b 19 yel brn 54 19a brn yel 53 S3 19b 20 yel gry 52 S4 20a gry yel 51 0 V 20b 21 vio blu 50 UK1 21a Relay 1 Switch contact blu vio 49 UK2 21b Relay 2 Switch contact 22 vio ora 48 UK3 22a Relay 3 Switch contact ora vio 47 UK4 22b Relay 4 Switch contact 23 vio grn 46 0 V 23a grn vio 45 23b 24 vio b...

Page 468: ...limiting components and surge protection elements required by law No options bus lines are needed The slot X3 wiring is polarized The STBG4 channel is looped between TLA and the trunk Figure 3 168 STBG4 For France Only Interfaces S30817 Q934 A Table 3 175 STBG4 For France Only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 1 Not used AL 1 2 BL 1 BL 1 3 AN 1 AL 2 4 BL 2 BL 2 5 AN 2 AL 3 6 BL ...

Page 469: ...l of four outputs in the form of two floating switch contacts each and four control inputs in the form of optocouplers for externally activating an electrically isolated nor mally open NO contact Example You can route the 12 V signal for power failure alert to the control input of the opto coupler for connector X4 or X6 Route the signal through a normally open NO contact that is electrically isola...

Page 470: ...es S30817 Q932 A Figure 3 170 STRBR Interfaces S30817 Q932 Z 7 Warning The STRB or STRBR interface is an SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Circuit inter face as defined by IEC 60950 Do not connect any circuits whose voltages exceed the following limit values Maximum 30 Vac 42 Vpeak or 60 Vdc CBCC CBCP side Board side STRB X1 X2 X3 X4 1 8 1 8 X5 X6 8 1 8 1 MDF CBRC side Board side STRBR X1 X2 8 pin MW8...

Page 471: ...Service Manual 3 381 Boards for HiPath 3000 Options STRB and STRBR board relay and sensor functions Figure 3 171 STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions STRB or STRBR K1 21 K1 22 K1 23 K1 11 K1 12 K1 13 Relay 12 VI 12 V OPTKP1 To system Short the wires to activate the sensor Sensor ...

Page 472: ...on 3 K 1 22 Relay contact K1 2 NO 4 K 1 23 Relay contact K1 2 NC 5 12VI 12 V control voltage optocoupler 6 OPTKP 2 Control input optocoupler 2 7 12VI 12 V control voltage optocoupler 8 OPTKP 1 Control input optocoupler 1 X5 1 K 3 12 Relay contact K3 1 NO 2 K 3 13 Relay contact K3 1 NC 3 K 2 11 Relay contact K2 1 common 4 K 2 12 Relay contact K2 1 NO 5 K 2 13 Relay contact K2 1 NC 6 K 1 11 Relay co...

Page 473: ...2 NO 2 23 ACT3 2A Relay contact K202 NC 2 24 ACT3 1M Relay contact K202 common 1 25 ACT3 1B Relay contact K202 NO 1 26 ACT3 1A Relay contact K202 NC 1 27 P12VI 12 V optocoupler 3 28 SENSE3 Control input optocoupler 3 31 ACT2 2M Relay contact K201 common 2 32 ACT2 2B Relay contact K201 NO 2 33 ACT2 2A Relay contact K201 NC 2 34 ACT2 1M Relay contact K201 common 1 35 ACT2 1B Relay contact K201 NO 1 ...

Page 474: ...or U S Introduction You can use the V24 1 board in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 This provides a serial V 24 in terface for connecting PCs printers or applications Interfaces Figure 3 172 V24 1 Not for U S S30807 Q6916 X100 Figure 3 173 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 V 24 Connections 1 26 25 pin Sub D jack To CBCC CBCP X7 via ribbon cable X2 Component side shown ...

Page 475: ...onnector Assignment HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Table 3 178 Pin Assignments of the V 24 Socket X2 Connector X2 Signal I O 2 TxD O 3 RxD I 4 RTS O 5 CTS I 6 DSR I 20 DTR O 7 0V 12000 12100 No other pins in connector X2 are used TxD RxD RTS CTS DSR DTR Vcc GND RxD TxD CTS RTS DTR DSR 0V To CB X7 Edge connector 25 pin TTL RS 232 Level converter and electrical isolation X2 Sub D jack 25 pin ...

Page 476: ...apter is required as an adapter between the 25 pin connector on the cable C39195 Z7267 C13 and a 9 pin jack for connection to the V 24 interface on all HiPath 3000 V1 2 or later systems V 24 adapter assignment Table 3 179 V 24 Adapter Assignment C39334 Z7080 C2 9 pin jack Signal 25 pin jack Pin Pin 1 DCD 8 2 RxD 3 3 TxD 2 4 DTR 20 5 GND 7 6 DSR 6 7 RTS 4 8 CTS 5 9 RI 22 ...

Page 477: ...rvice PC to the V 24 interface on all HiPath 3000 systems V1 2 or later V 24 cable assignment Figure 3 175 V 24 Cable Assignment C30267 Z355 A25 9 pin jack DCD RxD TxD DTR DSR RTS CTS GND RI 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 9 Shield Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Data Send Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Ground Ring Indicator DCD RxD TxD DTR DSR RTS CTS GND RI 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 ...

Page 478: ...Boards for HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 3 388 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual boards fm Options ...

Page 479: ...ernal Patch Panel page 4 66 Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP page 4 81 Connecting Workpoint Clients page 4 82 Making Trunk and Networking Connections page 4 82 Performing a Visual Inspection page 4 83 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 page 4 85 Installation Prerequisites page 4 85 Installation Procedure page 4 86 Installing HiPath 3750 page 4 88 Installing HiPath ...

Page 480: ...H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 4 2 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Overview Installing HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 page 4 167 Installing HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 Inch Housing page 4 188 Topic ...

Page 481: ...m 2 to 8 mm 1 4 to 5 16 in Phillips or cross point screwdrivers sizes 1 and 2 TORX screwdriver Wire stripper for example from Krone Board wrench part no C39300 A7194 B10 Electric drill hammer Level tape measure For U S only Punch down tool suitable for the block used such as block 66 Resources Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltag...

Page 482: ... System Cabinets from Page 4 8 Single Cabinet Two cabinets stacked Two cabinets side by side Mounting System Cabinets in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 25 4 Grounding the System page 4 15 Checking the Grounding page 4 20 Grounding the System page 4 28 Checking the Grounding page 4 30 5 Installing Boards Configuration Notes page 4 31 6 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane page 4 51 7 If required use a...

Page 483: ...Allow a minimum clearance of 10 cm both at the rear and the front of the cabinets for main taining boards and for wiring Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat for example sunlight and heaters Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems cove...

Page 484: ...ot be more than 2 4 m 8 ft from the system The power source must provide 120 V AC single phase fused power at 50 60 Hz and 20 A A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used The system must be properly grounded before startup see description in Section 4 2 3 4 Table 4 2 Ele...

Page 485: ...ocedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the proper departments 3 Dispose of the packing materials properly 7 Caution Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with visible damage ...

Page 486: ...nels if required The front plastic cover for board servicing and the rear plastic cover for cable servicing are not attached to the system cabinets Both covers are supplied in separate packages 4 2 3 3 1 Overview System configurations The following setup options are possible for system cabinets Single cabinet Two cabinets stacked Two cabinets side by side 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main prote...

Page 487: ...em cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and stable 2 Check that the space between the base of the cabinet and the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figure 4 1...

Page 488: ...et and the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figure 4 1 B so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nut...

Page 489: ... H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 11 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Positioning the cabinet feet Figure 4 2 HiPath 3800 Positioning the Cabinet Feet ...

Page 490: ...3 54 7620 09 05 4 12 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Installing a stacked two cabinet system Figure 4 3 HiPath 3800 Installing a Stacked Two Cabinet System Rear View 50 mm 50 mm ...

Page 491: ...d the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figure 4 1 B so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nut Figu...

Page 492: ...54 7620 09 05 4 14 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Installing a Two Cabinet System Side by Side Figure 4 4 HiPath 3800 Installing a Two Cabinet System Side by Side Rear View 50 mm ...

Page 493: ...sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain relieved If external factors can impact on the ground conductor and if protected installation is not possible the ground conductor must have a minimum cross section of 4 mm2 Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock 7 Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you mu...

Page 494: ...tem Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame nor for U S Main distribution frame if present Example Potential equalization bus but not central heating system drain channels ground conductor for antenna system to next main distribution frame if present e g MDFU E Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 HiPath 3800 BC HiPath 3800 EC if present Attach to the gril...

Page 495: ...ath 3800 Grounding option 1a Grounding option 1b Figure 4 6 HiPath 3800 Grounding Option 1a not for USA Figure 4 7 HiPath 3800 Grounding Option 1b not for USA green yellow Example Potential equalization bus HiPath 3800 Main grounding terminal HiPath 3800 L1 N PE 230 V green yellow Example Connector socket Grounding outlets Main grounding terminal ...

Page 496: ...lso be grounded by a separate ground conductor Choose a ground connection with less than 2 ohms of resistance such as Master ground busbar Ground field Copper ground rod Run a separate earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground lo cated in the lower right corner of the backplane The minimum cross section required is 12 AWG Figure 4 8 shows the safety conductor connect...

Page 497: ...cated in the electrical service panel providing power to the Hi Path 3800 system Main grounding ter minal Connection cable with plug Recommended 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire con ductor not exceeding 126 feet in length blank or green yel low Grounding point example Master ground busbar AC outlet Fuse box facil ity 20 A 120 VAC 60 Hz Neutral ground Notes Single point ground SPG configuration...

Page 498: ... the ground connection to the system Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3800 Prerequisites HiPath 3800 is not yet connected to the low voltage network via the power cable The system s separate grounding is connected 10 ohms 2 Check the ohmic resistance between the individual sys tem parts basic ...

Page 499: ...00 mm make installation cable servicing and the installation of additional components in the rear of the cabinet much easier The support brackets required for installing the system cabinets must have a minimum ultimate load of 40 kg The support brackets must be purchased from the relevant 19 inch cabinet supplier The system cabinets must be fixed to the cabinet bars using the angle brackets includ...

Page 500: ...not expose the 19 inch cabinet to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 Information on the design of the HiPath 3800 can be found in Section 2 2 2 1 Figure ...

Page 501: ...nch cabinet 7 Caution The height units represented in yellow in Figure 4 10 must be kept clear to ensure adequate ventilation of the system cabinets Figure 4 10 HiPath 3800 Installation Examples in the 19 Inch Cabinet Examples of a 19 inch cabinet height of 1 92 m with 37 height units HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet HiPath 3800 Expansion cabi net Patch Panel Patch Panel ...

Page 502: ...ts Procedure Table 4 3 Electrical Connection Values USA only Nominal voltage Nominal voltage range Nominal Frequency Range Wall Outlet Configura tions from to from to 120 V AC 60 Hz 110 V AC 130 V AC 47 Hz 63 Hz NEMA 5 15 2 pin 3 wire earth Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage...

Page 503: ...er Two angle brackets order no C39165 A7075 D1 which are supplied with the system cabinet 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before starting the system and before connecting up the peripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected to the pow...

Page 504: ...n Figure 4 12 in the 19 inch cabinet using the screws provided Note the use of cabinet floors is not permitted to prevent overheating 4 Lift the system cabinet into the 19 inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two sup port brackets B in Figure 4 12 Slide the cabinet into the 19 inch cabinet until the front edge of the system cabinet is flush with the front of the 19 inch frame 5 Secure the syste...

Page 505: ...620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 27 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Installation in the 19 inch cabinet Figure 4 12 HiPath 3800 Installing System Cabinets in 19 Inch Cabinet A B A B ...

Page 506: ...led in the 19 inch cabinet and connected to the ground conductor Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a li censed electrician to install the ground If you answer Yes to both questions the system system cabinets patch panels may be grounded as described below 7 Danger Each HiPath 3800 system cabinet and any patch panel S30807 K6143 X th...

Page 507: ...ch Panels in a 19 Inch Cabinet Patch Panel if present for example Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X Potential equalization bus in 19 cabinet for example HiPath 3800 BC HiPath 3800 EC if present Attach to the grill using cable ties Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 To other patch panels S30807 K6143 X if present A ground conductor is not required for the S0 ...

Page 508: ...e driver to isolate the external devices in the event of a malfunction Step Activity Target 1 Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to the 19 inch cabinet Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3800 Prerequisites No device in the 19 inch cabinet is connected to the low voltage network ...

Page 509: ...n cabinet EC slots 1 to 6 and slots 8 to 14 for peripheral boards The central control board CBSAP has a fixed slot slot 6 only in the basic cabinet BC Depending on your requirements up to three LUNA2 power supply units can be used in the basic cabinet BC and up to four in the expansion cabinet EC In V6 0 or later the cPCI box CSAPE can be used in the basic cabinet 7 Caution Always wear an antistat...

Page 510: ...lling HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 4 32 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 14 HiPath 3800 Board Slots in the Basic Cabinet ...

Page 511: ...P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 33 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 15 HiPath 3800 Board Slots in the Expansion Cabinet Not used ...

Page 512: ...stem especially when handling boards Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices see Page 1 9 If Then Board is to be re moved Insert the tip of the board wrench marked Pull into the top opening on the front cover of the board to be removed Lever the board out of the shelf by pushing the board wrench upwards Figure 4 16 left Then you can pull the module out of the system...

Page 513: ...o connection options in the front panel To do this insert the two bottom pins on the shielding cover into the openings provided for this purpose on the slide in shelf Then push the shielding cover in the direction of the board until it locks into position refer to Figure 4 17 Empty board slots must also be covered with shielding covers Figure 4 16 HiPath 3800 Removing Inserting the Board Using the...

Page 514: ...t cover An additional cover is not required Special board attachments CSAPE Insert the cPXI box CSAPE into the relevant slot of the basic cabinet and apply pressure until you hear a click The slot must be covered with a panel before the system is started up The panel is fixed onto the shelf with four screws see Figure 4 18 Figure 4 18 HiPath 3800 cPCI Box CSAPE in the Basic Cabinet with Panel Moun...

Page 515: ...odules can be used in the expansion cabinet For in formation on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required see the LUNA2 board description Push the LUNA2 power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system cabinet shelf until you hear a click The slots for the power supply units must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up The outer panel is ...

Page 516: ...5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 20 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 and REALS in the Basic Cabinet With Out er Panel Mounted Figure 4 21 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 in the Expansion Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted Fixing screws Fixing screws ...

Page 517: ...ALS board into the slot marked 3 in the lower part of the shelf in the basic cabinet and apply pressure until you hear a click The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an out er panel before the system is started up The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws see Figure 4 20 Figure 4 22 HiPath 3800 Installing the REALS Board ...

Page 518: ... S30807 Q6624 X to the SIVAPAC connector on the back plane Slot with SLCN SLMA SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Attach a connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks S30807 Q6622 X to the SIVAPAC connector on the back plane different or no as signment Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots For U S only Connector panels with CHAMP jack see Section 4 2 6 6...

Page 519: ...PAC 1 SU connectors see Section 4 2 6 7 Slot with SLCN SLMA SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 STMD3 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Plug a connector panel with SIPAC 1 SU connectors S30807 Q6631 X into the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane different or no as signment Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots 1 for selected countries only 2 for U S only If Then ...

Page 520: ... HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connectors The TMEW2 and TMDID for U S only boards have SIVAPAC connector strips and as a result SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapters have to be installed in order to use them in HiPath 3800 The SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapter consists of three individual parts refer to Figure 4 23 two adapter modules one startup module Figure 4 23 SIVAPAC SIPAC Board Adapter Component ...

Page 521: ... module on the connector strip Figure 4 24 B of the board The outside edges of the adapter module must match the outside edges of the connector strip 4 Make sure that the outermost row of pins on the adapter module and the outermost row of jacks on the connector strip are aligned flush with one another and press the adapter module fully into the connector strip 5 Close the locking hooks 6 Repeat s...

Page 522: ...pter increases the board length The boards jut out slightly from the board shelf To ensure that these boards can still snap into place in spite of the board adapter the upper black lock must be replaced with a gray lock Figure 4 25 Replacing the Board Lock Remove the black lock At the point marked with the arrow press the lock out of its seating and pull it out of the shelf Black and gray board lo...

Page 523: ...connected boards in the following situations The maximum configuration has not yet been reached While sequentially scanning the slots for each board the system software checks whether the maximum number of stations or trunks has been exceeded If it has the board is not activated The board LED shows the board s status At least one B channel on line trunk modules is available for the slot only the a...

Page 524: ...e division multiplex channels available The following figures show the PCM highways for both system cabinets of the HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet PCM highways The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each There are 32 time division multiplex channels available for each PCM highway The PCM highway bundles in the basic cabinet are used by peripheral boards according to ...

Page 525: ...r only complete boards are activated on the other trunk group The remaining time division multiplex channels remain free Two cabinet system basic cabinet expansion cabinet All peripheral boards use the PCM highways from bundle A only Expansion cabinet PCM highways The expansion cabinet provides a PCM highway bundle with 2 x 4 PCM highways There are 32 time division multiplex channels available for...

Page 526: ...ctive stations 7 Restrictions for using the TMDID board The TMDID board only uses the first half of a PCM segment Consequently a max imum of 64 channels is available on each PCM segment for TMDID specific static time division multiplex channels To guarantee that the system operates without blocking when using the TMDID the boards on a PCM segment must not require more than the 64 static time divis...

Page 527: ...being conducted over a Current location SLCN board additional time division multiplex channels will be required More information is provided in Section 11 6 Multi SLC and System Wide Networking 2 The maximum number of masters and slaves possible is taken into consideration 3 Static time division multiplex channel assignment for operation as a trunk board dynamic assignment for operation as a subsc...

Page 528: ...system Single cabinet sys tem see Page 4 46 1 5 128 erlangs 128 erlangs1 1 The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each DIUN2 DIU2U for U S only IVMNL IVMN8 and STMI2 use the PCM highways from bundle F Thus there are an additional 128 time division multiplex channels available for slots 1 5 and for slots 7 10 for these boards in the basic cabinet If HiPath 3800 i...

Page 529: ... are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting the external mail distribution frame MDFU E or external patch panels using CABLUs see Section 4 2 6 7 The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of...

Page 530: ...HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 2 6 1 Backplane of the Basic Cabinet Figure 4 29 HiPath 3800 Backplane S30804 Q5392 X of the Basic Cabinet 9 SIVAPAC connec tor for peripherals 68 pin DB68 mini jack connection to EC DC port AC port ...

Page 531: ...V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 53 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 30 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Basic Cabinet X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X109 X110 X111 X112 X201 X116 X209 X212 X211 X214 ...

Page 532: ...distribution frame or external patch panel using CABLUs see Section 4 2 6 7 For selected countries only PBXXX board An APPCU adapter S30807 K5415 X is used to connect the CAS cable and the DIUN2 connection cable X109 X112 X116 SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the REALS board CABLUs for connection to the MDFU E jumper strip for 25 TW C39195 A7267 A372 3 m in length short stripped ...

Page 533: ...ional Service Manual 4 55 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 4 2 6 2 Expansion Cabinet Backplane Figure 4 31 HiPath 3800 Expansion Cabinet Backplane S30804 Q5393 X 13 SIVAPAC connectors for peripheral boards DBSAP with 68 pin DB68 mini jack connec tion to BC DC port AC port ...

Page 534: ...000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 32 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Expansion Cab inet X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X109 X110 X111 X112 X113 X114 X115 X106 X209 X211 X220 X223 X210 X214 ...

Page 535: ...The SIVAPAC connectors can have the following connector panels Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for direct connection of peripherals see Section 4 2 6 5 For U S only Connector panels with CHAMP jack for direct connection of peripherals see Section 4 2 6 6 Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting an external main distribution frame or external patch panel using CABLUs see...

Page 536: ...rals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected to the power supply if all system cabi nets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided If Then Slot with SLCN SLMA8 SLMO8 STMD3 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 CABLUs for connection between backplane SIVAPAC connector and MDFU E splitting strip for 16 TW C39195 A7267 A370 3 m in length short strippe...

Page 537: ... CABLU for connection between backplane SIVAPAC connectors and ex ternal patch panel S30807 K6143 X SIVAPAC socket terminal strip S30267 Z333 A20 2 m in length refer to Figure 4 43 S30267 Z333 A50 5 m in length refer to Figure 4 43 Open end cable 24 TW for connection between backplane SIVAPAC con nector and external patch panel S30267 Z196 A150 15 m in length S30267 Z196 A250 25 m in length S30267...

Page 538: ... 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 4 60 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 33 HiPath 3800 Backplane of the Basic Cabinet with Mounted Filler Panels ...

Page 539: ...800 connector panels with RJ45 Jacks 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the pe ripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected to the power supply if all system cabi nets are sealed at the rear with the connection and fi...

Page 540: ...ignment is provided in the board descriptions in Chapter 3 Slot with SLCN SLMA SLMA21 SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks S30807 Q6622 X The RJ45 jacks are configured with two wires different or no assignment The backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots must be cov ered with filler panels 1 for selected countries only 2 for U S only If Then ...

Page 541: ...assignment is provided in the board descriptions in Chapter 3 Figure 4 35 HiPath 3800 Connector Panel with CHAMP Jack for U S only 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the pe ripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected...

Page 542: ...ernal patch panel See also Section 4 2 7 Using an External Main Distribu tion Frame or External Patch Panel In special cases where the prefabricated CABLUs cannot be used open end cables should be used Figure 4 36 HiPath 3800 Connector Panel with Two SIPAC 1 SU Connectors S30807 Q6631 X 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point ...

Page 543: ...ith 16 TW 6 m in length S30267 Z192 A100 Open end cable with 16 TW 10 m in length S30267 Z192 A200 Open end cable with 16 TW 20 m in length Information on the required stripped lengths for open end cables is provided in Figure 4 48 Slot with SLMA SLMA21 SLMO2 CABLUs for connection between connector panel SIPAC 1 SU connectors and MDFU E jumper strip for 25 TW S30269 Z100 A14 3 m in length short st...

Page 544: ...e peripherals The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of the agree ment This may involve the implementation of an external main distribution frame or an external patch panel This section contains information on the following external components Main distribution frame MDFU E Section 4 2 7 1 Patch panel S30807 K6143 X Section 4 2 7 2 S0 patch pane...

Page 545: ...n External Main Distribution Frame MDFU E S30805 U5283 X For U S only Not more than 21 CABLUs per MDFU E with one 16 TW strip or 25 TW strip 9 x 30 mm can be implemented Figure 4 37 MDFU E Layout and Dimensions 669 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm System side Line network 1 2 3 6 4 5 Jumpering Channel 19 20 21 21 slots 9 x 30 mm 328 8 mm 669 0 mm Special built in comps 2 x PFT1 or ...

Page 546: ...twork see jumpering duct Figure 4 37 Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires Surge protector To divert surges caused by lightning insert surge protectors on lines that leave the system buildings outside stations lines 500 m long Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip described above see Figure 4 39 Step Activity 1 Use the template to d...

Page 547: ...d jumper strips Figure 4 38 Assignment Numbering of the Splitting Jumper Strips view from above a a b 1Ea 1Sa 1Eb 1Sb a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Splitting strip for 16 TW C39334 A166 A1 Jumper strip for 25 TW C39334 A166 A3 23 19 17 21 25 S0 bus 1 S0 bus 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 No 25 not used E Receive S Transmit b b ...

Page 548: ...otector plug locations View from below Cable with film sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 250 5 Stripped length Velcro tape 19 mm wide Bundle fastener 1 Stripped length 600 5 mm Stripped length 910 5 mm for MDFU E slots 1 to 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b b 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a a a a a a a a b b b...

Page 549: ...blu blu wht blu yel 2 wht ora 17 yel ora ora wht ora yel 3 wht grn 18 yel grn grn wht grn yel 4 wht brn 19 yel brn brn wht brn yel 5 wht gry 20 yel gry gry wht gry yel 2 6 red blu 5 21 vio blu blu red blu vio 7 red ora 22 vio ora ora red ora vio 8 red grn 23 vio grn grn red grn vio 9 red brn 24 vio brn brn red brn vio 10 red gry Note In the case of cables with 16 double wires the specifications fo...

Page 550: ...43 X Structure All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 40 Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X 8 1 MW8 jack assignment 4 a wire 5 b wire Necessary height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 1 one height unit corresponds to approx 1 7 43 mm SIVAPAC edge connector port for CABLU connection to the backplane Eight surge protector plug loca tions Front panel with 3 x 16 M...

Page 551: ...tem cabinet and secure it to the 19 inch frame on both the left and the right using two screws on each side 7 Caution The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee suf ficient ventilation of the system cabinet This is achieved by the gray plastic cover fixed to the top of the system cabinets Never remove th...

Page 552: ...gure 4 43 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets and all patch panels to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals for example potential equalization bus Figure 4 42 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X for Different Peripheral Boards 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 553: ... 42 44 46 48 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 X5 X1 SIVAPAC edge connectors port for CABLU connection to the backplane Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks Slots F1 F8 for surge protector Options for connecting the external line network Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels Using jumper wire bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14 and between X13 and X15 The co...

Page 554: ...3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 2 7 3 Inserting External S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 Structure All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 44 S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 3 x 8 MW8 jacks Necessary height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 1 one height unit corresponds to approx 1 7 43 mm ...

Page 555: ...tem cabinet and secure it to the 19 inch frame on both the left and the right using two screws B on each side 7 Caution The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee suf ficient ventilation of the system cabinet This is achieved by the gray plastic cover fixed to the top of the system cabinets Never remove ...

Page 556: ...el Figure 4 47 You can use the Kro ne wiring tool for this Figure 4 46 Assignment of the S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 Figure 4 47 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel 7 5 3 1 23 21 19 17 8 6 4 2 24 22 20 18 3 x 8 MW8 jacks numbering 8 1 Pin MW8 jack assignment as a subscriber line as a trunk connection 3 Transmit Receive 4 Receive Transmit 5 Receive Transmit 6 Transmit Receive 8 7 6 3 2 1 4 5...

Page 557: ...d cable for the S0 patch panel The color codes for open end cables are provided in Table 4 8 Figure 4 48 Stripping the Open End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel 250 5 Stripped length Velcro tape 19 mm wide Bundle fastener 1 Cable with film sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 Stripped length 600 mm 5 mm ...

Page 558: ...iring tool for laying the cable wires Connecting to T1 PRI or CorNet Secondary Protection 7 DANGER Ground the system properly before connecting the stations 7 Caution The TMST2 Module can only be installed in conjunction with a listed channel service unit CSU 7 DANGER To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning the following boards require secondary protection when their lines leave the b...

Page 559: ... Optional plug in boards are packaged individually See Section 3 2 4 for information on slots for subboards on the central control board CBSAP 7 Caution Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system especially when handling boards Connect the wristband to the slide in shelf in the cabinet using the alligator clip 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface before i...

Page 560: ...nst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 2 9 Connecting Workpoint Clients Refer to Chapter 10 for details 4 2 10 Making Trunk and Networking Connections Refer to the following board descriptions for information DIUN2 S2M STMD3 S0 STMI2 IP TM2LP MSI TMEW2 E M DIU2U For U S Only TMC16 for selected countries only TMDID for U S only ...

Page 561: ... see Page 1 9 Table 4 9 Visual Inspection Procedure Step Activity Resources Remarks Action 1 Compare the slots of the available boards with the component mounting dia gram Board assign ment map If necessary correct the board config uration and notify the sales depart ment 2 Check that all boards are secure See Page 4 34 If necessary plug the boards in again 3 Check that a shielding cover has been ...

Page 562: ...alling the standalone HiPath 3800 Section 4 2 4 4 for installing the HiPath 3800 in the 19 inch cabi net 7 Check the local supply volt age Digital multime ter 8 Only for installing HiPath 3800 as a standalone sys tem close all system cabinets with the front and back plas tic covers provided Fit the cover into the guides and press down on the cover unit it snaps into place After finishing the visua...

Page 563: ...iers Slotted screwdrivers from 2 to 8 mm 1 4 to 5 16 in Phillips or cross point screwdrivers sizes 1 and 2 TORX screwdriver Wire stripper for example from Krone Electric drill hammer Level tape measure For U S only Punch down tool suitable for the block used such as block 66 Resources Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages Teleph...

Page 564: ... 92 Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 131 4 Setting up the System Cabinets from Page 4 93 Single Cabinet Two cabinets stacked Two cabinets side by side Three cabinets stacked Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 135 5 Grounding the System page 4 108 Checking the Grounding page 4 113 Grounding the System page 4 136 Checking the Grounding page 4 138 6 Connec...

Page 565: ...l 4 87 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 11 Making trunk connections page 4 163 12 Performing a Visual Inspection page 4 164 Table 4 10 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 System Installation Procedure Step Installation Activity Installing HiPath 3750 Installing HiPath 3700 19 Inch Cabi net ...

Page 566: ...on how to install the HiPath 3750 communication system This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions Information on the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug in boards board configuration final visual inspection applies to both HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 and is desc...

Page 567: ...g op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 For U S Only Install secondary protection equipment Avoid standard carpeting as it tends to produce electrostatic charges Ensure the availability of a power source that meets the requirements described in Section 4 3 3 1 1 Ensure that Siemens equipment is 40...

Page 568: ...may not be more than 2 4 m 8 ft from the system The power source must provide 120 V AC single phase fused power at 50 60 Hz and 20 A A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used The system must be properly grounded before startup see description in Section 4 3 3 5 Table 4 ...

Page 569: ...nts Procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the proper departments 3 Dispose of the packing materials properly 7 Caution Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with visible damage ...

Page 570: ...ion notes The main distribution frame should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system note length of connection cable and at eye level Mount it on the wall according to the instructions that came with it The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template It also contains the nec essary screws and wall anchors for attaching the MDF to the wall Procedure for wall mounting Step Activity...

Page 571: ...s 7 Warning A fully equipped HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 22 kg 48 46 lb We recommend lifting cabinets only before they are equipped Do not attempt to lift objects that you think are too heavy for you use a hand truck or get assistance 7 Danger Be sure to ground the system properly before starting it up and connecting the sta tions System One cabinet on a horizontal surface One cabinet on a wall for...

Page 572: ...oth covers This allows the cables to be routed to the MDFU or MDFU E for example To replace a cover position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on the cover until it snaps into place Procedure Figure 4 49 Mounting the cover Step Activity 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver with the blade vertical into a recess 1 2 Carefully swing the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the c...

Page 573: ... S only You can mount a one cabinet system on the wall using the wall mount kit Wall Mount Kit Procedure Step Activity 1 Remove the front and rear cover from the cabinet 2 Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and stable Figure 4 50 HiPath 3750 Wall Mount Kit for U S only Step Activity 1 Install a plywood backboard at least 0 75 in 19 05 mm thick Latching...

Page 574: ...the bracket 3 Install the screws in the top two holes tightening them until 0 25 in 6 35 mm is pro truding 4 Bolt the swing out assembly on the wall mounting bracket to the back of the cabinet 5 Close the swing out assembly Then mount the bracket and cabinet on the top screws 6 Swing the cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely 7 Insert and fully tighten the bottom screw in the round hol...

Page 575: ...he BC 4 If mounting the system on the floor or on a table attach the two cabinets using four connecting plates each held by two screws with washers Figure 4 52 Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction inside the cabinets and pointing inward 7 DANGER The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for free stand ing systems For U S only You can in...

Page 576: ...les To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets you can cut out the pre stamped re cesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and break them out with a pair of flat nosed pliers Figure 4 52 HiPath 3750 Installing a Two Cabinet System Stacked 7 Caution Be careful when breaking out the recesses Remove any sharp edges and corners Inside the cabi...

Page 577: ...ace mounted system cabinets to ensure stability Figure 4 53 Step Activity 1 Place the stabilizer feet beneath the right and left outer edges of the cabinets In sert the cabinet feet into the two holes in the stabilizer feet 1 2 Attach the stabilizer feet to the metal housing of the cabinet 2 by inserting two screws per foot into the pre drilled holes in the housing 3 Continue installing the system...

Page 578: ... 3 3 5 2 Do not fasten wall mounted cabinets with the connecting plates as this will interfere with the earth ground Figure 4 54 HiPath 3750 Wall Mount Kit for U S only Step Activity 1 Install a plywood backboard at least 0 75 in 19 05 mm thick 2 Use the wall mounting bracket as a template to drill three holes in the backboard Use the keyed holes in the top of the bracket and the round hole in the...

Page 579: ... mounting bracket to the back of each cab inet 5 Close the swing out assembly Close the swing out assembly and hang each brack et and cabinet on the top screws 6 Swing the cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely 7 Insert and fully tighten the bottom screws in the round holes 8 Bolt the latching assembly to the opposite edge of each cabinet 7 Warning Do not fasten power cords to building...

Page 580: ...HiPath 3700 Laying the Connecting Cables To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets you can cut out the pre stamped re cesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and break them out with a pair of flat nosed pliers 7 Warning Be careful when breaking out the recesses Remove any sharp edges and corners ...

Page 581: ...abinet covers 2 Place the system cabinets side by side at the installation site and make sure that they are level and stable Correct any differences in height 3 If mounting the system on the floor or on a table attach the two cabinets using four connecting plates each held by two screws with washers Figure 4 56 Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction inside the ca...

Page 582: ...ansion cabinet EC1 on basic cabinet Insert the feet on EC1 into the depressions on the top of the BC 4 Attach the three cabinets using four connecting plates each held by two screws with washers Figure 4 57 Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction inside the cabinets and pointing inward 7 DANGER The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for...

Page 583: ...move the lower grills in the two rear covers To lay the connection cables between stacked cabinets you can cut out the pre stamped recesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and break them out with a pair of flat nosed pliers Figure 4 57 HiPath 3750 Installing a Three Cabinet System Stacked 7 Caution Be careful when breaking out the recesses Remove a...

Page 584: ...r cables Seismic Anchoring Local building codes may require the use of seismic anchors in critical locations such as hospitals The HiPath 3750 seismic anchor kit includes bolts and attach ments specially designed for concrete floors If necessary consult the location plan ner to check legal requirements or whether the customer requires seismic anchors for a different substrate Step Activity 1 Hook ...

Page 585: ...ath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 107 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Seismic Anchors for Multiple Cabinets Figure 4 59 HiPath 3750 Seismic Anchoring for Multiple Cabinets Front View for U S only ...

Page 586: ...U or MDFU E must be grounded as shown in Figure 4 60 by a separate ground conductor minimum cross section 2 5 mm2 Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain relieved Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock 7 Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a licensed electrician to ground the s...

Page 587: ...unding the System Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame not for U S to the second and third MDFU if present Example Potential equalization bus but not central heating system drain channels ground conductor for antenna system HiPath 3750 BC Grounding screw metal back plane lower center MDFU MDFU E Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 green yellow Min cros...

Page 588: ...fm Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Grounding option 1a Grounding option 1b Figure 4 61 HiPath 3750 Grounding Option 1a not for USA Figure 4 62 HiPath 3750 Grounding Option 1b not for USA green yellow Example Potential equalization bus HiPath 3750 HiPath 3750 L1 N PE 230 V green yellow Example Connector socket Grounding outlets ...

Page 589: ...und field Copper ground rod Run a separate earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground lo cated in the center of the bottom of the backplane The minimum cross section required is 12 AWG Figure 4 63 shows the safety conductor connectors for the basic cabinet If one or two ECs are required in addition to the BC in a standalone system the four metal con necting plates mus...

Page 590: ... HiPath 3750 Located in the electrical service panel providing power to the Hi Path 3750 system Main grounding ter minal Connection cable with plug Recommended 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire con ductor not exceeding 126 feet in length blank or green yel low Grounding point example Master ground busbar AC outlet Fuse box facil ity 20 A 120 VAC 60 Hz Neutral ground Note Single point ground SPG...

Page 591: ...nce of the ground connection to the system Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3750 Prerequisites HiPath 3750 is not yet connected to the low voltage network via the power cable The system s separate grounding is connected 10 ohms 2 Check the ohmic resistance between the individual sys tem parts ...

Page 592: ...on the 8 slot basic cabinet All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill on the metal back panel using cable ties The 8 slot basic cabinet has seven slots while the expansion cabinets each have eight slots for peripheral boards Figure 4 64 HiPath 3750 Backplane on the 8 Slot Basic Cabinet X70 X50 CBCPR X10 X60 X20 X30 X40 REAL BC only X5 X7 X80 X6 X13 X14 X88 X89 X68...

Page 593: ...o electrical isolation via 25 pin jack Connection for printer Plus products and other devices X5 BC Cable connector to REAL X6 BC MDFU to REAL connection via SU connector X11 BC Cable connector to EC1 X13 X12 BC Cable connector to EC1 X14 X13 BC EC1 EC2 Cable connector to EC2 X13 Cable connector to BC X11 Cable connector to BC X13 X14 BC EC1 EC2 Cable connector to EC2 X14 Cable connector to BC X12...

Page 594: ...es between the BC and ECs X98 EC1 EC2 1 SU connector each 16 TW to MDFU or MDFU E X29 X89 All 1 SU connector each 8 TW to MDFU or MDFU E not for S2M X99 EC1 EC2 1 SU connector each 8 TW to MDFU or MDFU E not for S2M If Then Two cabinet System Connect BC to EC1 2 cables S30267 Z178 A13 see Figure 4 66 Three cabinet System Connect BC to EC1 2 cables S30267 Z178 A13 Connect BC to EC2 2 cables S30267 ...

Page 595: ...h 3700 Two Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cable See Table 4 12 Figure 4 66 Two Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cables between BC and EC1 EC1 BC X13 X14 X11 X12 X13 X14 Cabinet part numbers BC S30777 U757 X EC1 S30777 U708 X100 Backplane part numbers BC S30777 Q757 X EC1 S30777 Q708 X100 Connection cable part num bers For connecting BC to EC1 S30267 Z178 A13 ...

Page 596: ...tion Terminating resistors in 8 slot cabinets BC Between slots CBCPR 2 and 3 4 and 8 UPSM EC1 Between slots 11 12 and 13 14 and 15 16 and 17 UPSM EC2 Between slots 20 21 and 22 23 and 24 25 and 26 UPSM Figure 4 67 Three Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cables between BC EC1 and EC2 X13 Cabinet part numbers BC S30777 U757 X EC1 EC2 S30777 U708 X100 Backplane part numbers BC S30777 Q757 X EC1 EC2 S3...

Page 597: ...ould be used Not for U S CABLUs for the slots containing peripheral boards Figure 4 88 If Then Assignment with SLMO81 SLMO24 SLA8N1 SLA16N1 or SLA24N Route 16 TW to the MDFU or MDFU E via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9 using a standard cable with 16 TW for each connection Connect both ca bles 1 CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9 to the same jumper strip 25 TW Part numbers for CABLUs with 25 TW j...

Page 598: ...ngth S30267 Z192 A100 10 m in length S30267 Z192 A200 20 m in length 1 A CABLU with 16 TW is also sufficient for these boards A CABLU with 24 TW is recommended to simplify station config uration expansion for example by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24 If Then Slot with 24 port peripheral board Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9 using standard CABLU S30267 Z3...

Page 599: ...0 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 121 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 S2M adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C Figure 4 68 S2M Adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C C39228 A7195 A12 SIPAC 1 SU jack Xx9 backplane MW8 RJ48C jack to the NT CSU or networked system ...

Page 600: ...plug locations View from below Cable with film sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 250 5 Stripped length Velcro tape 19 mm wide Bundle fastener 1 Stripped length 600 5 mm Stripped length 910 5 mm for MDFU E slots 1 to 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b b 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b...

Page 601: ...olor Codes for the Open End Cable Color group Pair a Wire Tip b Wire Ring Color group Pair a Wire Tip b Wire Ring 1 1 wht blu 3 11 blk blu blu wht blu blk 2 wht ora 12 blk ora ora wht ora blk 3 wht grn 13 blk grn grn wht grn blk 4 wht brn 14 blk brn brn wht brn blk 5 wht gry 15 blk gry gry wht gry blk 2 6 red blu 4 16 yel blu blu red blu yel 7 red ora ora red 8 red grn grn red 9 red brn brn red 10...

Page 602: ...E Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires Not for U S Surge protector To divert surges caused by lightning insert surge protectors on lines that leave the system buildings outside stations lines 500 m long Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip described above see Figure 4 69 7 Danger Connect the system to ground before connecting the ...

Page 603: ... 70 Assignment Numbering of the Splitting Jumper Strips view from above not for U S a a b Cable 2 SU Xx9 1Ea 1Sa 1Eb 1Sb a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Splitting strip for 16 TW C39334 A166 Jumper strip for 25 TW C39334 A166 A3 23 19 17 21 25 S0 bus 1 S0 bus 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 Cable 1 SU Xx8 No 25 not used CABLU S30269 Z100 A14 E Receive S Transmi...

Page 604: ...l Service Manual inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Layout and dimensions of the MDFU Figure 4 71 MDFU Layout and Dimensions 367 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm not for U S 2 x PFT1 or 1 x PFT4 9 slots 9 x 30 mm Special built in comps System side Line network 328 8 367 0 1 2 3 6 4 5 Jumpering Channel 9 7 8 ...

Page 605: ...h 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Layout and dimensions of the MDFU E Figure 4 72 MDFU E Layout and Dimensions 669 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm not for U S System side Line network 1 2 3 6 4 5 Jumpering Channel The MDFU E is delivered with most systems 19 20 21 21 slots 9 x 30 mm 328 8 669 0 Special built in comps 2 x PFT1 or ...

Page 606: ...g the cable wires Connecting to T1 PRI or CorNet Secondary Protection 7 DANGER Ground the system properly before connecting the stations 7 Caution The TMST1 module can only be installed in conjunction with a listed channel service unit CSU 7 DANGER To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning the following boards require secondary protection when their lines leave the building where the ma...

Page 607: ...n on how to install the HiPath 3700 communication system in a 19 inch cabinet This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic sys tem Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions Information on the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug in boards board configuration final visual inspection applies to both HiPath 3700 and...

Page 608: ... must fulfill the requirements specified in Table 4 14 The system must be properly grounded before startup see description in Section 4 3 4 5 4 3 4 2 Unpacking the Components Procedure Table 4 14 Electrical Connection Values for U S only Nominal voltage Nominal voltage range Nominal Frequency Range Wall Outlet Configura tions from to from to 120 V AC 60 Hz 110 V AC 130 V AC 47 Hz 63 Hz NEMA 5 15 2...

Page 609: ...mer 4 3 4 3 1 Removing the Cabinet Covers How the covers are secured The front cabinet cover for board servicing and the rear cabinet cover for cable servicing are each secured by two snap fasteners You can remove the upper and lower grills on both covers This allows the cables to be routed to the patch panel for example To replace a cover position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press do...

Page 610: ... the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the cabinet 2 until the fastener snaps out and the cover loosens 3 Then insert the screwdriver in the second recess 3 loosen its snap fastener Figure 4 73 HiPath 3700 Removing the Front and Rear Covers 7 Warning The front and rear covers on all system cabinets must be closed before the system is started up in a 19 inch cabinet To replace a cover ...

Page 611: ...re 4 74 to the 19 inch cabinet using two screws per bracket 2 Remove the front and rear cabinet covers 3 Remove both side pieces of the system cabinet 4 Attach the two angle brackets B in Figure 4 74 to the front of the system cabinet using two screws per bracket 5 Attach the four angle brackets C in Figure 4 74 to the rear of the system cabinet for base and cover support 6 Lift the system cabinet...

Page 612: ...g the Connecting Cables To lay the connection cables between system cabinets and patch panels you can cut out the pre stamped recesses in the bottom of system cabinet with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and break them out with a pair of flat nosed pliers Figure 4 74 HiPath 3700 Installation in the 19 Inch Cabinet 7 Caution Be careful when breaking out the recesses Remove any sharp edges and cor...

Page 613: ...ic communication network and HiPath 3700 are connected via patch pan els Patch panels are installed beneath the system cabinets in the 19 inch cabinet upward ther mal radiation Installation Procedure Install the patch panel immediately under the system cabinet A in Figure 4 75 and attach it to the left and right of the 19 inch frame using two screws B on each side Mounting the patch panel Figure 4...

Page 614: ...0 can be grounded as shown in Figure 4 76 A potential equalization bus must be installed in the 19 inch cabinet and connected to the ground conductor Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a li censed electrician to install the ground If you answer Yes to both questions the system system cabinets patch panels may be grounded as described...

Page 615: ...d Patch Panels in a 19 Inch Cabinet To other patch panels S30807 K6143 X if present A ground conductor is not re quired for the S0 patch panel S30807 K6143 X Potential equalization bus in 19 cabinet for example HiPath 3700 BC Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 HiPath 3700 EC1 if present HiPath 3700 EC2 if present Attach to t...

Page 616: ...a line driver to isolate the external devices in the event of a malfunction Step Activity Target 1 Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to the 19 inch cabinet Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3700 Prerequisites No device in the 19 inch cabinet is connected to the low voltage net...

Page 617: ...on the 8 slot basic cabinet All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill on the metal back panel using cable ties The 8 slot basic cabinet has seven slots while the expansion cabinets each have eight slots for peripheral boards Figure 4 77 HiPath 3700 Backplane on the 8 Slot Basic Cabinet X70 X50 CBCPR X10 X60 X20 X30 X40 REAL BC only X5 X7 X80 X6 X13 X14 X88 X89 X68...

Page 618: ...trical isolation via 25 pin jack Connection for printer Plus products and other devices X5 BC Cable connector to REAL X6 BC S0 patch panel to REAL connection via SU connector X11 BC Cable connector to EC1 X13 X12 BC Cable connector to EC1 X14 X13 BC EC1 EC2 Cable connector to EC2 X13 Cable connector to BC X11 Cable connector to BC X13 X14 BC EC1 EC2 Cable connector to EC2 X14 Cable connector to BC...

Page 619: ... between the BC and ECs X98 EC1 EC2 1 SU connector each 16 TW to the patch panel X29 X89 All 1 SU connector each 8 TW to the patch panel not for S2M X99 EC1 EC2 1 SU connector each 8 TW to the patch panel not for S2M If Then Two cabinet System Connect BC to EC1 2 cables S30267 Z178 A13 see Figure 4 79 Three cabi net System Connect BC to EC1 2 cables S30267 Z178 A13 Connect BC to EC2 2 cables S3026...

Page 620: ...h 3700 Two Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cable See Table 4 15 Figure 4 79 Two Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cables between BC and EC1 EC1 BC X13 X14 X11 X12 X13 X14 Cabinet part numbers BC S30777 U757 X EC1 S30777 U708 X100 Backplane part numbers BC S30777 Q757 X EC1 S30777 Q708 X100 Connection cable part num bers For connecting BC to EC1 S30267 Z178 A13 ...

Page 621: ...tion Terminating resistors in 8 slot cabinets BC Between slots CBCPR 2 and 3 4 and 8 UPSM EC1 Between slots 11 12 and 13 14 and 15 16 and 17 UPSM EC2 Between slots 20 21 and 22 23 and 24 25 and 26 UPSM Figure 4 80 Three Cabinet 8 Slot System Connection Cables between BC EC1 and EC2 X13 Cabinet part numbers BC S30777 U757 X EC1 EC2 S30777 U708 X100 Backplane part numbers BC S30777 Q757 X EC1 EC2 S3...

Page 622: ... TW to the patch panel S30807 K6143 X via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9 using a standard cable with 16 TW for each connection Connect both cables 1 CABLU with SU jacks labeled 8 and 9 to the same SIVAPAC socket terminal strip 25 TW Part number for CABLU with 24 TW S30267 Z363 A20 2 m in length Assignment with STMD8 You need a special S0 patch panel C39104 Z7001 B3 for this The 16 TW are routed to and...

Page 623: ...92 A200 20 m in length 1 A CABLU with 16 TW is also sufficient for these boards A CABLU with 24 TW is recommended to simplify station config uration expansion for example by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24 If Then Slot with 24 port peripheral boards Route 16 TW to the patch panel via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9 using standard CABLU S30267 Z365 A30 SU connectors are labeled 8 and 9 Both cables are ...

Page 624: ...caused by lightning insert surge protectors on lines that leave the system buildings outside stations lines 500 m long Connect the polarized surge protectors to slots F1 F8 provided on the patch panel seeFigure 4 82 All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 81 Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X SIVAPAC edge connector port for CABLU connection to the backplane 8 1 MW...

Page 625: ...36 38 40 42 44 46 48 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 X5 X1 SIVAPAC edge connectors port for CABLU connection to the backplane Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks Slots F1 F8 for surge protector Options for connecting the external line network Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels Using jumper wire bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14 and between X13 and X1...

Page 626: ...wing tables for information on the assignment of the MW8 jacks Table 3 107 for STMD8 board Table 3 173 for REAL board All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 83 S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 7 5 3 1 23 21 19 17 8 6 4 2 24 22 20 18 3 x 8 MW8 jacks numbering 8 1 Pin MW8 jack assignment as a subscriber line as a trunk connection 3 Transmit Receive 4 Receive ...

Page 627: ...000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 149 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Figure 4 84 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel 8 7 6 3 2 1 4 5 Pin assignment of MW8 jacks Twist the wire pairs before laying them ...

Page 628: ...sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 Stripped length 600 mm 5 mm Color group Pair a Wire Tip b Wire Ring Color group Pair a Wire Tip b Wire Ring Color group Pair a Wire Tip b Wire Ring 1 1 wht blu 2 6 red blu 3 11 blk blu blu wht blu red blu blk 2 wht ora 7 red ora 12 blk ora ora wht ora red ora blk 3 wht grn 8 red grn 1...

Page 629: ...0 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 151 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 S2M adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C Figure 4 86 S2M Adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C C39228 A7195 A12 SIPAC 1 SU jack Xx9 backplane MW8 RJ48C jack to the NT CSU or networked system ...

Page 630: ...or example with an ICCS network with out first entering the relocate code when you reconnect them the stations affected will go into operation with the data of the stations originally installed Figure 4 87 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X for Different Peripheral Boards 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2...

Page 631: ...always fully equipped when delivered Optional plug in boards are packaged individually See Chapter 3 for information on slots for subboards on the central control boards 7 Caution Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system especially when handling boards Connect the wristband to the slide in shelf in the cabinet using the alligator clip 7 Caution Place the central control board...

Page 632: ...specific requirements when the system is delivered Board slots in 8 slot cabinets Nine board slots are available in each cabinet The following boards are assigned permanent slots CBCPR central processor board slot 01 in the BC UPSM power supply unit slot 09 in the BC slot 18 in EC1 slot 27 in EC2 Depending on their width peripheral boards can be inserted in slots 02 to 08 in the BC 10 to 17 in EC1...

Page 633: ...expansion cabinets Figure 4 88 Slot Numbers and Widths in 8 Slot BC EC1 and EC2 Slot no Slot width mm Slot no EC1 EC2 Slot width mm CBCPR 45 X10 02 30 X20 03 30 X30 04 30 X40 08 45 X80 UPSM 90 X90 05 30 X50 06 30 X60 07 30 X70 10 19 30 X10 11 20 30 X20 12 21 30 X30 13 22 30 X40 17 26 30 X80 UPSM UPSM 90 X90 14 23 30 X50 15 24 30 X60 16 25 30 X70 Basic cabinet BC Expansion cabinets EC1 and EC2 ...

Page 634: ...tem software detects the boards in ascending order starting with the lowest installation position the first time the system starts up The system initializes subscriber line circuits and ports in the sequence indicated by the arrow Figure 4 89 The system activates all connected boards in the following situations The maximum configuration has not yet been reached While sequentially scanning the slot...

Page 635: ...d configuration To avoid B channel blocking install the TMST1 board only in the BC or in the first two slots of the ECs HiPath 3000 Manager E observes this rule when performing off line configuration Figure 4 89 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Initialization of Subscriber Line Circuits and Ports C B C P R BC U P S M Expansion cabinet Expansion cabinet U P S M U P S M C B C P R BC U P S M Expansion cab...

Page 636: ...s on a PCM segment do not require more than the 64 time division mul tiplex channels that are available The following table lists the number of time division multiplex channels that the different boards require Table 4 16 Number of Time Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board Board Number of time division multiplex channels required CR8N 8 HXGM3 without extension modules for additional DSP ...

Page 637: ...ng information on the subject of multi SLCs SLC16N board distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinets on page 3 156 IVML8 IVML24 see Section 3 3 6 A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 per system Then install them in the slot beside the power supply in the basic cabinet or the expansion cabinets No SLC16N may be inserted in the PCM segment of the IVML8 IVML24 No SLMO24 may be inserted in the PC...

Page 638: ...s Three cabinet system PCM segments Figure 4 91 PCM Segments for a Two Cabinet System Figure 4 92 PCM Segments for a Three Cabinet System C B C P R 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 8 U P S M 0 5 0 6 0 7 8 slot cabinets 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 7 U P S M 1 4 1 5 1 6 BC EC1 8 slot cabinets C B C P R 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 8 U P S M 0 5 0 6 0 7 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 6 U P S M 2 3 2 4 2 5 BC EC2 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 7 U P S M 1 4 1 5 1 6 EC1 ...

Page 639: ... Slots per PCM seg ment Static traffic capac ity per PCM seg ment Total static traffic capacity of the system Single cabinet sys tem see Figure 4 90 02 03 64 erlangs 192 erlangs 04 05 64 erlangs 06 07 08 64 erlangs Two cabinet system see Figure 4 91 02 03 64 erlangs 448 erlangs 04 05 64 erlangs 06 07 08 64 erlangs 10 11 64 erlangs 12 13 64 erlangs 14 15 64 erlangs 16 17 64 erlangs Three cabinet sy...

Page 640: ... for information on upgrading peripheral boards Procedure for inserting and removing the boards Figure 4 93 Locking and Unlocking Boards Special board attachments The power supply is screwed onto the grill of each cabinet If Then Boards Unlocking the board 1 Swing both plastic levers outward simultaneously You can now pull the board out of the system on its guide rails Boards Latching as sembly 2 ...

Page 641: ...ack panel basic cabinet only and connect ed to the backplane with a ribbon cable 4 3 7 Connecting Workpoint Clients For information see Chapter 10 4 3 8 Making trunk connections Refer to the following board descriptions for information STMD8 S0 trunk connection TMS2 Not for U S S2M trunk connection TMAMF for selected countries only TML8W Not for U S MSI TIEL TMDID8 for U S only TMGL8 for U S only ...

Page 642: ...make sure that the system is grounded and disconnected from the power supply Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices see Page 1 9 Table 4 18 Visual Inspection Procedure Step Activity Resources Remarks Action 1 Compare the slots for the in stalled boards with the board assignment map Board assignment map Correct the board config uration and notify the sales departmen...

Page 643: ... telephone pliers wire stripper flat nosed pliers Slotted screwdrivers from 2 to 8 mm 1 4 to 5 16 in Phillips or cross point screwdrivers sizes 1 and 2 TORX screwdriver Electric drill hammer Level tape measure For U S only Punch down tool suitable for the block used such as block 66 Resources Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltage...

Page 644: ...tion Frame HiPath 3550 only page 4 170 Not for U S Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall page 4 191 4 Removing the System Housing Cover page 4 172 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet page 4 192 5 Attaching the System to the Wall page 4 174 Grounding the System page 4 194 6 Grounding the System and the Main Distribution Frame page 4 175 Installing the Boards page 4 19...

Page 645: ...e the systems to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 For U S Only Ensure that the installation site is in the immediate vicinity of an electrical outlet A...

Page 646: ...550 and HiPath 3350 Space Requirements for U S only HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 The system measures 18 by 17 7 inches 46 x 45 cm The following spaces should be allowed 18 in 46 mm of clearance on the left and at least 8 in 203 mm of clearance on the top and right Allow 20 in 50 8 cm of clearance on the bottom for cables Backplane 122 X 122 cm 4 X 4 ft Main distribution frame 20 3 cm 8 Leave 46 cm 1...

Page 647: ... Outlet Requirements The power source may not be more than 2 m 6 ft from the system The power source must supply a voltage of 120 V AC single phase fused in 50 60 Hz A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used Recommendation Add a power surge protector between the outlet ...

Page 648: ...ection cable and at eye level Mount it on the wall according to the instruc tions that came with it The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template It also contains the necessary screws and wall anchors for attaching the MDF to the wall The MDFU must be grounded Refer to Section 4 4 3 6 for an explanation of the procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or cust...

Page 649: ...sions of the MDFU Step Activity 1 Use the template to drill the holes 2 Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws leaving 5 mm projecting 3 Remove the housing cover and mount the MDFU E on the brackets 4 Tighten the screws through the holes Figure 4 95 MDFU Layout and Dimensions 367 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm not for U S 2 x PFT1 or 1 x PFT4 9 slots 9 x 30 mm Special built in comps System side Lin...

Page 650: ...ath 3500 and HiPath 3300 4 4 3 4 Removing the System Housing Cover Procedure 7 Warning To prevent injuries you must observe the following instructions for the removal and attachment of the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing cover Step Activity 1 Loosen the two screwed plugs on the housing cover with a slotted screw driver Hold the housing cover so that it does not fall ...

Page 651: ...00 Mounting the housing cover To close the system housing again put the cover on and fasten it with the two screwed plugs To avoid injuries grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only when mounting it 2 Remove the housing cover Warning Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which can cause cuts Step Activity ...

Page 652: ...all Attach the system to the wall as shown in Figure 4 96 Attaching the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing to the wall Figure 4 96 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Wall Attachment Figure 4 97 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Wall Attachment PSU UPS Cable duct Rear wall of hous ing Oblong holes for Attachment of PSU UPS to the rear wall of hous ing Hang system and tighten screws Minum clearance for replacin...

Page 653: ...necessary to ground the connection between the MDFU and HiPath 3550 see Figure 4 98 HiPath 3350 This system type does not require an external main distribution frame The connection cables to the peripherals are attached directly to the boards and rout ed to the outside via a cable duct inside the housing Refer to Figure 4 98 when replacing a customer system but maintaining the existing exter nal m...

Page 654: ...th 3350 Grounding an External Main Distribution Frame Example Potential equalization bus but not central heating system drain channels ground conductor for antenna system Communication system to be replaced Grounding screw Main distribution frame being reused HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 Grounding not required e g MDFU green yellow Min cross section 2 5 mm2 External main distribution frame You must ...

Page 655: ... HiPath 3300 4 4 3 7 Installing the Boards Outside the U S the system is already equipped with the boards needed for the customer spe cific requirements when the system is delivered In the U S you may need to install the boards Connecting to T1 PRI or CorNet for U S only 7 Caution The TST1 Module HiPath 3550 can be installed only in conjunction with a listed channel service unit CSU ...

Page 656: ...0 and HiPath 3300 4 4 3 8 Laying the Line Network and Connection Cables HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 CABLU for connection to the external main distribution frame Figure 4 99 Layout of CABLU S30269 Z41 A30 Length 3 m 6 slip on connectors 4 TW each for connection to the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 boards Jumper strip 25 TW for installation in the exter nal main distribution frame ...

Page 657: ...both cables 1 CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9 to the same jumper strip 25 TW Slot with any other periph eral board Without an external main distribution frame MDFU You can attach cables for the peripheral boards directly to the boards see Figure 4 101 for the slip on connectors and route them to the MDFU through the cable duct inside the housing With an external main distribution frame MD...

Page 658: ...y HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Connecting the Cabling If the boards are not already connected to the appropriate cables leaving the system you need to connect them The TST1 Module HiPath 3550 connects to a customer supplied channel service unit CSU using the supplied cable The CSU provides the required secondary protection Each port on the STLS4 Module connects to an S0 bus using the supplied silve...

Page 659: ... Attaching Ferrite To keep within the interference limit required by EMC Class B you must attach ferrite to the following lines HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 power cables wall housing The wall housing s power cable must be guided through the C39022 Z7000 C7 ferrite sleeve that is included in the accessory pack Position the ferrite sleeve as shown in Figure 4 102 so that you will be able to close the...

Page 660: ... need to order additional ferrite If Then Trunk board or subscriber line modules in Hi Path 3750 for mat Guide both standard cables from SU X8 and SU X9 see Figure 4 100 to the MDFU through two ferrite sleeves C39022 Z7000 C7 each The ferrite should be placed as far inside the housing as possible Trunk or sub scriber line modules in small format Guide the trunk and subscriber lines of all ports co...

Page 661: ...00 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 4 4 3 10 Configuration notes HiPath 3550 system overview and slots Restrictions for equipment with IVMP8 IVMS8 TST1 and TS2 boards must be ob served Figure 4 103 HiPath 3550 Wall Housing System Overview Optional boards 1 2 3 4 5 6 PSU UPS Cable duct Slot levels CUC ...

Page 662: ...iPath 3300 Figure 4 104 HiPath 3550 Slots in the Wall Housing Figure 4 105 HiPath 3550 Option Adapter Long OPAL Opt 1 Opt 2 Opt 3 Opt 4 Opt 5 Slot 10 HiPath 3750 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 7 V 24 Slot 2 Slot 3 CBCC OPAL Wall to MDF CUC Connection Unit Com Slot levels 1 2 3 4 5 6 The CBCC board is connected to the optional board via a ribbon ca ble OPAL see adjacent figure ...

Page 663: ...Path 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 HiPath 3350 system overview and slots Figure 4 106 HiPath 3350 Wall Housing System Overview Figure 4 107 HiPath 3350 Slots in the Wall Housing Optional boards 1 2 3 PSU UPS Cable duct Slot levels CUP Opt 1 Opt 2 Opt 3 Opt 4 Opt 5 OPAL Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 2 Slot 3 CBCC V 24 CUP Connection Unit Point Slot levels 1 2 3 Wall ...

Page 664: ...tatic Traffic Capacity System Slots Static traffic capac ity Total static traffic capacity of the system HiPath 3550 see Figure 4 104 2 3 CBCC 24 erlangs 198 erlangs 4 16 erlangs 5 16 erlangs 6 16 erlangs 7 16 erlangs 8 16 erlangs 9 30 erlangs1 1 Use of a TS2 board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs A maximum of one TS2 per HiPath 3550 is possible and the board may only be installed in slot 7 or ...

Page 665: ... Performing a Visual Inspection Before starting up the system you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware cables and the power supply The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnect ed from the power supply 7 Caution Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power supply Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures ...

Page 666: ...bly kit 39165 A7027 D2 Desk installation assembly kit includes adhesive feet 39165 A7027 D2 Stick the adhesive feet to the bottom of the housing Installation in the 19 inch cabinet with assembly kit 39165 A7027 D1 for HiPath 3500 as sembly kit 39165 A7027 D4 for HiPath 3300 You can also install an ECR expansion cabinet rack in which you can install a battery pack for uninterruptible power supply a...

Page 667: ...nd heaters Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 You will find information on the design and dimensions in the following sectio...

Page 668: ...ing the Components Procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the proper departments 3 Dispose of the packing materials properly 7 Caution Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with vi...

Page 669: ... Figure 4 108 Wall mounting Step Activity 1 Drill a hole in the selected wall insert a wall anchor and screw in the screws 2 Screw the angle brackets A and B for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 onto the base of the device 3 Mount the system with the angle bracket A on the screws 4 Drill a second hole in the wall for the lower angle bracket B insert a wall anchor and attach the angle bracket with a scre...

Page 670: ...h 3300 in a Cabinet Procedure for 19 inch cabinets Figure 4 109 Step Activity 1 HiPath 3500 only Attach the two angle brackets A to the 19 inch cabinet using two screws per bracket 2 Attach the two angle brackets B to the left and right of the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 using two screws per bracket 3 Slide the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 system into the 19 inch cabinet and attach it to the left and...

Page 671: ...5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 4 193 Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Mounting the 19 inch cabinet Figure 4 109 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Mounting the 19 Inch Cabinet HiPath 3300 B B HiPath 3500 A HiPath 3500 ...

Page 672: ...or green yellow Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a li censed electrician to install the ground Does the 19 inch cabinet have a potential equalization bus at which the HiPath 3500 or Hi Path 3300 can be grounded A potential equalization bus must be installed in the 19 inch cabinet and connected to the ground conductor Danger If your...

Page 673: ...cable to the potential equalization bar on the 19 inch cab inet 2 Connect the grounding cable to the system s ground connection with the ground ing screw supplied point A 3 Attach the grounding cable strain relief to the system point B with a cable tie Figure 4 110 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Grounding 7 Danger The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 housing to be wall mounted must be grounded by a separa...

Page 674: ... ECR side Attaching to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 side A clip and a tooth lock washer are enclosed with the ECR mounting set Use these and the housing cover mounting screw to attach the braided shield to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 housing as shown in Figure 4 111 The tooth lock washer must be mounted be tween the painted surface of the cover and the clip Attaching to the ECR side see Page ...

Page 675: ...and slots 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3500 only with the housing front closed Always use dum my panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Figure 4 112 HiPath 3500 Slot Levels in the 19 Inch Housing It is imperative that you observe the restrictions regarding TS2R installation Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slots 1 3 Slot levels 5 options 4 CBRC 3 ...

Page 676: ...0 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 HiPath 3300 system overview and slots 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed Always use dum my panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Figure 4 113 HiPath 3300 Slot Levels in the 19 Inch Housing Slot 4 Slot 5 Slots 1 3 Slot levels 3 options 2 CBRC 1 Peripheralboards ...

Page 677: ...3300 Static Traffic Capacity System Slots Static traffic capac ity Total static traffic capacity of the system HiPath 3500 see Figure 4 112 2 3 CBRC 24 erlangs 134 erlangs 4 16 erlangs 5 16 erlangs 6 16 erlangs 7 16 erlangs 8 16 erlangs 9 30 erlangs1 1 Use of a TS2R board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs A maximum of one TS2R per HiPath 3500 is possible and the board may only be installed in sl...

Page 678: ...stem you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware cables and the power supply The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnect ed from the power supply 7 Caution Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power supply Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting elec trostatically sensitive devices see P...

Page 679: ...Starting Up HiPath 3000 Overview 5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 5 1 Overview Chapter contents This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table Topic Starting Up HiPath 3800 page 5 2 Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 page 5 11 Starting Up HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 page 5 19 ...

Page 680: ...the power supply if all system cabi nets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided Table 5 1 HiPath 3800 Startup Procedure Step Startup Activity Remarks 1 Supplying the System with Power page 5 3 Plugging in the power supply cable for the system cabinet s and positioning the switches for all LUNA2 power supplies to DC ON starting system boot 2 Carrying Out a System Relo...

Page 681: ...y 1 Plug in the power supply cable for the system cabinet s 2 Position all LUNA2 power supply switches to DC ON Note Startup does not begin until the switches on all LUNA2 units are in DC ON position 3 Monitor the RUN LED of the CBSAP The individual steps of the system boot Table 5 2 can be observed this way Table 5 2 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning 1st flash ing rhythm 2nd flash ing rh...

Page 682: ...issing or defective board No action Different board type The system does not automatically activate the board Underequipped or same board variant Board is activated The same station range is used Over equipped boardvariant Board is activated The old station range is activated and the ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end The ports are split if there is no contiguous station r...

Page 683: ...and as required 2 Connect system to power sup ply A continuous numbering plan is generated as was the case when the system was first initialized Notes Changes to the extension numbers result in changes to the individual extension specific data Only those ports provided for in accordance with the maximum configuration are activated if the maximum line configuration is exceeded too many trunk boards...

Page 684: ...not hold down the reset switch for a full 5 seconds the system may perform a reset rather than a reload or may not reload properly The reset reload switch is tested by a Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA This FPGA is loaded by the processor when starting up the HiPath 3800 and is only fully functional after the loading process is complete If the reset reload switch is activated during loading the...

Page 685: ... er start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered You must now load the local language prior to country initialization using HiPath 3000 Manager E see information on multilingual text output in the Feature Description Hi Path 3000 5000 After carrying out the country initialization but before loading the required local lan guage the displays come up in German Table 5 3 ...

Page 686: ...er trunk If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil the option for saving the digits dialed and transmitting them via the system dial rule 1A is not activated This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the DTMF terminal and the trunk until it recognizes the dial ...

Page 687: ...rk or service provider Depending on the configuration type system station numbers should not be entered for point to multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000 for example Example Port number 98008 National number 2302 prefix without 0 International number 49 country code Station number type international Input procedure Table 5 4 Entering the System Number Step Entry Description 1 95 S...

Page 688: ...own in the display If a different text appears Gateway not found for example this means that there is an error Correct the error by following the administration instructions for the relevant telephone Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 3 1 8 on all telephones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning ...

Page 689: ...1 Startup Procedure 7 Warning Only authorized service personnel should start up the system Table 5 5 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup Procedure Step Startup Activity Remarks 1 Supplying the System with Power page 5 12 Plugging in the power supply unit starting system boot 2 Carrying Out a System Reload page 5 15 3 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type page 5 15...

Page 690: ...Table 5 6 can be observed this way Table 5 6 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun On System boot Off for 0 1 s Load operation APS in SDRAM loadware and card data Flashing 0 5 s on 0 5 s off Normal operating state zero load 1 1 The flashing...

Page 691: ...f Then Missing or defective board No action Different board type The system does not automatically activate the board Underequipped or same board variant Board is activated The same station range is used Over equippedboard variant Board is activated The old station range is activated and the ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end The ports are split if there is no contiguous s...

Page 692: ...rgized Expand as required 2 Connect system to power sup ply A continuous numbering plan is generated as was the case when the system was first initialized Notes Changes to the extension numbers result in changes to the individual extension specific data Only those ports provided for in accordance with the maximum configuration are activated if the maximum line configuration is exceeded too many tr...

Page 693: ...eets the country s conditions for approval In Germany no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the German country code by default The next step involves selecting the password type Input procedure Since the system software no longer provides all languages some systems no long er start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered You mus...

Page 694: ...sword 31994 overwrites the new password entered under step 4 7 For Brazil only CO call privileges ringback protection per trunk If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil the option for saving the digits dialed and transmitting them via the system dial rule 1A is not activated This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for the dial tone from th...

Page 695: ...he network or service provider Depending on the configuration type system station numbers should not be entered for point to multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000 for example Example Port number 98008 National number 2302 prefix without 0 International number 49 country code Station number type international Input procedure Table 5 8 Entering the System Number Step Entry Descriptio...

Page 696: ...mally shown in the display If a different text appears Gateway not found for example this means that there is an error Correct the error by following the administration instructions for the relevant telephone Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 3 1 8 on all telephones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is func...

Page 697: ... Only authorized service personnel should start up the system 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed Always use dummy panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Table 5 9 Startup Procedure Step Startup Activity Remarks 1 Supplying the System With Power page 5 20 starting system boot 2 Carrying Out a System Reload p...

Page 698: ...ller The individual steps of the system boot Table 5 10 can be observed this way Table 5 10 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power on Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun On System boot Off for 0 1 s Load operation APS in SDRAM loadware and card data Flashing 0 5 s on 0 5 s off No...

Page 699: ...is taken If Then Missing or defective board No action Different board type The system does not automatically activate the board Underequipped or same board variant Board is activated The same station range is used Over equippedboard variant Board is activated The old station range is activated and the ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end The ports are split if there is no co...

Page 700: ...ndividual extension specific data Only those ports provided for in accordance with the maximum configuration are activated if the max imum line configuration is exceeded too many trunk boards A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk lines on one S0 board can result in gaps in line number ing This is because all board ports are initially acti vated as trunks and are only subsequently reconfi...

Page 701: ...e and features and ensures that the system meets the coun try s conditions for approval In Germany no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the German country code by default The next step involves selecting the password type Input procedure Since the system software no longer provides all languages some systems no long er start up in the customary local langu...

Page 702: ...rivileges ringback protection per trunk If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil the option for saving the digits dialed and transmitting them via the system dial rule 1A is not activated This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the DTMF terminal and the trun...

Page 703: ...h 3300 The system station number is determined by the network or service provider Depending on the configuration type system station numbers should not be entered for point to multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000 for example Example Port number 98008 National number 2302 prefix without 0 International number 49 country code Station number type international Input procedure Table 5...

Page 704: ...time are normally shown in the display If a different text appears Gateway not found for example this means that there is an error Correct the error by following the administration instructions for the relevant telephone Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 3 1 8 on all telephones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the sy...

Page 705: ...s page 6 15 Installing HiPath ComScendo Service page 6 22 Installing HiPath Fault Management page 6 31 Installing the TAPI Service Provider page 6 35 Installing the HiPath Inventory Server Separately page 6 36 Verifying Installation page 6 41 Modifying HiPath 5000 Components Retro Fitting Updating Deleting page 6 43 Version Wide Upgrading of a HiPath 5000 Installation page 6 44 Performing Licensin...

Page 706: ...artup and Administration P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 6 2 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm Overview Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 page 6 62 Topic ...

Page 707: ...ver HiPath 3000 Manager E while the HG 1500 resources see Page 10 38 are administered over Web based Management WBM Cross platform use of HiPath ComScendo features IP networking for example in conjunction with HiPath 4000 is implemented via CorNet IP CorNet NQ protocol tunnelled in H 323 via an nex M1 HG 1500 in HiPath 3000 and HG3550 V2 0 in HiPath 4000 are prerequisites for IP networking over Co...

Page 708: ...ting a HiPath License Man agement license file Central License Manager CLM CLA front end for reading in licenses in online and offline mode Personal Call Manager PCM Web based application for the configuration and administra tion of personal call forwarding operations HiPath FM Desktop V3 0 Java based application for error signaling GetAccount application that prepares generated call data records ...

Page 709: ... PSTN IP Network HiPath 3500 Central administration unit with Feature Server Presence Manager HiPath Software Manager HiPath 3000 Manager E Inventory Manager Central resourcing of applications possibly installed on a separate PC such as HiPath Xpressions HiPath ProCenter Office HiPath Manager PCM HiPath Fault Management HiPath Cordless Office optiPoint 500 optiset E optiPoint 600 office HiPath 500...

Page 710: ...stration tool does not communicate with the individual systems but exchanges data with the Feature Server The Feature Server ensures that the networked HiPath 3000 systems receive synchronized CDB data The individual systems are accessed directly by HiPath 3000 Manager E in the course of main tenance and online functions HG 1500 boards are still administered on a board specific basis using Web bas...

Page 711: ...erver Services and Routines CDB Synchronization HiPath 3000 server vsync exe Application Interface vaplx dll Call Address Resolu tion Update Server cars exe HG 1500 Registration Server regserver exe Server Control Layer MS Windows Service vsrv exe Server Database vdbaccess dll Socket Interface vsock dll Data Transfer Interface vadmtftp dll Remote Procedure Call Interface FCT dll Event Log Texts VE...

Page 712: ...onents Component Function vsrv exe Basic Feature Server component As an MS Windows service it starts all other components vaplx dll Logical interface for applications Provides read only and read write access to CDB data cars exe The Call Address Resolution Server provides the HG 1500 boards with the call numbers of all HiPath 3000 systems nodes that belong to the net work Note Event 1027 confirms ...

Page 713: ...mber tables are also known as CAR Call Address Resolution tables The call number tables can be displayed using HG 1500 s Web based man agement WBM Changes made to tables with the WBM can impact the digit analysis function ality and are not permitted The CAR tables are updated and overwritten by the Feature Server after every administration activity Internal call numbers can be assigned more than o...

Page 714: ...f nodes in the HiPath 3000 5000 network and the applications installed on the server Table 6 2 HW and SW Minimum Requirements for HiPath 5000 Component New system Upgrade an existing system to V6 0 Processor 3 GHz CPU Pentium III 1 GHz RAM space See Table 6 3 See Table 6 3 Hard disk 80 GB 18 GB Operating system MS Windows Server 2000 or MS Windows Server 2003 MS Windows Server 2000 Interfaces 2 x ...

Page 715: ...ath FM V3 0 Teledata Office V3 0 HiPath Software Manag er 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 1 5 GB 2 GB HiPath ComScendo Ser vice 100 MB 100 MB 100 MB 100 MB not sup ported HiPath Manager PCM V2 0 90 MB 90 MB 90 MB 90 MB 90 MB HiPath ProCenter Office V1 3 with HiPath Xpres sions V3 02 2 In this special configuration HiPath Xpressions V3 0 supports up to 248 Unified Messaging users or 400 voice mail users 400 MB 40...

Page 716: ...ible not pos sible 1 Every HiPath 3000 gateway every survivable media gateway and every HiPath ComScendo service counts as a node 2 Networks are currently released with up to 32 nodes Larger configurations can be released on a project specific basis 3 We do not recommend installing DLS Teledata Office HPCO including HiPath Xpressions and HiPath ComScendo Ser vice together on a PC Real time operati...

Page 717: ...ain partition C should have a capacity of at least 4 GB and should be re served for the operating system and the HiPath 5000 software For safety reasons partitioning with the format FAT 16 32 is not permitted Hardware Make sure that no unnecessary hardware is connected to the server PC any sound cards should be removed Access privileg es To install HiPath 5000 you must log on to the operating syst...

Page 718: ...ction with a ping to another computer Integrate the HiPath 5000 in the Windows domain under Control Panel Network Identi fication a domain administrator account is required here Network analysis must be performed before the relevant systems and applications are installed to guarantee smooth operation in the IP customer network Network analysis determines the conditions under which the IP customer ...

Page 719: ...always be installed and are therefore already selected in the master setup default setup HiPath ComScendo service Yes Yes No see Section 6 6 4 MSDE 2000 SQL database with SP3 Yes No Yes TFTP Server Yes Yes Yes Common Web Service Yes Yes Yes HiPath Call Accounting GetAccount yes optional No No see Section 6 12 HiPath Manager PCM yes optional network based release No see Section 6 11 HiPath 3000 Man...

Page 720: ...datory licensing within this grace period HiPath 3000 Manager E comes with a customer specific file which is used by the Customer Li cense Agent CLA to generate a GPCF Grace Period Configuration File file This file ensures that the maximum expansion of all features subject to mandatory licensing is possible within the 30 day grace period The system or systems are not licensed The system falls into...

Page 721: ...ect the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to start the installation routine Important installation information is displayed This includes the latest information on installation Please read this information carefully 4 Click Next to proceed with the installation routine 5 Se...

Page 722: ...onents you want to install and unmark the ones you don t The components marked by default Default Setup are standard components that as a rule should always be installed For information on the exact compo nents to install refer to your order The subsequent description of the installation procedure relates to the default setup Information on installing the HiPath ComScendo Service can be found in S...

Page 723: ...to start the copy operation At this point your attention is drawn to the fact that a TAPI service provider must be installed for the current selection of components If this requirement is met click Yes to continue with the procedure If there is no TAPI service provider installed click No to cancel the procedure Install the TAPI service provider on the basis of the information in Section 6 6 6 Then...

Page 724: ...0 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm HiPath 5000 10 The File Transfer Folder appears Select the folder where you want to install the files Confirm the default folder c program files siemens hipath tftp files with Next or click Change to select a different folder ...

Page 725: ...0 11 Click Next to proceed with the setup routine The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears Enter the trap destinations if necessary and the HiPath Fault Management desktop com munity names 12 Click Next to proceed with the setup routine 13 When all selected components are installed a dialog appears in which you can terminate the setup with Finish ...

Page 726: ...tion will be described here Procedure 1 Insert the installation CD The installation program is started via the autorun function Alternatively you can initiate Setup via Windows Explorer under CD ROM drive letter setup exe 2 Select the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to st...

Page 727: ...V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 6 23 HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 7 The Select Features dialog appears Select the HiPath ComScendo Service components you want to install and deselect the ones you do not want to install ...

Page 728: ... 8 Then click Next The Start Copying Files dialog appears Finally check whether the correct target directory and program group have been specified To implement the setup for the HiPath ComScendo service both a TFTP server and an FM Reporting client must be installed on the relevant PC Both components are automatically selected and installed by the Master Setup ...

Page 729: ... 5000 9 Click Next to start the copy procedure The File Transfer Folder appears Note This dialog only appears if none of the Master Setup components has been installed on the PC Select the folder where you want to install the program Confirm the default folder c program files siemens hipath tftp files with Next or click Change to select a different folder ...

Page 730: ...e Manual start_h5 fm HiPath 5000 10 Click Next to proceed with the setup routine The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears Note This dialog only appears if none of the Master Setup components has been installed on the PC Enter the trap destinations if necessary and the HiPath Fault Management desktop com munity names ...

Page 731: ...V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 6 27 HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 11 Continue setup with Next The Select Network Card dialog appears Note This dialog only appears if the relevant PC has more than one network card Select the network card for HiPath 5000 ...

Page 732: ...ath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm HiPath 5000 12 Continue setup with Next The Country selection dialog appears Confirm the default or select a different country to define the international standard settings for language currency and date format ...

Page 733: ...ceed with the setup routine The Destination Folder for Data dialog appears Select the folder for the HiPath ComScendo service data Confirm the default folder c program files siemens hipath hipath 5000 pcsdata with Next or click Change to select a different folder 14 When all selected components are installed a dialog appears in which you can terminate the installation with Finish ...

Page 734: ...re 1 Open the status display with Start Program Files HiPath HiPath 5000 State Viewer 2 The following appears Make sure that the server status is Running and that all service status indicators are green Details about configuring the HiPath ComScendo service can be found in Section 6 10 1 Section 12 3 1 10 contains information about how to proceed in the event of a fault in other words if one or mo...

Page 735: ...Windows Explorer under CD ROM drive letter setup exe 2 Select the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to start the installation routine Important installation information is displayed This includes the latest information on installation Please read this information carefully ...

Page 736: ...3 54 7620 09 05 6 32 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm HiPath 5000 7 The Select Features dialog appears Select the HiPath Fault Management components you want to install and deselect the ones you do not want to install ...

Page 737: ...fied and if all neces sary components are installed 9 Click Next to start the copy procedure The software license agreement is displayed The license terms must be accepted before continuing with the setup 10 Confirm the license agreement with Yes 11 The Choose Destination Location dialog appears Select the folder where you want to install the Java Runtime Environment Confirm the default folder c p...

Page 738: ...onditions for HiPath Fault Management are displayed The license terms must be accepted before continuing with the installation Click I accept the terms of the license agreement 15 Click Next to proceed with the installation routine The installation options are displayed Select the Server Client option 16 Continue installation with Next The Directory Name dialog is displayed Confirm the name sugges...

Page 739: ...when you select the setup type The following are installed for HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 TAPI Service Provider TSP CSTA Message Dispatcher CMD CSTA Service Provider CSP Central Configuration Manager Client CCMC 4 The system starts to install the selected components When a component is successfully installed the associated configuration dialog opens You can set the required parameters here or postpone ...

Page 740: ...rer under CD ROM drive letter setup exe 2 Select the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to start the installation routine Important installation information is displayed This includes the latest information on installation Please read this information carefully 4 Click Next ...

Page 741: ...000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 6 37 HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 7 The Select Features dialog appears Select the HiPath Inventory components you want to install and deselect the ones you do not want to install ...

Page 742: ...he Start Copying Files dialog appears Check if the correct destination directory and program group are specified and if all neces sary components are installed To be able to implement the setup for HiPath Inventory both an FM Reporting client and a Common Web Service must be installed on the relevant PC Both components are auto matically selected and installed by the Master Setup ...

Page 743: ... 0 Provisional Service Manual 6 39 HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 9 Click Next to start the copy operation The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears Enter the trap destinations if necessary and the HiPath Fault Management desktop com munity names ...

Page 744: ...Path 5000 10 Click Next to proceed with the installation routine The Inventory Database Location dialog appears Enter the IP address and the port number of the PC where the database is installed MSDE SQL database server 11 Confirm your entries with Next 12 When installation is complete a dialog appears in which you can terminate the setup with Finish ...

Page 745: ...lers and spoolers defining properties for memory devices displaying device configurations and adding new device drivers administering server applications and services for example DNS Domain Name System or DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Computer Management is displayed in a separate window like Windows Explorer The console structure for the navigation and service program selection contain...

Page 746: ... server and any application servers available All events associated with the server s and its their applications are saved The events pro vide a quick and above all time specific overview of all relevant actions status information warning error etc To open the Event Viewer select Computer Management System Tools Event Viewer For more information see Section 12 3 1 9 Event Viewer for HiPath 5000 Ev...

Page 747: ...on 6 7 1 deleting all components features of the current HiPath 5000 installation When activated the Setup creates the relevant selection lists based on the current HiPath 5000 installation The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath 3000 5000 V4 0 or later Call data records must be evaluated with WinAccount before starting an update be cause updating unins...

Page 748: ...f all connected systems see HiPath 3000 Manager E Help 3 Call up the HiPath 5000 State Viewer with Start Programs HiPath HiPath 5000 State Viewer 4 Exit the HiPath 5000 server by clicking Stop Server 1 Insert the installation CD The installation program is started via the autorun function Alternatively you can initiate Setup via Windows Explorer under CD ROM drive letter setup exe 2 Select the lan...

Page 749: ...m the deletion of all installed components features Follow the on screen user prompts 6 Delete the following directories default paths are provided c Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL C Program Files Siemens HiPath DB Feature Server C Program Files Siemens HiPath HiPath500 Note As these directories are not installed via Master Setup it is not possible to delete them via the setup maintenanc...

Page 750: ...for all features interfaces and products subject to mandatory licensing within this grace period HiPath 3000 Manager E comes with a customer specific file which is used by the Customer Li cense Agent CLA to generate a GPCF Grace Period Configuration File file This file ensures that the maximum expansion of all features subject to mandatory licensing is possible within the 30 day grace period The s...

Page 751: ...irtual Memory Change The same values should be entered for the virtual memory s upper and lower thresholds so that the paging file does not have to be ex tended during operation Optimizing availability If the operating system crashes blue screen it creates a file con taining debugging information from the paging file the next time the system starts If the size of this file is the same size as the ...

Page 752: ...has full access to the wwwroott PCM directory The PCM requires the following local full access rights to the hard disk C temp and C InetPub wwwroot PCM where C In etPub wwwroot means the standard directory of the IIS in other installations this may have a completely different name The option Cache ISAPI Applications must not be disabled This option can be found under Standard website Properties Ho...

Page 753: ...network is administered via the Feature server The HiPath 3000 Manager E admin istration tool does not communicate with the individual nodes but exchanges data with the Feature server The Feature server ensures that the networked nodes receive synchro nized CDB data The Feature Server is an MS Windows service that automatically starts at the same time as the HiPath 5000 RSM HG 1500 boards are stil...

Page 754: ...ecific system programming Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual fea tures 5 Save the customer database 6 Then switch to the Transfer dialog 7 In the Communication Settings tab select IP HiPath as the access and enter the IP ad dress of the HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service in the appropriate field Select Read Write Database Set the Overwrite and ...

Page 755: ...are is installed setup The two PDS files are created when the HiPath 5000 is started for the first time Procedure 1 Call up the HiPath 5000 State Viewer with Start Programs HiPath HiPath 5000 State Viewer 2 Exit the HiPath 5000 server by clicking Stop Server 3 Delete the files hicom pds and hicom pds bak Note This restores the default settings for the entire content of the customer database All co...

Page 756: ...ature server ensures that the networked nodes receive synchronized CDB data To facilitate this a central customer database the so called server net file must be cre ated for IP networking 6 10 3 1 Creating a Central Customer Database for IP Networking An empty server net file must be created in order to create a central customer database for IP networking Procedure 1 StartHiPath 3000 Manager E 2 A...

Page 757: ...3 The Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Server dialog appears 4 The PC to be used as the HiPath 5000 server should be entered in the Server field Note If the required software is not installed on the specified PC the error message Hi Path 5000 RSM AllServe Server not Installed on this PC appears 5 Load the central customer database by clicking the Server Manager button 6 Then click Close ...

Page 758: ... server net file is now loaded to the Feature server The customer database is then automatically distributed to the various nodes The prerequisite for adding nodes HiPath 3000 to a HiPath 3000 5000 network is the success ful installation see Chapter 4 Installing HiPath 3000 and startup see Chapter 5 Start ing Up HiPath 3000 of these systems Procedure 1 To select the node to be added to the CDB cal...

Page 759: ...ly created to all other CDB files of the node belonging to IP networking 4 Confirm the selection of the source with the Finish button 5 To add the node invoke File HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Server 6 The Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Server dialog appears Apply the node data to the server net file by clicking the Add node button 7 Finally rewrite the data from H...

Page 760: ...on P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 6 56 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm HiPath Manager PCM 6 11 HiPath Manager PCM For information see the HiPath Manager PCM Installation and Administration Manual ...

Page 761: ...r further processing using the GetAccount program 6 12 1 Parameters for Call Data Export For HiPath 5000 you can forward the existing call data for example for external call charge calculation The call data is forwarding in an ASCII file Proceed as follows to set the parameters for call data export 1 Start the GetAccount Administration program The following dialog appears The WinAccount software f...

Page 762: ...d Each call data record line is ended with CR LF Field name Meaning Mode Select the call data forwarding mode in this list field The following modes are available None save call charge data The call data is not written to the transfer file Select this option Save call charge data The call data is written to the transfer file The modes Export calls with calculation and Export and save calls with ca...

Page 763: ...d with leading blanks 5 23 28 6 Internal extension number right aligned with leading blanks 6 29 33 5 Call duration in seconds 7 34 41 8 Call duration Format hh mm ss for example 00 04 34 8 42 66 25 For incoming calls external caller number For outgoing calls external call number dialed including the call by call number left aligned with succeeding blanks 9 67 77 11 Number of tariff units right al...

Page 764: ...and Administration P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 6 60 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm GetAccount 16 111 1 LF Table 6 8 GetAccount Data Record Structure No Pos Lengt h Description ...

Page 765: ...ng Switch to the folder containing the transfer file default C coldir Rename the transfer file default gcallserve The renamed file is now available for ex ternal processing The transfer file is automatically recreated in the specified folder with the file name saved in the parameters and can be renamed again at a later point To avoid uncontrolled folder growth with the transfer file an option is a...

Page 766: ...S was certified for use with HiPath 5000 The P 500 UPS is fed through the AC power cord to the HiPath 5000 server The device bridges power failures lasting 5 10 minutes by means of an integrated battery P 500 UPS Front and Rear Panel 7 Caution For safety reasons and for protection against guarantee claims changes to the UPS settings may only be performed by specially trained technicians The manufa...

Page 767: ...tems 2 increases the response voltage by 5 3 reduces the response voltage by 5 Switch positions normally DIP FIX 1 off DIP FIX 2 and 3 on 6 Reset key deactivates the acoustic alarm if the input voltage fails that is when using the UPS This alarm cannot be deactivated if the battery voltage falls under a certain value activates the UPS cold start To protect the battery from deep discharging the UPS...

Page 768: ...Path 5000 Startup and Administration P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 6 64 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_h5 fm Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 ...

Page 769: ...s listed in the following table 7 2 Introduction So called gateways provide the HiPath 5000 with interfaces for trunk and tie trunk connections to the telecommunications network In V6 0 the HiPath 3800 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems can be used as gateways Topic Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway page 7 2 Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway page 7 4 Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway ...

Page 770: ...00 as a Gateway Procedure for System Installation and Startup Step Activity Remarks Installing HiPath 3800 19 Inch Cabinet 1 Selecting the Installation Site page 4 21 generally determined by the existing 19 inch cabinet 2 Unpacking the Components page 4 24 3 Mounting System Cabinets in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 25 4 Grounding the System page 4 28 Checking the Grounding page 4 30 5 Connecting the ...

Page 771: ...ng customer specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individ ual features 6 Performing a system check The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to the gateway Check the telephones Check the time and date display on each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the li...

Page 772: ...em Installation and Startup Step Activity Remarks Installing HiPath 3700 19 Inch Cabinet 1 Selecting the Installation Site page 4 130 generally determined by the existing 19 inch cabinet 2 Unpacking the Components page 4 130 3 Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 131 4 Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 135 5 Grounding the System page 4 136 Checking the Gro...

Page 773: ...cting customer specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individ ual features 6 Performing a system check The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to the gateway Check the telephones Check the time and date display on each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the...

Page 774: ...gain Table 7 3 HiPath 3500 as a Gateway Procedure for System Installation and Startup Step Activity Remarks HiPath 3500 Installation 19 Inch Cabinet Section 4 4 1 Selecting the Installation Site page 4 189 usually predetermined 2 Unpacking the Components page 4 190 3 Not for U S Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall page 4 191 4 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet pa...

Page 775: ...ecific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individ ual features 6 Performing a system check The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to the gateway Check the telephones Check the time and date display on each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the link is defectiv...

Page 776: ... for System Installation and Startup Step Activity Remarks HiPath 3300 Installation 19 Inch Cabinet Section 4 4 1 Selecting the Installation Site page 4 189 usually predetermined 2 Unpacking the Components page 4 190 3 Not for U S Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall page 4 191 4 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet page 4 192 5 Grounding the System page 4 194 6 Conn...

Page 777: ...p for information on programming individ ual features 6 Performing a system check The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to the gateway Check the telephones Check the time and date display on each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the link is defective Replace the terminal or fix the link Perform random terminal tests as described in...

Page 778: ...Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 7 10 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual start_3g fm Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway ...

Page 779: ... 3000 Systems with HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 14 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 page 8 17 Combining Standalone Systems HiPath 3000 to Form a Network with HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 20 Removing a Standalone System from a Network with HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 22 Replacing License sensitive Hardware Changing the MAC Address page 8 23 Licensing optiClient Attendant page 8 26 optiClient Attendant...

Page 780: ...u must first establish a connection with the Central License Server CLS via the Customer License Manager CLM The customer specific data entered is used to uniquely identify the product configuration for which the relevant license file is to be supplied in encrypted format The license file contains the licenses for all products which are subject to mandatory licensing The CLM is responsible for act...

Page 781: ...ata Customer License Agent CLA 4 License file is validated 5 License file is analyzed Customer License Client CLC Example HiPath 3000 Manager E 6 Individual licenses are distributed to all products which are subject to man datory licensing 3 License file is activated License Management System Central License Server CLS https www central li cense server com Customer License Manager CLM or 2 License...

Page 782: ...ls in license file Default values in unlicensed state Distribution of Licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E Feature name Maximum number Mini mum number During grace period After grace period Net wor k wide Per board Per port per de vice boards per system HG 1500 B channels HG1500 B_Channels 2000 0 2000 2 58 per HG 1500 board HiPath Com Scendo li censes sys tem clients H 323 clients SIP clients HiPat...

Page 783: ... B_Channels 8960 0 8960 2 per TS2 TS2R 0 28 li censesper port DIUN2 S30810 Q2196 X S2M B_Channels 8960 0 8960 2 licens es for port 1 0 licens es for port 2 0 28 li censes for port 1 0 30 li censes for port 2 IVM an nouncements IVM An nouncement 1024 0 1024 0 Max 16 per IVM board optiClient At tendant V7 0 optiClient At tendant V7 0 64 0 64 0 Max 64 on a central board Table 8 1 Features subject to ...

Page 784: ...le must be stored in the HiPath 3000 Manager E installation directory The 30 day grace period begins with the licensing of a standalone system or networked sys tems using the gpcf file The licensing of all features interfaces and products that are subject to mandatory licensing must take place during this period The system falls into licensing default if licensing is not performed within the 30 da...

Page 785: ...o make the license file automatically available for the CLA Information about this can be found in the Customer License Manager online help The license file in XML format contains information about all products that are subject to man datory licensing and the MAC address with which these licenses are linked Feature IDs define the number of licenses available and the length of time for which they a...

Page 786: ...ith HiPath 5000 RSM Service PC with HiPath 3000 Manager E Customer License Agent CLA Customer License Client CLC HiPath 3750 Customer database CDB with licenses HiPath 5000 RSM with HiPath 3000 Manager E Customer License Agent CLA Customer License Client CLC Customer data base CDB with li censes Networked HiPath 3000 systems Validation decryption and analysis of the license file In the case of net...

Page 787: ...nt CLA installed on the PC opens the license file that corresponds to the MAC address Licenses The content of the license file is displayed In a configuration without HiPath 5000 RSM these are the licenses for the open CDB and the corresponding node HiPath 3000 Licenses The content of the license file is displayed In a network with HiPath 5000 RSM these are the licenses for the server CDB and all ...

Page 788: ...r each feature is displayed Expiration date The date displayed here specifies when the validity of the licenses assigned for this feature is due to expire For Base station tab only Type Slot Port The board type the slot in which the board is inserted and the board port used are displayed BS Type The base station type is displayed Name The name of the base station is displayed Note If the right lic...

Page 789: ...ceives its license from the CDB of the first node the licensing dialog for this node must be opened first and as a minimum requirement licensing must be performed using a gcpf file The first node must then be added to the HiPath 3000 5000 network The Feature Server now has its grace period li cense If the Feature Server is not licensed through the first node within one hour the server automaticall...

Page 790: ...ine the MAC address of the control board of the HiPath 3000 system requiring licensing 2 HiPath License Management Invoke the Central License Server CLS via https www central license server com Select the language version for the License Management Center Log on by entering the user name and password 3 Activate the Generate and Download License Key function under Management of Available Licenses V...

Page 791: ...re generating a license key the following content of the displayed dialog must be observed Legal notice The licensing conditions must be accepted Notes Notes on the generation procedure can be entered here A distinction is made here between internal notes only accessible to users authorized to create licenses and customer notes generally accessible Registered company and user Company and user spec...

Page 792: ...et is performed at 10 00 p m The time of the daily check is redefined as a result The licensing check begins at 10 00 p m every day with immediate effect Each additional reset results in the time of the daily check being redefined The system distinguishes between the following two types of error The Feature Server is unable to reach the first node needed for licensing The 30 day Li cense Failure P...

Page 793: ...n the MAC Address input field enter the MAC address for the HiPath 3000 control board as specified in step 1 In the Number field define the number of licenses to be generated for each feature Click Next 7 The customer and the user contact partner specified for this transaction are dis played If there are still no entries available these can be selected using the search mask for companies and the s...

Page 794: ... displayed View tab Type and number of licensed features customer specific information Transactions tab Actions performed for each feature 11 Click the Save License Key button In the subsequent dialog specify the storage location for the license key you want to download Section 8 3 4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Man ager E Step Activity Remarks ...

Page 795: ...Server previous designation HiPath 5000 RSM Features that were not previously subject to mandatory licensing cannot be migrated The base station BS4 is a new product DIUN2 S30810 Q2196 X TS2 S30810 Q2913 X300 and TS2R S30810 K2913 Z300 are new boards Up to now no license was required for the IVM announcement feature These features are released with the maximum configuration following an upgrade BS...

Page 796: ...er Log on by entering the user name and password 4 Activate the View Used Licenses and Certificates function under Management of Used Licenses Different search criteria are displayed in order to invoke the licenses to be converted B channels of HG 1500 boards 5 The MAC address locking ID of a HG 1500 board determined under step 1 should be entered in the Locking ID input field Click the Search but...

Page 797: ... license key is upgraded 10 After successful execution the message License Key Generation Complete ap pears The upgrade information and the information about the license key will be dis played Note The number of pre installed HG 1500 B channels is no longer displayed nut only the effective total for the released licenses 11 Upgrading involves either a single HiPath 3000 system or several networked...

Page 798: ...e relevant license key and click the Display Details button Details on the selected license key are displayed View tab Type and number of licensed features customer specific information Transactions tab Actions performed for each feature 16 Click the Save License Key button In the subsequent dialog specify the storage location for the license key you want to download Section 8 3 4 describes the pr...

Page 799: ... notes generally accessible Registered company and user Company and user specific data is displayed Rehost details MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board Licenses to be used The outcome of this procedure is displayed Example HG 1500 V2 V3 6 features Licenses will be upgraded as a result of this transaction 6 features Licenses will be disabled as a result of this transaction This means that a...

Page 800: ...for the standalone system and a new general license file for the remaining network 12 In the Locking ID input field enter the control board MAC address to which the li cense key is linked see step 6 Click the Search button to display a list of the license keys belonging to the MAC ad dress 13 Select the relevant license key and click the Display Details button Details on the selected license key a...

Page 801: ...Procedure Step Activity Remarks 1 HiPath License Management Invoke the Central License Server CLS via https www central license server com Select the language version for the License Management Center Log on by entering the user name and password 2 Call the Rehost Licenses function under Management of Used Licenses Different search criteria are displayed in order to call up the licenses to be conv...

Page 802: ...th 3000 control board has been deactivated for all six licenses Click the Execute button A new license key is generated 7 After successful execution the message License Key Generation Complete ap pears The generation information and license key data is displayed 8 Invoke the License Management Center homepage 9 Activate the View Used Licenses and Certificates function under Management of Used Lice...

Page 803: ...aced the CDB must be trans ferred to HiPath 3000 A warning will appear that the MAC address is invalid All li censes become invalid if the CDB is installed The system goes into default and fea tures that are subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced functionality The new license key see step 12 must be used to achieve valid licensing Section 8 3 4 describes the procedure for distribu...

Page 804: ... key is a strict licensing require ment Upgrades are not available for versions previous to optiClient Attendant V6 0 8 5 1 optiClient Attendant V7 0 Connected to HiPath 3000 V6 0 Licensing is performed on the associated HiPath 3000 system In order to ensure unique licens ing the license file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board Procedure Figure 8 3 Procedure for Licensi...

Page 805: ...required 6 Install optiClient Attendant s Any number of optiClient Attendants can be installed However HiPath 3000 moni tors the number of licensedoptiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure Depending on the model up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time a 30 day grace period begins Dur ing this time all HiPath 3000 featu...

Page 806: ... Install optiClient Attendant CLM and CLA if not yet available Enter the IP address and port number of the CLA in the optiClient Attendant config uration manager 2 Read out the MAC address of the CLA PC via the CLM 3 Enter the LAC and MAC address at the CLS in order to generate the license key either a via CLM CLS communication or b via direct communication with the CLS via a web browser 4 Transfe...

Page 807: ...up the optiClient Attendant will not boot Any number of optiClient Attendants can be installed However the CLA monitors the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure and dur ing operation Depending on the model up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system When the optiClient Attendant is started for the first time a 30 day grace period be gins During this...

Page 808: ...3000 control board Procedure HiPath 3000 V5 0 Licensing is performed on the optiClient At tendant HiPath 3000 V5 0 Licensing is performed on the associated HiPath 3000 system The procedure described below assumes that the HiPath 3000 upgrade to V5 0 has already been completed Figure 8 5 Licensing procedure when upgrading optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 on Hi Path 3000 V5 0 Step Activity Remarks 1 R...

Page 809: ...antInstall s Any number of optiClient Attendants can be installed However HiPath 3000 moni tors the number of licensedoptiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure Depending on the model up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time a 30 day grace period begins Dur ing this time all HiPath 3000 features that require licensing in...

Page 810: ...censing when Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V5 0 Step Activity Remarks 1 Install optiClient Attendant CLM and CLA if not yet available Enter the IP address and port number of the CLA in the optiClient Attendant config uration manager 2 Read out the MAC address of the CLA PC via the CLM 3 Enter the LAC and MAC address and the CD key of the optiClient Attendant V6 0 at the C...

Page 811: ...CLA at startup the optiClient Attendant will not boot Any number of optiClient Attendants can be installed However the CLA monitors the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure and dur ing operation Depending on the model up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system When the optiClient Attendant is started for the first time a 30 day grace period be gins...

Page 812: ...In order to ensure unique licensing the new license file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board Procedure HiPath 3000 V5 0 Licensing is performed on the optiClient At tendant HiPath 3000 V5 0 Licensing is performed on the associated HiPath 3000 system Figure 8 7 Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7 0 As Part of an Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5 0 HiPath 3000 V5 0 CLS...

Page 813: ...nse key or save it to the buffer memory This is completed by manually entering the license to the CLA performed on the CLM offline activation 7 Write the customer data record to HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 Install optiClient Attendant s Any number of optiClient Attendants can be installed However HiPath 3000 moni tors the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure Depending on ...

Page 814: ...PCF is created a flag is set in the system CDB and the Customer License Agent CLA to indicate that a GPCF file was created This en sures that the 30 day period cannot be extended and the GPCF file cannot be regenerated To guarantee the security and consistency of the product licenses generated chang es to the system time on the PC of an installed Customer License Agent CLA must not exceed one day ...

Page 815: ... 2 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3800 page 9 2 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 page 9 4 Connecting a printer page 9 6 ECR with HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 not for U S and Canada page 9 8 Connecting Special Equipment page 9 24 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V6 0 page 9 29 Hardware Upgrade page 9 29 Software Upgrade page 9 31 Converting the customer database wh...

Page 816: ...aution To ensure that the system operates without blocking you must follow the rules in Section 4 2 5 concerning board configuration Table 9 1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards If Then Inserting new board in free slot Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial startup Section 4 2 5 5 System with default numbering plan The station numbers from the new board...

Page 817: ...or you can delete it and reset the default state Copying is not possible for trunk boards Replacing with a dif ferent board type The system does not automatically activate the board After removing the old board you can delete it from the database us ing HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T After you have inserted the new board the system activates it as if it had been inserted into a free slot How...

Page 818: ...startup Page 4 156 System with default numbering plan The station numbers from the new board are appended consec utively and in ascending order to the numbers already assigned System with modified numbering plan The station numbers on the new board can be in any order Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T you can assign a spe cific station to a port If the number is already assigned to a diff...

Page 819: ... database us ing HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T After you have inserted the new board the system activates it as if it had been inserted into a free slot However the CDB area used by the old board is left as a gap In the case of subscriber line modules you can use HiPath 3000 Man ager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board or you can delete it and reset the default s...

Page 820: ...signing V 24 interfaces from other systems is provided in the board descrip tions in Chapter 3 7 Caution Follow the safety and operating instructions provided by the printer manufacturer Figure 9 1 Sample Connection of a CDR Printer to HiPath 3000 CDR printer Connection cables S30267 Z23 A100 10m S30267 Z23 A500 50m HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Backplane X7 8 slot cabinets HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 25 pi...

Page 821: ...ath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 9 7 Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 Expanding HiPath 3000 Output formats For information about the output formats compressed or uncompressed for call detail record ing central see HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description ...

Page 822: ...in the ECR the internal system power supply unit for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 is not sufficient enough to provide power to the overall telephone configuration corded or cordless tele phones In this case the EPSU2 R external power supply unit should be installed in the ECR 7 Danger An expansion cabinet rack ECR equipped with an external power supply unit EPSU2 R may only be operated if the housin...

Page 823: ...fuse warning do not confuse with EPSU2 R fuse Rear panel Figure 9 3 Line voltage connections 1 Top Line output to UPSC DR connection jack for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Below Line input Batteries EPSU2 R 2 output voltage to UPSC DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 or Batteries output voltage 2 to UPSM for HiPath 3700 Clip 3 Attach the braided screen of the connection cable to the jack 2 here Figur...

Page 824: ...nit is installed in the ECR the following additional dis play and control elements are also included EPSU2 R 2 5 A T 4 battery fuse warning do not confuse with battery fuse on the ECR front panel LED 5 for the 48 V output voltage DC output in the EPSU2 R see Table 9 3 LED 6 for the line input voltage AC input in the EPSU2 R see Table 9 3 Figure 9 3 ECR Rear Panel With Connecting Elements 1 3 4 5 6...

Page 825: ...onnecting Elements LED 6 DC output LED 7 AC input Description On On DC output and AC input voltages are OK Off On No DC voltage at output for example DC load short circuited On Off No AC voltage at input power failure or system powered by batteries including addition al power Off Off No AC input voltage power outage and batteries are empty or the EPSU2 R fuse is defective or was removed by turning...

Page 826: ... 12 V 7 Ah 4 x V39113 W5123 E891 Connection cable ECR batteries HiPath 3700 UPSM power failure signaling lamp wire connector a relay connected in series can be used for signaling purposes for exam ple C39195 A7002 B11 Connection cable ECR HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 S30267 Z361 A10 9 2 4 3 Installation Options The expansion cabinet rack ECR can be installed in a 19 inch cabinet see Section 4 4 4 5 ...

Page 827: ...our batteries inside the ECR The circuit diagram below illustrates the cable run between the batteries in the ECR and the power supply unit of the system UPSM for HiPath 3700 UPSC DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 The connection cable between the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinet is also provided 7 Danger Before opening the housing disconnect the ECR from the power supply by setti...

Page 828: ...l exup fm Expanding HiPath 3000 7 Caution When storing an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is inactive for a long pe riod of time remove the battery fuse 6 3 A T in the front panel of the ECR When shipping an ECR with built in batteries the batteries must be removed before hand Figure 9 5 ECR With Built In Batteries 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 829: ...eleased for connection to the UPSC DR UPSM and installation in the ECR The use of other battery types is prohibited Step Activity 1 Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR s front panel to Off see Section 9 2 4 1 2 Remove the battery fuse ECR front panel see Section 9 2 4 1 3 Unplug all of the ECR s power and connection cables 4 Remove the ECR housing cover To do this remo...

Page 830: ...S403 54 7620 09 05 9 16 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual exup fm Expanding HiPath 3000 7 Insert the batteries carefully in the recesses provided C 8 Replace the battery retainer and secure the mounting screw Step Activity C ...

Page 831: ...le connector lugs D carefully onto the two connection contacts on each of the four batteries 10 Replace the ECR s housing cover and secure the three mounting screws at the rear 11 Connect all of the ECR s power and connection cables 12 Insert the battery fuse ECR front panel see Section 9 2 4 1 13 Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR s front panel to On see Section 9 2 ...

Page 832: ... the ECR Figure 9 7 shows the position of the EPSU2 R inside the ECR The block diagram below illustrates the cable run between the EPSU2 R and the batteries in side the ECR and the power supply unit of the system UPSC DR The connection cable be tween the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinet is also provided 7 Danger An expansion cabinet rack ECR equipped with an external power supply ...

Page 833: ...toring an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is inactive for a long pe riod of time remove the battery fuse 6 3 A T in the front panel of the ECR When shipping an ECR with built in batteries the batteries must be removed before hand PE 4 batteries 12 V 7 Ah 48 V BatB 48 V S1 S2 F1 T6 3 A Housing X2 L1 1 N 2 PE 3 X1 1 L1 2 N 3 PE X3 3 4 48 V 1 48 V UP 2 EPSU2 R 48 V BatE 48 V Fan not availab...

Page 834: ...anding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 9 20 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual exup fm Expanding HiPath 3000 Figure 9 7 ECR with Built In EPSU2 R EPSU2 R ...

Page 835: ... the ECR housing cover To do this remove the three screws at the rear and slide the housing cover back 5 Cut off the plug on the fan connection line if there is one Strip both wire ends and attach wire end sleeves 6 Connect both connection wires to the EPSU2 R terminal A as shown in Figure 9 8 Connect the red wire fan to the white wire EPSU2 R and the black wire fan to the black wire EPSU2 R Figur...

Page 836: ...nding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 9 22 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual exup fm Expanding HiPath 3000 Figure 9 8 Connecting the Fan to the EPSU2 R A ...

Page 837: ...sional Service Manual 9 23 Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 Expanding HiPath 3000 If you install the fan at a later time you must make sure that the identification B in Figure 9 9 is in the upper right corner when viewed from outside Figure 9 9 Placement of the Fan in the ECR B ...

Page 838: ...hone are possible without the support of the opener and signal functions Figure 9 10 Connection Options for Entrance Telephones The new central control boards CBCC S30810 Q2935 A301 and CBRC S30810 Q2935 Z301 only support TFE S Adapter S30122 K7696 T313 Figure 9 11 Direct Connection of Entrance Telephones HiPath 3000 Connection via ET entrance telephone adapter and amplifier ET adapter Amplifier D...

Page 839: ...rCom Analog behaves like an analog tele phone DTMF tone dialing detection and control It can be operated with DTMF signals DoorCom Analog can function only in combination with the following components DoorCom Analog DCA 612 0 Siedle Vario TLM 612 entrance telephone Switching remote control interface DCSF 600 For the voice connection of an internal user to the entrance telephone Without this module...

Page 840: ...e control features open doors select entrance telephone etc can be programmed on procedure keys The stored DTMF signal sequence is sent to the application DoorCom Analog Set up station Stations Parameters Extension Type Standard Flags Call waiting rejection on System parameters Flags DTMF automatic Remote station telephone Set up station Stations Parameters Flags Call waiting rejection off Flags M...

Page 841: ...n analog station port the amplifier may require level adaptation Connection to an analog station port over an ET adapter Connection to an analog trunk circuit Connecting speakers to an analog station port Figure 9 13 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Station Port HiPath 3000 SLA SLAS ET HiPath 3000 SLA SLAS Amplifier T R Active speak ers only ET T R T R Starting contact HiPath 3000 SLA SLAS REAL ST...

Page 842: ... V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual exup fm Expanding HiPath 3000 Connecting speakers to an analog trunk port Figure 9 14 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Trunk Port HiPath 3000 TML TLA HiPath 3000 TML TLA Amplifier T R Active speakers only T R REAL STRB Starting contact ...

Page 843: ...y The CBCP board S30810 Q2935 B201 must be replaced by a CBCC board S30810 Q2935 A301 Multimedia card MMC An MMC with 64 MB is required to run HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher It is not possible to upgrade HiPath 3550 to HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3350 to HiPath 3300 This would require replacing the complete system System Control board necessary for HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher HiPath 3800 CBSAP S3...

Page 844: ...llowing table are necessary for using the HG 1500 function ality with HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher Unnamed HG 1500 boards must be replaced System HG 1500 board required for HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher HiPath 3800 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 and higher HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 HXGM3 S30810 Q2942 X and higher HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X and higher HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 HXGR3 S...

Page 845: ...Figure 9 15 The flowchart on Page 9 32 describes the procedure for converting the CDB from V4 0 to V5 0 First you must edit the V4 0 CDB Then you must convert the CDB and finally edit the V5 0 CDB No other changes are necessary apart from modifications for IP workpoint clients and IP lines Only the gatekeeper and gateway data has to be edited Telephone numbers and other properties of the IP workpo...

Page 846: ...e 9 16 Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4 0 V5 0 Part 1 of 4 CDB Conversion V4 0 V5 0 Define which HG 1500 board be comes the HG 1500 gatekeeper and which becomes the HG 1500 gateway Make a note of the S0 station numbers More than one HG 1500 board in stalled Define gatekeeper HG 1500 Open V4 0 CDB using HiPath 3000 Manager E Open V4 0 CDB using HiPath 3000 Manager E No Yes ...

Page 847: ...all lines Open HXG Configuration dialog For all HG 1500 boards installed Delete all S0 stations Open HXG Configuration dialog Delete all system clients Delete all HFA clients in the S0 station Delete all vCAPI clients in the S0 station Check whether the number of all configured stations and lines is 0 Set Release gateway resources flag Convert CDB from V4 0 V5 0 using HiPath 3000 Man ager E Config...

Page 848: ...ce Manual exup fm Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V6 0 Figure 9 18 Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4 0 V5 0 Part 3 of 4 Save the CDB under new name Define the slot for the HG 1500 gatekeeper Convert CDB from V4 0 V5 0 using HiPath 3000 Man ager E Enter the number of lines re quired Configure all V4 0 HFA clients as H 323 clients ...

Page 849: ...g and Upgrading HiPath 3000 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V6 0 Figure 9 19 Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4 0 V5 0 Part 4 of 4 V5 0 conversion complete Save CDB Define the slot s for the HG 1500 gateway Configure S0 stations Configure all V4 0 system clients as system clients V4 0 call num ber and name are retained ...

Page 850: ...ny cards as possible in the HiPath 3800 basic cabi net If the cards have to be configured manually some data may be lost This data will have to be entered manually after CDB conversion Note the following special scenarios SLMA HiPath 3800 is used for SLA16N HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Only 16 of the 24 ports on the SLMA are configured To configure all 24 ports the card has to be cancelled first and th...

Page 851: ...ding HiPath 3000 Converting the customer database when changing a system TMAMF HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 is not incorporated CR8 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 is not incorporated In HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 systems 23 slots are available for peripheral cards The card in slot 26 is not incorporated because HiPath 3800 only has 22 slots ...

Page 852: ...Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 9 38 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual exup fm Converting the customer database when changing a system ...

Page 853: ...e Telephone USB 1 1 Interface optiPoint 500 Add On Devices page 10 17 optiPoint key module optiPoint BLF optiPoint application module V5 0 SMR 06 and later Possible add on device configurations optiPoint 500 Adapters page 10 21 optiPoint Analog Adapter optiPoint ISDN Adapter optiPoint Phone Adapter optiPoint Acoustic Adapter optiPoint Recorder Adapter Possible optiPoint Adapter Configurations Comp...

Page 854: ...advance optiPoint 420 advance S Connection and Startup page 10 58 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone optiPoint 410 optipoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S Add On Devices page 10 61 optiPoint self labeling key module optiPoint 410 display module Possible Configurations for the Add On Devices Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters page 10 65 optiPoint 600 office page 10 66 optiLog 4me page ...

Page 855: ...00 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 10 3 Workpoint Clients Overview Gigaset active M page 10 88 Gigaset active EX page 10 89 Logging Mobile Telephones On To the System page 10 91 Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000 page 10 94 ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000 page 10 95 Topic ...

Page 856: ...different optiPoint 500 adapters allow flexible expansion of the telephone workstation Ad ditional devices such as personal computers fax equipment telephones headsets can be connected quickly because it is easy to build them on to the bottom of the telephones not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy and because the adapters are plug n play You can find information not contained in this c...

Page 857: ...s com hipath Downloads Double key assignment The programmable function keys of the optiPoint 500 telephones and the optiPoint key modules can have double assignments if only call numbers without LED support are saved on the first level It is also possible to program call numbers without LED support on the second level These can be internal station numbers DID call num bers and call numbers from a ...

Page 858: ... E with LEDs see Page 10 5 Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus and pitch Suitable for wall mounting No modularity no connecting capability for adapters or add on devices no display Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 entry Refer to Section 10 2 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 1 optiPoint 500 entry Standard Key Assignment Default Consultation hold Number redia...

Page 859: ...alog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch and display contrast Suitable for wall mounting No modularity no connecting capability for adapters or add on devices Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 economy Refer to Section 10 2 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 2 optiPoint 500 economy not for U S Standard K...

Page 860: ...for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch and display contrast Interfaces and slots 1 USB 1 1 interface 1 option bay 1 interface for up to 2 add on devices Suitable for wall mounting Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 basic Refer to Section 10 2 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 3 optiPoint 500 basic Standard Key ...

Page 861: ...ms Main features 12 function keys 4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E 8 freely programmable with LEDs see Page 10 5 Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker quality and display contrast...

Page 862: ... 500 Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 standard Refer to Section 10 2 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 4 optiPoint 500 standard Standard Key Assignment Default Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect ...

Page 863: ...10 5 Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each Background lighting that stays lit for approximately 5 s 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker quality and display contrast Interfaces and slots 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 2 option b...

Page 864: ...iPoint 500 advance Refer to Section 10 2 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 5 optiPoint 500 advance Standard Key Assignment Default Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect ...

Page 865: ... 3750 and Hi Path 3700 Connecting as a client telephone System HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Hardware requirements free UP0 E port on SLMO2 8 free UP0 E port on SLMO8 24 free UP0 E port on CBCC CBRC SLU8 SLU8R SLMO24 free UP0 E port on CBCC CBRC SLU8 SLU8R The device can also be connected to an existing optiPoint 500 telephone except for optiPo...

Page 866: ...2x2x0 6 0 6 mm Perform the terminal test in Section 12 3 1 8 to determine whether a local power supply is needed for additional power for example in host client configurations or for larger ranges 3 Label the keys You have the following options by hand in writing label sheets come with each telephone using a PC with the Key Labeling Tool requires MS Word which is contained on the Electronic Operat...

Page 867: ...st Download ing has finished and the telephone is ready for operation when you see the date and time on the display 10 2 1 8 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone Figure 10 6 optiPoint 500 Connection Options USB interface MW8 RJ45 connection jack for optiPoint key mod ule optiPoint BLF MW8 RJ45 connection jack for HiPath 3000 MW4 RJ8 connection jacks Upper headset equip ment Lower handset Opt...

Page 868: ...smission over CAPI for example direct Internet access fax capability e mail etc If the CAPI software is installed PCs have direct Internet access over the USB inter face without any additional adapter There is a charge for this software TAPI and CAPI can be used simultaneously for example to receive a large e mail or download data while calls are being set up over a CTI application optiClient Atte...

Page 869: ... Electronic Operating Instructions CD Refer to the HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description for model specific data for the optiPoint key module and the optiPoint BLF The following sections contain information on the possible configurations of key modules Section 10 2 2 4 for terminals in the optiPoint 500 family Section 10 3 5 3 for terminals in the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 family 10 2 2 1 opt...

Page 870: ...mbers DID call numbers and call numbers from a HiPath network see also Page 10 5 10 2 2 2 optiPoint BLF This is an add on device that provides 90 additional keys LEDs and labeling areas for all pur poses The device is connected to the telephone or to an optiPoint key module over an interface cable with the following connectors input MW6 output MW8 Power is supplied using a power supply unit see Se...

Page 871: ...vance Only the personal phonebook is supported when operating the key module in the TDM en vironment optiPoint 410 standard optiPoint 410 advance optiPoint 420 standard optiPoint 420 ad vance In the VoIP environment the add on device supports the same functions as the present optiPoint display module personal internal phonebook LDAP WAP browser Java applica tions voice dialing but with improved er...

Page 872: ...s the possible configurations for add on devices on telephones from the optiPoint 500 family not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy Table 10 1 Add on device configurations on an optiPoint 500 telephone optiPoint 500 telephone 1st add on device 2nd add on device optiPoint 500 basic optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 standard SL For U S Only optiPoint 500 advance optiPoint key module op...

Page 873: ...The adapters which are connected on the bottom of the telephone are plug n play When a new telephone adapter configuration is plugged in it generates a reset a setup message noti fies the system of the new configuration The user usually installs the adapter The installation instructions are on the Electronic Oper ating Instructions CD Option bays 7 Caution Always disconnect the line cord before co...

Page 874: ...em regard less of the connection status of the optiPoint telephone as long as a B channel is available The adapter must always have a local power supply for operating the connected analog device T R interface properties Supply current 30 mA Busy signal when both B channels are busy Ring sequence 2 2 Supports only DTMF with Flash No ground signaling allowed Does not support VoiceMail server with T ...

Page 875: ...t etc S0 telephones must have their own power supply for connection S0 interface properties Supports point to point and passive bus connections Wired for short passive bus configurations Cable lengths Maximum 100 m 328 feet with a cable impedance of 75 ohms Maximum 200 m 656 feet with a cable impedance of 150 ohms complies with CCITT recommendation I 430 The NT terminating resistors are integrated...

Page 876: ...ts own power supply The system treats the client telephone as an independent telephone with a separate phone number and its own B channel The client telephone can send and receive calls regardless of the connection status of the host telephone The maximum range between the host and client telephones is approximately 100 m 328 feet for J Y ST 2x2x0 6 0 6 mm Figure 10 13 optiPoint Phone Adapter MW6 ...

Page 877: ...e of a host client configuration Figure 10 14 Example of a Host Client Configuration Local power sup ply optional MW wall outlets UP0 E to the system 2 wire up to 1000 m 3280 feet UP0 E 4 wire up to 100 m 328 feet optiPoint 500 telephone with optiPoint phone adapter Client Host optiPoint 500 telephone MW wall outlet Local power supply optional 4 2 ...

Page 878: ...ker are used sense lead optiPoint 500 basic does not support the connection of an external microphone to the op tiPoint acoustic adapter The speakerphone mode selection is independent of whether the internal or an external speakerphone is used External speakerphones have precedence over internal speaker phones with the exception of manual intercom and signaling procedures The internal microphone t...

Page 879: ... The volume of the external loud speaker can also be adjusted using the external amplifier Figure 10 16 Y Cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter Assignment of the MW4 connection sockets Internal resistance 0 Ω 10 µF Level for PCM 20 dBm 4 8 dBm at volume level 8 0 775 V 0 dBm Sense lead to GND int loudspeaker deactivated only active for tone ringing Input level 50 dBm 12 dBm PCM signal Input resista...

Page 880: ...active telephone states handset lifted Loudspeaker activated or headset active These states can be displayed for example on external signaling equip ment LED relay etc The signaling equipment must have its own power supply The contact can be loaded with up to 5 W at 24 Vac or 60 Vdc 3 4 Call con tact Signals the call receipt state This can be used for example to control a secondary bell The contac...

Page 881: ...call is being recorded Figure 10 17 optiPoint Recorder Adapter Assignment of both connection jacks Recorders to be connected must meet the following electrical re quirements Input impedance 10 kΩ Frequency progression 300 to 3000 Hz 3 dB Beep tone level 26 dBm to 18 dBm at a 600 Ω load Max input level 650 mVeff from a 600 Ω source 1 MW4 port for second headset Pin Signal 1 Tx 2 Rx 3 Rx 4 Tx 2 MW6 ...

Page 882: ...e optiPoint 500 advance only a category 2 adapter can be operated in the second slot Category 2 optiPoint 500 adapters The following adapters can be used on the host and client telephones This is also true if a cat egory 1 optiPoint 500 adapter is already connected optiPoint Acoustic Adapter optiPoint Recorder Adapter Configuration restrictions Number of usable adapters and add on devices Section ...

Page 883: ...iset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters Table 10 3 Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters optiset E optiPoint 500 analog adapter analog adapter phone adapter phone adapter data adapter integrated USB interface control adapter ISDN adapter ISDN adapter acoustic adapter acoustic adapter contact adapter headset adapter headset plus adapter recorder adapter ...

Page 884: ...es and adapters are implemented on an optiPoint 500 telephone or the maximum UP0 E interface range is reached by the optiPoint 500 telephone The telephone test described in Section 12 3 1 8 will establish whether or not additional power is required from a local power supply series connected2 2 The local power supply is series connected to the optiPoint 500 telephone the digital RJ6 jack on the loc...

Page 885: ...per system 384 250 3842 723 484 245 246 Number per box the value in brackets applies to operation us ing a PSUI 192 144 120 optiPoint acoustic adapters Number per system No restriction optiPoint analog adapters Number per system 116 1167 248 248 89 89 optiPoint recorder adapters Number per system No restriction optiPoint ISDN adapters Number per system 116 1167 488 488 89 89 optiPoint phone adapte...

Page 886: ...guration and performance the specified capacity limits may not always be achieved To ensure that the dynamic capacity limit of HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is not exceeded the configuration can be tested using the project planning tool intranet http intranet mch4 siemens de syseng perfeng tools hpt index htm Testing is not required for configurations of up to 250 stations and 90 lines Configurations...

Page 887: ...05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 10 35 Workpoint Clients optiPoint 500 9 If the total number of UP0 E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 24 a UPSC D UPSC DR must be used ...

Page 888: ... call number currently saved is shown The optiPoint self labeling key module allows you to increase the number of function keys avail able for the telephone types standard and advance The add on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF can be used with the optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 opti Point 420 S families The optiPoint 410 display module is used as an add on device fo...

Page 889: ...th 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 10 37 Workpoint Clients optiPoint 410 optipoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S Call deflection Screened transfer Mute Music on hold List of answered calls Number redial Speed dialing ...

Page 890: ...P workpoint clients system clients such as optiClient 130 V5 0 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 CorNet IP mode H 323 clients such as Microsoft Windows NetMeeting SIP clients such as optiClient 130 S optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 S setup of a connection access control Main Features of version 5 0 or later Voice over IP VoIP that is the transfer of voice data o...

Page 891: ...e HG 1500 board s No payload resources are required for direct transfer between IP supported networks A HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service can function as the VoIP system In systems with just one HG 1500 board this board functions both as a signaling gateway and a media gateway A Release gateway resources flag must be activated for this in HiPath 3000 Manager E Otherwise no resources can be...

Page 892: ...s Protocols H 323 HFA V3 V4 CorNet IP SIP HTTP DHCP SNMP FTP H 235 security QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 3rd party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 8 function keys with LEDs 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus and pitch...

Page 893: ...ptiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S Refer to Section 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 18 optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 410 entry Consultation hold Number redial Message Callback Speed dialing Microphone on off Loudspeaker Disconnect optiPoint 410 entry S Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programm...

Page 894: ...EEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 3rd party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open listening 2...

Page 895: ...ction 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 19 optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 410 economy Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 economy S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable Ca...

Page 896: ... 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Bac...

Page 897: ...10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 20 optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S Standard Key As signment Default optiPoint 410 economy plus Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 economy plus S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial ...

Page 898: ...ccordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mo...

Page 899: ...tion 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 21 optiPoint 410 standard optiPoint 410 standard S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 410 standard Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 standard S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable...

Page 900: ...ith Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 19 function keys with LEDs Graphic display swivel with 4 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex spea...

Page 901: ...ptiPoint 410 advance S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 410 advance Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 advance S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable Ca...

Page 902: ...omy optiPoint 420 economy S Main features Protocols H 323 HFA V3 V4 CorNet IP SIP HTTP DHCP SNMP FTP H 235 security QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 12 function keys with LEDs and ...

Page 903: ...Section 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 23 optiPoint 420 economy optiPoint 420 economy S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 420 economy Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 economy S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable Calle...

Page 904: ...d G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts ...

Page 905: ...on 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 24 optiPoint 420 economy plus optiPoint 420 economy plus S Standard Key As signment Default optiPoint 420 economy plus Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 economy plus S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Pr...

Page 906: ...ce with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerp...

Page 907: ...ection 10 3 4 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 25 optiPoint 420 standard optiPoint 420 standard S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 420 standard Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 standard S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable Ca...

Page 908: ...d standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 18 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 4 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full ...

Page 909: ...t 420 advance optiPoint 420 advance S Standard Key Assignment Default optiPoint 420 advance Service Programmable Number redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 advance S Loudspeaker Programmable Number redial Programmable Calle...

Page 910: ...e HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure an optiPoint IP telephone for HiPath 3000 5000 The optiPoint IP telephone software can be upgraded using The Deployment and Licensing Service For information on the upgrade procedure please see the Deployment Service Adminis tration Manual WBM access to the respective optiPoint IP telephone Information on the procedure can be found in the following manuals opti...

Page 911: ...ptipoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S 10 3 4 1 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone Figure 10 27 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 S Connection Op tions optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S optiPoint 410 420 standard optiPoint 410 420 standard S optiPoint 410 420 advance optiPoint 410 420 advance S ...

Page 912: ...tiPoint 420 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 S Description of Connections No Connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the LAN 2 Handset 3 Local power supply optional 1 1 No local power supply is required if power is provided via the Ethernet cable Power over LAN 4 Add on device 5 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC 6 Headset 121 TR 9 5 7 Adapter 1 8 Adap...

Page 913: ...ach key is assigned a display one line with 12 characters in which the function or call number currently saved is shown 7 Caution Always disconnect the line cord before connecting add on devices to the telephone A maximum of two add on devices may be installed on an optiPoint 410 optipoint 410 S or optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S telephone not optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S optiPoint 410 ...

Page 914: ...The bottom key of the first key module installed on the telephone optiPoint self labeling key module or optiPoint key module is automatically defined as Shift key default This is the case if no Shift key was already programmed 10 3 5 2 optiPoint 410 display module This is an add on device with a graphic swivel display 240 x 320 pixels with touchscreen func tionality background illumination and nav...

Page 915: ...d optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S Online help Connection The optiPoint 410 display module must always be installed as the first add on device in other words connected directly to the telephone The connection to the telephone is made over an interface cable with the following connectors input MW6 output MW8 The power supply is ensured via the connected telephone ...

Page 916: ... 410 standard S optiPoint 410 advance optiPoint 410 advance S optiPoint 420 standard optiPoint 420 standard S optiPoint 420 advance optiPoint 420 advance S optiPoint key module optiPoint key module optiPoint key module optiPoint key module optiPoint BLF optiPoint 410 display module optiPoint 410 display module optiPoint key module optiPoint 410 display module optiPoint BLF optiPoint 410 display mo...

Page 917: ...hones from the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 families not optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S optiPoint 410 econo my optiPoint 410 economy S optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S op tiPoint 420 economy optiPoint 420 economy S optiPoint 420 economy plus and optiPoint 420 economy plus S optiPoint Acoustic Adapter Note Floating contacts are not supported when using the adapt...

Page 918: ...s Graphic LCD display swivel with 8 lines each with 24 characters touchscreen Back ground lighting with approximately 5 s ghosting 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker quality and display contrast Interfaces and slots 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 1 opt...

Page 919: ...pad external keypad possible over USB interface 12 function keys and integrated alphanumeric keypad Full duplex speakerphone mode Half duplex speakerphone mode Integrated USB 1 1 interface optiset E data adapter needed for data com munication with a PC Headset port optiset E headset adapter needed for headset connection Graphic LCD display with background lighting touchscreen LCD display without b...

Page 920: ...n Connection of optiPoint 600 office over the IP interface You can obtain further information in the installation and startup instructions http www siemens com hipath Down loads Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure a workpoint client Supports cordless adapter Wide scope of functions with few adapters 1 option bay Many adapters necessary for using functions 2 option bays Table 10 8 Comparison of ...

Page 921: ... all calls Malicious Call Recorder Stores calls in their entirety when you press any button during the call Third Party Monitoring not currently available with HiPath 3000 5000 optiLog 4me should be installed at the central station of the system Recording starts when you press the Monitor key on the telephone Furthermore you can use the recorder to record conference calls using an external micro p...

Page 922: ...dule The optiset E privacy module protects telephone calls from unauthorized monitoring Both part ners need a device like this The privacy module is connected between the telephone and hand set you simply need to plug in the handset cord The privacy module is supplied complete with a local power supply The optiset E privacy module may be subject to import and export regulations ...

Page 923: ...sing large configurations or if you need to extend the range 10 7 1 1 Local Power Supply for optiset E optiPoint 500 and optiPoint 600 office You can connect a local power supply to the line cords of a host or client telephone using two MW6 jacks and the connection cable supplied see Figure 10 32 Variants Local power supply Euro AUL 06D1284 C39280 Z4 C71 number entered on unit Local power supply U...

Page 924: ...r Connection Table 10 9 Pin Assignments of the Local Power Supply AUL 06D1284 Euro Pin Assignment 1 Not used 2 3 a Wire Tip 4 b Wire Ring 5 6 Not used Figure 10 32 Example of an External AC Adapter Connection AC Adapter jack MW digital jack From optiPoint 500 adapter for example here the optiPoint analog adapter Analog tele phone or device optiPoint 500 Telephone HiPath 3750 ...

Page 925: ...pplied to a telephone via the left board marked Digital Variants AC adapter Euro C39280 Z4 C510 AC adapter UK C39280 Z4 C512 AC adapter 110 V USA C39280 Z4 C511 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications AC adapter Euro C39280 Z4 C510 AC adapter UK C39280 Z4 C512 AC adapter 110 V USA C39280 Z4 C511 Line voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC 120 VAC Line frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Output voltage max 43 V...

Page 926: ...eadset replaces the telephone handset which means that the user s hands are free when telephoning The use of a cordless headset 121 TR 9 5 is also possible Note A headset key can be configured for optiPoint or optiset E telephones This allows the user to take calls and to toggle between the handset and the headset Figure 10 33 Example of a Corded and a Cordless Headset ...

Page 927: ... Using an opti Point acoustic adapter1 Using an optiset E headset adapter headset plus adapter Using an optiset E control adapter optiPoint 500 basic X optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 standard SL For U S Only X optiPoint 500 advance X X optiPoint 600 office X X optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S X optiPoint 410 standard optiPoint 410 standard S X X optiPoint 410 advance o...

Page 928: ...t X X optiset E advance con ference conference X X optiset E memory X X 1 Accepting and ending calls using the headset keys is only supported if the connection is established using an optiPoint acoustic adapter Table 10 10 Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets Telephone Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets Direct Using an opti Point acoustic adapter1 Using an optiset E...

Page 929: ...ine the communication functions and display of the optiClient 130 V5 0 Interface modules are the modules that allow the available functions to be operated in win dows and dialogs Examples of interface modules are telephone windows directories call list management etc Provider modules determine which communication systems or communication service pro viders the optiClient 130 V5 0 can be connected ...

Page 930: ...cs and fax protocols including T 38 Connections Ethernet connections 1 x RJ45 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access 1 x RJ45 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access power supply over MDI IEEE 802 3af Pow er over LAN Analog connections 2 x RJ11 analog telephone fax Power supply External 24 Vdc 12 W local power supply No local power supply is required if power is provided via Ethernet access Power over LAN Connection a...

Page 931: ...e calls to the correct destination Configuration as optiPoint Attendant is possible for the following terminals optiPoint 500 econ omy basic standard advance optiPoint 410 economy economy plus standard advance opti Point 420 economy economy plus standard advance and optiPoint 600 office Standard key assignment default for optiPoint Attendant For more information please refer to the optiPoint Atten...

Page 932: ...software components for TCP IP based operation are already included In addition only a HiPath ComScendo license is re quired to start up IP workpoint clients This means that there is no need to market the op tiClient 130 as a basis for an optiClient Attendant based LAN optiClient Attendant V7 0 is licensed centrally via HiPath License Management The functional scope of Version 7 0 is the same as t...

Page 933: ...n German English Dutch Portuguese Italian French and Spanish Connection with charges for single calls with automatic display in the notebook printable Connection of a blind attendant console Use of busy lamp fields 140 names with 16 characters or 240 call numbers with 6 characters per busy lamp field Up to three busy lamp fields can be displayed Optional connection of second monitor Configuration ...

Page 934: ...ch the optiClient Attendants are connected Signaling takes place in the CorNet IP protocol CorNet NQ protocol tunneled in H 323 via annex M1 In an IP network a maximum of 100 stations per node can be defined that send their status information to the central optiClient Attendant for display on the busy lamp field The stations of the central system in the network to which the optiClient Attendants a...

Page 935: ...D drive Min 40 MB free hard disk memory Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system For operation with a TCP IP connection Functional operating system with network and sound card configured For operation on USB optiPoint 500 telephone or optiPoint 600 office with free USB inter face USB cable part number S30267 Z360 A30 1 USB driver Call Bridge TU software and a free USB port on the PC For operati...

Page 936: ...ct is licensed centrally via HiPath License Management Information on the licensing procedure can be found in Section 8 5 Configuration and operation Information on installation can be found in the Readme file on the optiClient Attendant product software CD More information can be found in the optiClient Attendant operating instructions see Section 1 6 Information on the Intranet Electronic Docume...

Page 937: ...dless Office For further information refer to the appropriate operating instructions and the HiPath Cordless Of fice service manual 10 11 1 Gigaset S1 professional Gigaset S1 professional is a cordless telephone based on the digital DECT GAP standard Technical Specifications Ranges Outdoors up to 300 m Indoors up to 50 m Operating times Standby up to 170 hours Talk time up to 13 hours Dimensions L...

Page 938: ...t SL1 professional Gigaset SL1 professional is a very handy and light only 100 g mobile telephone based on the digital DECT GAP standard Technical Specifications Ranges Outdoors up to 300 m Indoors up to 50 m Operating times Standby up to 250 hours Talk time up to 15 hours Dimensions L W D in mm 114 47 22 Weight including battery cells approx 100 g Operating temperature mobile telephone 5 C to 45 ...

Page 939: ...mobile telephone based on the digital DECT GAP standard It is suitable for use in environments requiring telephones to be break and shock proof and dust and spray resistant Main Features Housing Spray resistant IEC 529 IP64 Dustproof Break and shockproof Silicon free interface Sturdy carry clip Interference resistance conforming to EN 50 082 2 industry standard Acoustics optimized for industrial e...

Page 940: ...ng temperature mobile telephone 10 C to 55 C 14 F to 131 F 10 11 4 Gigaset active M Gigaset active M is a very robust mobile telephone based on the digital DECT standard It is suitable for use in environments requiring telephones to be break and shockproof and dust and spray resistant Main Features Housing Spray resistant IEC 529 IP64 Dustproof Break and shockproof Modified key layout for use with...

Page 941: ...55 C 14 F to 131 F 10 11 5 Gigaset active EX In contrast to conventional mobile telephones the explosion proof DECT mobile telephone Gi gaset active EX is designed for use in hazardous areas and is effectively protected against moisture and dirt Main Features Housing Explosion protection in accordance with EN 50 014 and EN 50 020 with T4 classifica tion II 2G EEx ib IIC T4 Spray resistant IP64 Dus...

Page 942: ... fm Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office Technical Specifications Ranges Outdoors up to 300 m Indoors up to 50 m Operating times Standby up to 70 hours Talk time up to 7 hours Dimensions L W D in mm 160 55 25 Weight including battery cells approx 160 g Operating temperature mobile telephone 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F ...

Page 943: ...n window from a system telephone Assistant T by entering the code and password A maximum of 10 login windows can be open at a time Then type the station numbers of the mobile telephones you want to log on 10 11 6 1 Opening the HiPath 3000 Login Window The login window remains open for ten minutes per station The handset must log on during this period refer to Page 10 92 For initial installation of...

Page 944: ... Com ESY Products Step Entry or Key Handset Display 1 Switch on the mobile telephone by holding down the hook key for at least 1 second You hear a confirmation tone The first time you log on the mes sage Register appears on the handset display The second time you log on Base 1 or a similar message flashes 2 Make the following entries within one minute Press the menu key 3 Select a station1 for exa...

Page 945: ...iew Cordless dialog in the Options menu and the station view 10 11 6 4 Replacing Locking and Logging Off a Mobile Telephone If you need to replace a handset for servicing you must change the mobile telephone code PIN of the old handset before logging on the replacement telephone When you replace a mobile telephone the station must be assigned a new mobile telephone code PIN in the HiPath 3000syste...

Page 946: ...Refer to Section 9 2 2 for information on upgrading peripheral boards for HiPath 3750 and Hi Path 3700 Connecting equipment using an optiPoint analog adapter System HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Hardware requirements Free analog port on SLMA 8 Free analog port on SLA8N 16N 24N Free analog port on CBCC CBRC 4 8 16SLA 8SLAR SLA8N 16N 24N Free ana...

Page 947: ...te codes 75 and 76 can be used for the characters and which cannot be used in the ISDN protocol Boards for connecting ISDN terminals Refer to Section 9 2 2 for information on upgrading peripheral boards for HiPath 3750 and Hi Path 3700 Connecting with an optiPoint ISDN adapter It is possible to have a maximum of four Gigaset CX340isdn cordless systems for each S0 bus Because of the call switching ...

Page 948: ...Workpoint Clients P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 10 96 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual wclient fm ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000 ...

Page 949: ...more detailed information please refer to the HiPath Cordless Office service manual 11 1 Overview Chapter contents This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table Topic Introduction page 11 2 System Configuration page 11 3 Technical Data for Base Stations page 11 4 Power Related Capacity Limits page 11 6 Multi SLC and System Wide Networking page 11 10 Planning Notes for Networked H...

Page 950: ...h 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 In this case it is not possible to expand with additional base stations However base stations cannot be simultaneously connected to the SLC16N board and the CBCC within one HiPath 3550 system Connecting cordless boards Base stations can be connected to the UP0 E interfaces of the following cordless boards SLC16N in HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3...

Page 951: ...iPath 3750 HiPath 3700 4 CMS 64 32 32 64 4 8 12 12 250 with 4 SLC16N 1 1 Up to 128 handsets are possible at an SLC16N Yes HiPath 3800 4 CMS 64 32 32 64 4 8 12 12 250 with 4 SLCN 2 2 Up to 128 MTs are possible at an SLCN Yes Explanations BS2 2 S30807 H5471 X200 is a base station that supports a maximum of 8 calls when connected using two UP0 E interfaces BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X is a base station that ...

Page 952: ...tations Parameter BS3 1 and BS3 S BS3 3 BS4 Outdoor cover Power supply voltage range 42 to 54 V 42 to 54 V 42 to 54 V Power consumption max 1 7 W max 3 2 W max 3 0 W Housing dimensions W x D x H in mm 181 x 139 x 69 202 x 172 x 43 200 x 176 x 49 296 x 256 x 90 Weight approx 0 3 kg approx 0 5 kg approx 0 5 kg approx 1 0 kg Temperature range for indoor use 5 to 50 oC for outdoor use 20 to 45 oC Rela...

Page 953: ...on walls of buildings roofs and masts The outdoor cover S30122 X7469 X already available for BS2 2 is also used for the new base stations BS3 1 BS3 S BS3 3 and BS4 The only difference is that you do not need a heater for BS3 1 BS3 S BS3 3 and BS4 For information on the various outdoor cover mounting options refer to the HiPath Cordless Of fice Service Manual Figure 11 2 BS3 1 BS3 S and BS3 3 in th...

Page 954: ... unit provides sufficient power to supply the system configuration specified in Table 11 1 For information on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required see Page 3 62 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 The system s internal power supply unit provides sufficient power to supply the system configuration specified in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Maximum Number of SLA16N and SLMO2...

Page 955: ...er of BS2 2 base stations connected to SLC16N Table 11 7 depending on the number of BS3 3 base stations connected to SLC16N and the number of BS4 base stations connected to SLC16N If extra telephone configurations are added to these an additional power supply by EPSU2 or EPSU2 R is needed Table 11 4 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones De pending on the Number of BS3 1 and B...

Page 956: ...6 61 57 53 48 44 2 63 59 54 50 46 41 3 60 56 52 47 43 39 4 58 53 49 45 40 36 5 55 51 47 42 38 33 6 53 48 44 40 35 31 7 50 46 41 37 33 28 8 47 43 39 34 30 26 9 45 40 36 32 27 23 10 42 38 33 29 25 20 11 40 35 31 27 22 18 12 37 33 28 24 20 15 13 34 30 26 21 17 13 14 32 27 23 19 14 10 15 29 25 20 16 12 7 16 27 22 18 13 9 5 Table 11 6 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Num...

Page 957: ...Number of BS3 3s and BS4s connected via 2xUP0 E to SLC16N Maximum number of corded telephones analog telephones 0 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 41 50 optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones 1 64 60 56 51 47 42 2 60 56 52 47 43 39 3 57 52 48 43 39 35 4 53 48 44 40 35 31 5 49 44 40 36 31 27 6 45 40 36 32 27 23 7 41 37 32 28 23 19 8 37 33 28 24 20 15 When using an additional power supply such as EPSU2 or EPS...

Page 958: ... extension connection to support full mobility see Figure 11 3 This function can be used not only within one system but also among systems among nodes because the CorNet NQ used for networking supports the UUS protocol note for the system wide extension connections you may have to take additional B channels into consideration for the permanent connection paths CorNet NQ see Section 11 7 That means...

Page 959: ...s nodes call interruption when changing between systems nodes Figure 11 3 Example of a Cordless Extension Connection in Networked Systems BS SLC16N BS CorNet NQ Home SLC16N SLC16N no 1 Station no 124 Current location SLC16N SLC16N no 11 Station no 128 HiPath 3750 Node ID 1 HiPath 3550 Node ID 2 Extension connection BS SLC16N BS SLC16N no 2 Station no 141 BS SLC16B BS BS BS2 2 BS3 1 or BS3 3 A CorN...

Page 960: ...system If the radio areas of systems with identical DECT IDs overlap mobile telephones inadvertently try to perform network wide handover which results in communication breakdown If networking is required for systems in which the individual radio fields overlap for example to increase capacity limits or through decentralized installation different DECT IDs must be con figured in the individual sys...

Page 961: ...isadvan tage network wide roaming not possible Scenario 3 Correct DECT Configuration when Networking HiPath 3000 Systems No incorrect handover despite identical DECT IDs as the radio areas do not overlap Network wide roaming possible Figure 11 5 Correct DECT Configuration when Networking HiPath 3000 Systems Figure 11 6 Correct DECT Configuration when Networking HiPath 3000 Systems PSTN Networking ...

Page 962: ... Cordless Office P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 11 14 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual cordless fm Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network Wide Roaming ...

Page 963: ...ge 12 3 Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data page 12 8 Relocate Transfer Application Processor Software APS page 12 11 Upgrading HiPath 3000 page 12 17 Determining System Information and Installed Software Components HiPath Inventory Manager page 12 18 Backing Up System Components Backup Manager page 12 19 HiPath User Management not yet released page 12 21 Guided Maintenance page 12 23 Dia...

Page 964: ... HiPath 5000 Connection Options page 12 74 Remote System Administration page 12 74 Remote Correction of System Software APS page 12 75 Remote Error Signaling page 12 76 Controlled Release of a Remote Connection page 12 77 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP page 12 77 Security Features page 12 79 Access Security page 12 79 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures page 12 86 Topic ...

Page 965: ...2 2 1 1 1 Automatic Customer Data Backup HiPath 3000 A two stage concept guarantees automatic customer data backup A complete CDB backup version can be found on the MMC at any time Deltas for this backup are stored in an SRAM area with battery backup in the central control board If the SRAM area is full the customer data is automatically backed up This means that the entire CDB including SRAM cont...

Page 966: ...harge data status data The directory in which the two PDS files are to be stored must be defined when the HiPath 5000 software is installed setup The two PDS files are created when the HiPath 5000 is started for the first time The PDS files must not be modified as reading of the files using conventional tools and interpretation of the content is not possible without specialist knowledge In the eve...

Page 967: ...arts it should be ended because the back up continues to run in the background You can also manually initiate a CDB restore including the call detail data from the MMC Procedure Manual CDB backup system restore using Assistant T Step Activity Manual customer data backup on the MMC 1 Assistant T Start system administration 2 Menu 28 Edit CDB 3 Menu 28 2 Back up CDB data 4 Menu 28 2 1 CDB on MMC Loa...

Page 968: ...2 1 3 CDB Treatment When Replacing Central HiPath 3000 Hardware When replacing a central control board due to a hardware defect for example the following op tions are available for handling the CDB Procedure After replacing the board load the current CDB to the system A new license file is always required if a central control board that requires a license has to be replaced As a result of the repl...

Page 969: ...m the power supply 3 Remove the MMC 4 Replace the central control board 5 Insert the MMC 6 Restart the system by plugging in the power plug 7 Reload 8 If an older CDB update is imported reload the CDB into the system with out the Delta mode The hardware and CDR switch remain inactive 9 Reset The customer system is now configured All you have to do now is log on the CMI mobile telephones again rese...

Page 970: ...nd HiPath 3300 disconnect the system from the power supply before removing or inserting boards Only HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 peripheral boards can be removed or inserted during operation Table 12 1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards If Then Inserting new board in free slot Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial startup Page 4 156 System w...

Page 971: ...ard type The system does not automatically activate the board After removing the old board you can delete it from the database using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T After you have inserted the new board the system activates it as if it had been inserted into a free slot However the CDB area used by the old board is left as a gap In the case of subscriber line modules you can use HiPath 3000 M...

Page 972: ...f the previous model is retained Add on devices that are not plugged in retain their technical features With the HiPath 3000 Manager E you can delete the add on devices that are not plugged in and remove the keys that are no longer available Step Activity 1 Disconnect system from power supply 2 Remove the board s 3 Restart the system by plugging in the power plug 4 Delete board slot using user int...

Page 973: ...as low as possible part of an APS is stored in a compressed format The APS is decompressed after it has been transferred from the MMC to the SDRAM area of the central control board 12 2 3 1 1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC Procedure APS replacement transfer is not possible with HiPath 5000 You must perform a complete software upgrade APS replacement is only possible within...

Page 974: ...er the transfer the checksum is analyzed The system subsequently reports whether or not an error was found If so you have to delete the transferred APS the APS transfer was successful You can then activate the APS immediately or at a later time Resetting the system initiates the changeover from the old APS to the new APS If problems occur during this process the old APS is reactivated Once the cha...

Page 975: ...s and boots up Step Activity 1 Save the existing customer data for example as customer1 kds 2 Select Open CDB from the HiPath 3000 Manager E file menu and highlight APS files fst Open the fst file using the new system software 3 Double click the Transfer icon Select the appropriate access and enter the PIN code 4 Highlight APS Transfer A new window appears in the top right of the screen You can us...

Page 976: ...d Maintenance Tasks After a successful changeover to the new APS an entry in the error memory is also made and the old APS on the MMC is deactivated This does not impede switching traffic The deactivated area is now available for a new APS transfer The positive or negative entry in the error memory is sent to the service center ...

Page 977: ...pgrade may also include modifications to hardware as well as error cor rections A software upgrade changes the name of the version for example from V1 0 to V2 0 A CDB conversion may be necessary HE620S 10 123 Production number software binder Feature package Note Service Maintenance Releases SMR are identified by production num ber and feature package System up to and including V4 0 S HiPath 3750 ...

Page 978: ...ch from the current software version to the new software version must take place The current soft ware is replaced by the software in the shadow area and thus deleted The changeover can either be started immediately once the software has been loaded or performed at a predefined time Information about updating the system software and the HG 1500 software using HiPath Soft ware Manager can be obtain...

Page 979: ...620 09 05 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual 12 17 Service Service and Maintenance Tasks 12 2 4 Upgrading HiPath 3000 For information on upgrade procedures please see Section 9 3 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V6 0 ...

Page 980: ...g the HiPath 3000 systems in the network and the installed HG 1500 boards HiPath Applications Information regarding the following software components MS Windows components MS Internet Explorer DNS server DHCP server Media Streaming TAPI CCMC CCMS CMD CSP Administration HiPath 5000 Server GetAccount HiPath 3000 Manager E Common Software Operating System Information regarding the current operating s...

Page 981: ... all dis played HiPath 3000 systems Database backup With this menu item all databases Feature Server SQL Server are displayed in an over view It is possible to back up the data of one or of all database s Refer to the help provided with the HiPath Software Manager for information on backup with this tool Setting options It is possible to specify individually when a backup is to take place and wher...

Page 982: ...e of backup are preset for the HiPath Software Manager during setup Restoring data The HiPath Software Manager allows damaged databases to be restored with the database backup The other system components are restored using HiPath 3000 Manager E for HiPath 3000 and HiPath 3000 Manager I for HG 1500 up to and including V2 0 or Web based management WBM for HG 1500 V3 0 or later ...

Page 983: ...h systems and the central system are con nected via an IP network It is not possible to integrate HiPath 5000 PCs with HiPath ComScen do Service System clients IP workpoint clients such as optiPoint 410 not optiPoint 410 en try optiPoint 420 and optiClient 130 V5 0 are supported For further information on the Small Remote Site concept refer to the HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 Feature Description HiPath 3...

Page 984: ...ment without taking further steps The IP workpoint clients in the Small Remote Sites branches should use different call numbers in normal mode registered with HiPath 4000 and in emergency mode regis tered with HiPath 3000 In this case the call numbers are assigned via HiPath 3000 Manager E when configuring the IP workpoint clients system clients An IP workpoint client configured in this way can th...

Page 985: ...u can call up the following options using the HiPath 3000 Manager E CMA CMS LIM IMODN Table 12 2 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun On System boot Off for 0 1 s Load operation APS in SDRAM loadware and card data Flashing 0 5 s on 0 5 s o...

Page 986: ...boards Display is limited to the following statuses per board Board not inserted Board defective not loaded Board disabled Board enabled active Board busy at least one station or line from this board is disconnected is being called or is busy Table 12 3 Power Supply Status Displays Board Status Display HiPath 3800 LUNA2 The LED displays the operating status on or off HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 UPSM T...

Page 987: ...f one board at a time You can also update the status display by pressing a key You cannot perform additional activities with the HiPath 3000 Manager E and Assistant T while viewing the status of a board HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 LEDs on peripheral boards All peripheral boards are equipped with LEDs for displaying the status of a board or port Infor mation on the meaning of the individual LED sta...

Page 988: ...ocked When attempting to lock out the last active trunk you are subsequently notified that remote ser vice through the service center is no longer possible 12 3 1 2 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status HiPath 3000 records the current status of each individual trunk in a table If the status changes the new status along with the time stamp is entered You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to view the trunk...

Page 989: ...tion Language Menu language of selected station Connection status Inactive The telephone is idle Busy The telephone is off the hook but not yet di aled Waiting The telephone call is in the queue Connected The telephone is connected to a second telephone with a trunk or a hunt group member Holding The telephone is on hold Error The connection cannot be established due to an error for example invali...

Page 990: ...refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help V 24 Monitoring The number of sent received bytes within a selected time period can be recorded and then displayed saved using a text editor default MS WordPad The failure and restart of a V 24 interface generates an entry in the eventlog and releases a remote error signal V 24 failure Check printer error message V 24 restart Withdrawal of error message Acti...

Page 991: ... into a readable format English only You can also read out the trace data using remote service The ISDN Message Decoder is a 32 bit application which converts ISDN layer 3 messages and information elements into a readable format Since you cannot find out from the trace file wheth er it deals with an information element from a Euro ISDN or a QSig configuration you have to select the protocol You ma...

Page 992: ...le txt provides details on which HG 1500 boards have logged on to the network and when winnt system32 rgtracefile txt provides details on when the individual HG 1500 boards were assigned a station num ber Presence Manager Two trace files are available winnt system32 dssdiagnosefile txt winnt system32 dsslogfile txt HiPath Manager PCM Administration Administration of the configuration parameters fo...

Page 993: ...ager PCM program group was created when installing the HiPath Manager PCM server Administration and the trace monitor were integrated here To start the Trace Monitor select Start Programs HiPath HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor for HiPath Applications The Trace Monitor can be closed with Exit in the File menu with the key combination H D or with the Trace Monitor system menu Figure 12 1 Trace Moni...

Page 994: ...enance 12 3 1 6 3 The Screen Layout of the Trace Monitor When you start the Trace Monitor an application window with the following layout appears Figure 12 2 The Screen Layout of the Trace Monitor Trace window sys tem menu Title bar Menu bar Workspace open trace win dows Trace Monitor sys tem menu Minimize Maximize Exit Status bar ...

Page 995: ...ext Toggles between color option active and black and white display option not active for trace messages Add Date Timestamp Inserts a timestamp in each new trace message when the option is active Show Window for new Appli cation If this option is active one of the applications that writes trace messages is immediately displayed in a separate trace window when it is activated If the option is not a...

Page 996: ... Print trace window content You also have an option that allows you to output the current status of a trace window to the configured Trace Monitor printer for documentation purposes For this select the Print Mes sages entry via the System menu or alternatively the Context menu right click in the Trace window of the relevant Trace window The current contents of the trace window are then sent to the...

Page 997: ... the status bar For this select the Arrange Icons entry in the menu window 12 3 1 6 5 Exporting Trace Windows Each trace window has a capacity of 1 000 for the Server PC under Windows 95 98 or 5 000 entries for the Server PC under Windows NT or Windows 2000 When this capacity is reached the oldest entry is deleted from the trace window for each new entry To document a current situation from a trac...

Page 998: ...r directory C Documents and Settings Windows User My Documents Application ID Trace File Name The following naming conventions apply to swap files Application ID Time trc The time is stored in YYYYMMDDhhmm format Example of a file name for a swapped out trace file Windows User Meier Application GetAccount Exported on 06 09 2004 at 16 57 C Documents and Settings Meier My Documents WACLIENT WACLIENT...

Page 999: ...oint 420 S telephones This test checks the display your number is displayed LEDs and ring tones The tests ends automatically after a period of time The test allows you to perform a visual and acoustic check of the components to ensure that they are functioning properly Test procedure on the system telephone The phone number date and time are normally shown in the display If a different text appear...

Page 1000: ...d The events pro vide a quick and above all time specific overview of all relevant actions status information warning error etc The tool itself handles the event entries You can specify the length of the event file the validity of events in days the reaction when the maximum size has been reached and the display filter for example You can save the resulting event file log file under any name Start...

Page 1001: ...play only the entries for the HiPath 5000 server You can further restrict the output under Category and Event ID Evaluating events Double click an entry in an Event Viewer area to obtain more precise information on an event Use the two arrow buttons to spring from one event to the next The HiPath 5000 Server entries in Table 12 8 are currently supported Saving the event file log file If problems o...

Page 1002: ...hecked via the State Viewer This can be invoked via Start Program Files HiPath HiPath 5000 State Viewer The example in Figure 12 3 illustrates the correct operation of a HiPath ComScendo service For the server itself Running and all services the status indicators are green Menu bar Program Exit Closes the HiPath 5000 State Viewer Server Start Starts the HiPath 5000 server Stop Stops the HiPath 500...

Page 1003: ... distribute the threads of the Feature Pro cessing FP and LAN Device Handler LDH services may be distributed over different processors Network card In the case of a PC with more than one network card defines which card is used for HiPath 5000 may only be changed if the HiPath 5000 server becomes con gested About Version information Shows the version of the installed modules dll exe About HiPath 50...

Page 1004: ...fault in other words if one or more status indicators are red proceed as fol lows 1 Check the status of the services Select Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management All services must be started here as shown in Figure 12 4 for example If this is not the case invoke log txt Administrator rights are required for the following measures Figure 12 4 HiPath 5000 Services ...

Page 1005: ...State Viewer has no connection to the HiPath 5000 server the Siemens Service Monitor Service should be restarted To do this click the Start Server button see Figure 12 3 If this does not work either the HiPath ComScendo Service software must be uninstalled and then reinstalled using the instructions set out in Section 6 6 4 If problems arise during operation crashes incorrect telephone responses e...

Page 1006: ...aphic map of the network displays the topology and the current status of the network com ponents For detailed information refer to the product specific documentation for HiPath Fault Manage ment SNMP functions Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP represents a convenient platform within the TCP IP protocol family for management tasks in the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 software SNMP is used more ...

Page 1007: ...m number of trace entries per trace file TraceLevel 4 TraceLevel This value 1 8 defines the degree of detail 1 Low important events only 4 Stan dard including external interfaces 8 All 12 3 1 12 2 Analysis Using Customer License Agent CLA The CLA offers two analysis options Log files The Customer License Agent CLA manages a configuration log and error log Both logs are viewed using the CLM This pr...

Page 1008: ...indows 2000 this directory normally has the name C WINNT temp while under MS Windows 2003 it is called C WINDOWS temp Each time a Web application is started by the Common Web Service TomCat Web server a separate subdirectory is created This subdirectory contains the trace files in XML format The subdirectory name follows the convention date_ DATE _time_ TIME In order to enable service support to p...

Page 1009: ...d in the temporary directory of the system see above swmreport xml contains the information generated during an update of the system in formation by the HiPath Software Manager invdataos xml contains the data for the operating system for the last update invdatasnmp xml contains the data for the HiPath 3000 5000 network from the last update invdataapps xml contains the data for the applications fro...

Page 1010: ...e maximum possible num ber of optiPoint key modules specified in Table 10 5 Error Class B Service related errors HiPath 3000 Manager E signals Class B errors which can be automatically forwarded to a service center Errors of this class are for example failure of the boards individual ports or trunks You can generally correct these errors by replacing the hardware re configuring the customer databa...

Page 1011: ...pli cation firewall 18 Overflow in the MMC log area log file Read out log file 19 Sensor alarm Fan failure 19 housing for HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 Check to see if the fan has broken down and or if the ventilation openings in the housing are unblocked 20 Overflow in the CDR buffer CDR informa tion Check interfaces V 24 LAN 21 Error when identifying name and au thenticating password from HiPath 3000 ...

Page 1012: ...line 37 Data slip S0 Error corrected 38 Alarm display S2M Error Check line 39 Alarm display S2M Error corrected 42 No signal S2M Error Check line 43 No signal S2M Error corrected 44 Receiver remote alarm S2M Error Check line 45 Receiver remote alarm S2M Error correct ed 48 Bit rate error S2M Error Check line 49 Bit rate error S2M Error corrected 50 Loss of synchronization S2M Error Check line 51 L...

Page 1013: ...d not permitted Hard restart 5 Interrupt division by zero Hard restart 6 Invalid opcode exception Hard restart 7 TRAP C or TRAP V instruction Hard restart 8 Security violation Hard restart 9 Trace Hard restart 10 Line 1010 emulator Hard restart 11 Line 1111 emulator Hard restart 12 HW breakpoint CBFC possible EXTEB error Hard restart 13 Co processor security violation Hard restart 14 Formatting er...

Page 1014: ...during APS trans fer Transfer APS again Error Class B 16 General Errors 1 Error in pool administration rel_pool_ele Hard restart Notify appropriate service support 2 Error in pool administration get_trans_store Hard restart 3 Error in pool administration get_trans_store Hard restart 4 Error during COSMOS send call Hard restart 5 Error during COSMOS timer call Hard restart 6 Error during COSMOS rec...

Page 1015: ...nsing is OK 14 HiPath License Management Grace peri od was stopped System in licensing de fault Perform licensing 15 HiPath License Management MAC ID er ror Check the MAC address 16 HiPath License Management 30 day pe riod until licensing of the specified feature expires was started Renew licensing 17 HiPath License Management Licensing of the specified feature expired Renew licensing 18 HiPath Li...

Page 1016: ...dy DSR 13 All routes allocated Hard restart Notify appropriate service support Error Class B 21 Device Handler 0 No dial tone detected Use headset to check dial tone If there is no dial tone re place board 1 Dial tone detected 7 Reference clock on 8 Reference clock off 11 Fan alarm 19 housing for HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 Error Check to see if the fan has broken down and or if the ventilation openin...

Page 1017: ...ice support Error Class B 26 Presence 0 Unknown card type Replace board 1 Board out of order Reload board 2 Maximum number of peripheral boards exceeded Reduce peripheral boards to maximum number 3 Board type not compatible slot is already pre assigned with a different board model Replace board 4 Board is activated Error Class B 28 Recovery 0 COSMOS error Data transmission not possible Hard restar...

Page 1018: ...MC Error Class B 41 LAN 4 Send Ethernet driver not ready For errors that appear sporadically no action is necessary For errors that appear reg ularly replace the LIM module If this does not correct the error check the LAN configuration 8 Send More than 15 futile attempts 9 Send Delayed collision detection 10 Send Carrier loss 11 Receive Frame error 12 Receive FIFO error 13 Receive Checksum error 1...

Page 1019: ...f the Feature Server Table 12 8 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 Server Event De fault trap Error text Meaning User reaction Cate gory Source 1000 X Notdefined Unidentified logical TFTP er ror in HiPath 3000 5000 adm HiPath AllServ e 1010 X Socket er ror General socket error Save event fileforerror analysis Shut down and re start server If error is still present restart the PC adm HiPath A...

Page 1020: ...vent fileforerror analysis Connection error HiPath 3000 5000 HIP problems Check if ping is working If ping is working wait 5 mins and re start server If ping is not work ing properly check if the Ping unsuc cessful error mes sage appears in the Event Viewer adm HiPath AllServ e 1017 X Error while sending to IP Adr Logical error when sending data to HiPath 3000 5000 Save event fileforerror analysis...

Page 1021: ...cessful error mes sage appears in the Event Viewer adm HiPath AllServ e 1020 Receive successful CDB page frame success ful read Information adm HiPath AllServ e 1021 Send suc cessful CDB page frame success ful write Event Properties con tains the corre sponding page frame ID Information fct adm HiPath AllServ e 1022 Connect successful Positive ack from FCT con nection with Hi Path 3000 5000 succes...

Page 1022: ... CDB trans fer suc cessful write All frame pages successfully written from the server to all Hi Path 3000 5000 nodes Information vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1027 CallAd dressTable and No deIpTable transfer successful Successful transfer of call address table and node IP ta ble to the sys tem by the serv er Information car HiPath AllServ e 1028 X Venus da tabase closed Venusdatabase closed Information vs...

Page 1023: ... with speci fied IP address failed Save event fileforerror analysis Check HiPath 3000 5000 Check HG 1500 Check LAN Initiate HiPath 3000 5000 ping if necessary Load HiPath 3000 Manager E data to the server again This initiates data transfer from the server to HiPath 3000 5000 vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1033 Data sync tile Modification to database in Hi Path 3000 5000 reported to the server HiPath 3000 5...

Page 1024: ...xzzzzzzz 0x80070057 this is just inter nal information for Develop ment otherwise error Save event fileforerror analysis If an error message appears RgTrace File txt and Carlog File must be saved reg HiPath AllServ e 1038 User inter face active on IP Adr The user inter face is active during a sync Trials are not cancelled and are cyclically re peated until successful Information sync HiPath AllSer...

Page 1025: ...lServ e 1041 No re sources in system 1 API cannot open FCT as there is another API session ac tive e g user interface fct HiPath AllServ e 1042 Regs mes sage IP Adr vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1043 Car update node IP ta ble entry IP Adr Database gen erates the node IP table per CDB for the car server Information vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1045 X Feature Server Service Started Version HVxxxB yy nnn The Featur...

Page 1026: ... REGserver received a reg istrationrequest from HG 1500 Information reg HiPath AllServ e 10000 Wrong re quest ID Wrong UDP packet se quence asyn chronism Check LAN fct HiPath AllServ e 10001 Unknown packet Unknown Hi Path 3000 5000 IP packet Information fct HiPath AllServ e 10002 X Socket re ceive TCP socket er ror Save event fileforerror analysis Possible interrupt ed connection fct HiPath AllSer...

Page 1027: ...ce Descrip tion s e Er ror char e D escrip tion Error when sav ing a recalculat ed call data record GetAc count 515 X Error init HKLM reg istry Stop service GetAc count Error when reading start parameters from the HK lo cal machine registry GetAc count 515 X Error init registry HKCUStop service GetAc count Error when reading start parameters from the HK Current user registry GetAc count Table 12 8...

Page 1028: ...n sav ing a record for immediate print out GetAc count 515 X No CDR line found TSP does not provide any CDR lines GetAc count 515 X Error TAPI Init Error when ini tializing the TAPI interface GetAc count 515 X TapiFunc s ID d Error s szTapi Func lLi neID szEr rorMess Error when call ing a TAPI func tion for a partic ular line GetAc count 515 X TapiFunc s Error s sz TapiFunc szEr rorMess Error when...

Page 1029: ...nd ing com mand starting CDR Ser vice to PBX d Error when sending the start CDR ser vice command GetAc count 514 X CDR Ser vice in PBX d by TSP al ready start ed TSP has al ready started the CDR ser vice GetAc count 515 X Error start ing CDR service on PBX d dwParam2 0x x Undefined error when starting the CDR ser vice GetAc count 515 X Error send ing com mand stop CDR Ser vice Error when sending t...

Page 1030: ...r vice GetAc count 513 X TAPI Reinit TAPI was reini tialized GetAc count 515 X Start ser vice error Database connect er ror Error when opening the da tabase connec tion PCM 515 X Start ser vice error Misc data base error Error when reading out the values saved in the database PCM 515 X LineInitial ize s TapiEr rorMess Error during TAPI LineDevic es initialization PCM 515 X PhoneIni tialize s TapiE...

Page 1031: ...PCM 515 X The PCM Conn clsP CMConn connection object could not be estab lished Error creating object when starting the ser vice PCM 515 X The PCM service was can celled be cause of unrecover able error during ini tialization Service cancel lation due to an unrecoverable error during ini tialization PCM Table 12 8 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 Server Event De fault trap Error text Meanin...

Page 1032: ...12 4 2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E Manually activating a restart reset reload Pressing the reset button on the central control board of HiPath 3000 initiates a Reset hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB if the button is pressed for less than 5 seconds The RUN LED lights up when the Reset button is pressed initiates a Reload if the button is pressed longe...

Page 1033: ...system with the current CDB Initiating Reload Card This the single board loading Loadware to reload Locking out and releasing boards and ports HiPath 3000 Manager E enables you to lock out an entire subscriber line module or line circuit module and individual ports The lockout prevents renewed seizure after the current connection has finished Release or lockout settings are also retained after a r...

Page 1034: ...ng of error messages Remote service facilitates the administration and maintenance of various communication sys tems from a central location The connection to HiPath 3000 can be set up via the integrated digital modem B channel the integrated analog modem IMODN or the HG 1500 Special software programs such as pcANYWHERE facilitate connections to HiPath 5000 If the customer agrees Remote Access Ser...

Page 1035: ...criber lines Data transmission is supported according to Protocol X 75 The digital modem is treated as a pseudo port It receives a number in the system that can be reached internally and through direct internal dialing You can cancel the DID number manually to prevent external access Baud rate settings For information about setting the baud rate for different connection types between HiPath 3000 a...

Page 1036: ...ignaling Any one of these options establishes a connection using the integrated digital modem B chan nel or the integrated analog modem IMODN Callback HiPath 3000 can manage up to six different callback indices callback passwords and their rel evant callback numbers in which case the first callback connection is also the destination of the automatic error signaling For each callback connection you...

Page 1037: ...minutes though you can end it manually at any time Procedure Activate the feature Remote access immediately after installation Automatic error signaling Class B errors can be automatically transferred to a service center For more information on this see Section 12 5 5 12 5 3 2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 This feature facilitates remote system administration by transmitting DTMF signa...

Page 1038: ...r reports 7 Caution In case of a power outage the not battery buffered SDRAM content of the MMC is completely lost Any individual settings made for the time parameter error signaling interval are also reset to the default value 15 minutes When the system is restarted the automatic recovery action reload CDB backup starts and the customer individual settings are reloaded Because this process lasts ...

Page 1039: ...e options 12 5 7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP You can establish a connection between the system Plus product and the service center using either the integrated digital modem B channel or the integrated analog modem IMODN Data is exchanged in both cases using Point to Point Protocols PPP For further information see Features via LAN in the HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description 12 5 7 1 ...

Page 1040: ...Provisional Service Manual service fm Remote Service 12 5 7 3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP Plus products and the HiPath 3000 can transmit error messages SNMP traps to the service center For further information see SNMP Functionality in the HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Descrip tion ...

Page 1041: ...lization you can select between the fol lowing security options variable password default fixed password concept Example of first time login with Assistant T Step Entry Description 1 95 Start system administration 2 31994 Default user name 3 31994 Default password Alphanumeric characters can be used with optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 of fice telephones only Therefore when changing the user na...

Page 1042: ...th System Maintenance authorization Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T additional users and their pass words can be configured in the user administration If a user forgets a password it has to be deleted and re configured by a different authorized user If all authorized users forget their passwords the system must be regenerated Fixed password concept When using a fixed password only fixed...

Page 1043: ...lization in a system with a variable password the previously created user names and passwords remain intact as long as you do not subsequently change the pass word type If a CDB is read from a system in which the default user names and passwords were changed this CDB cannot be loaded into a HiPath 3000 system that was changed to a fixed password type Before reading this CDB you have to set up a us...

Page 1044: ...log files Reader rights to system data error memory for example not including confidential cus tomer information X X2 2 As long as no user is assigned to the Audit user group 3 Access rights to all system data not including development access rights as long as no us ers are assigned to other user groups X 4 Access rights to confidential customer infor mation Executing customer actions printing out...

Page 1045: ...r C office office Development 1 Assessing and archiving backup related log files Reader rights to system data error memory for exam ple not including confidential customer information X X 2 Access rights to all system data not including develop ment access rights X X 3 Access rights to confidential customer information Executing customer actions printing out certain lists for example X X X 4 Acces...

Page 1046: ...odem B channel or the integrated analog modem However the user is required to establish a 5 digit access code beforehand HiPath 3000 Manager E remote callback connection Log on by entering your user name and password The system can be accessed using the integrated digital modem B channel or the inte grated analog modem However you have to set up a callback index beforehand HiPath Software Manager ...

Page 1047: ...the customer database offline you are requested to enter your user name and password The data that you enter is compared to the data in the user table In this case the user group verified during this process also determines the access rights When loading an offline customer database into HiPath 3000 the user table that goes with it should not be loaded into the system Otherwise the system specific...

Page 1048: ...mand entry 12 6 2 1 1 Format Identification and Command Entry The following format information is logged Assistant T 1 All activities are logged regardless of system access The respective code with the most important parameters is recorded as the command entry station number for example Assistant TC 2 Same as Assistant T 1 Session Information 3 The system access is logged regardless of whether it ...

Page 1049: ...o Assistant T format 7 The HiPath 3000 Manager E records the offline changes of a CDB as a simulated Assis tant T command For data areas subject to change by HiPath 3000 Manager E pseudo areas are generated When loading an offline CDB into the system the following simulated commands are logged as command entries C1 Pseudo area System parameter C1 1 System fags CMI C1 2 System intercept AC C1 3 Ton...

Page 1050: ... HiPath 3000 Manager E online 8 Archives from the log file and the user administration are logged Possible command en tries are D1 1 Archive D2 1 New user D2 2 Delete user D3 1 Change password Logging External Accesses Solutions Applications Plus products used with AMHOST can only make limited changes Because these changes automatically run simultaneously Check In and Check Out for hotel solu tion...

Page 1051: ... you have logged on as a user with Revisor rights Archive If you request an archive storage the system checks whether or not there is already an ar chive file file extension arc If it is a file with log data from a previous archive the file must match the current customer In case of a positive result the system log entries are retrieved and attached to the existing data in the archive file At the ...

Page 1052: ...nd rewritten them to the system The Customer pnkm user in A Administration user group has changed two additional station names The Revisor has retrieved the most recent log entries and printed them out 1050 00 11 25 15 57 10 rev R 6 D1 1 Archive 1051 00 11 25 15 58 22 rev R 3 A0 2 Logout procedure 1052 00 11 26 09 20 15 serv S 3 A0 1 Login procedure 1053 00 11 26 09 21 35 serv S 4 A1 1 Database re...

Page 1053: ...erview Chapter contents This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table Topic IP Network Requirements page 13 2 General Introduction page 13 2 H 323 Protocol page 13 2 Standards Supported page 13 3 QoS Quality of Service page 13 4 Network analysis page 13 6 This section provides introductory information only and does not replace IP training ...

Page 1054: ...SMTP and WWW RTP Real Time Protocol is used for voice transmission The term Voice over IP VoIP indi cates that the IP protocol is used to transport voice information There are nowadays various protocols that result from the efforts of diverse standardization bodies and standardization drives 13 2 2 H 323 Protocol H 323 encompasses the following subjects Signaling H 245 etc Video transmission Voice...

Page 1055: ...ithout VLAN PPP Frame Relay Protocols with without compression RTP UDP IP Security VPN tunnel Redundancy For example T 38 Packaging the number of samples that are transported per package Notes G 711 ITU standard for voice codecs 64 Kbps ISDN voice quality G 722 High quality voice co dec 48 56 or 64 Kbps Better voice quality than G 711 G 723 1 ITU standard for voice codecs 5 3 or 6 3 Kbps Adequate ...

Page 1056: ...ble transmission link bandwidth for example an ISDN B channel 64K bps is shared between these applications Consequently packet loss may occur during a voice connection causing poor voice quality HiPath 3000 5000 QoS In HiPath 3000 5000 networks different types of traffic are transported via a single IP infra structure It is the aim of Quality of Service to fulfill the data traffic and voice traffi...

Page 1057: ... in the HG 1500 Adminis tration Manual Table 13 2 Possible QoS Settings Traffic type DiffServ Code Point 802 1p field Priority 0 lowest 7 highest Traffic class Voice payload RTP RTCP AF12 001100 6 Guaranteed service Data payload fax gateway AF11 001010 6 Guaranteed service Signaling H 225 H 245 and real time application signaling AF21 010010 5 Controlled Load All other traffic types DE 000000 0 Be...

Page 1058: ... VoIP Determination of current traffic volume and percentage utilization baselining Decision making assistance for the introduction of VoIP solutions Network analysis performance specification Examination of the suitability of customer networks for Siemens AG Voice over IP solu tions Recording of relevant parameters over a predefined test time Assessment on the basis of product specifications Inte...

Page 1059: ...code to go directly to the desired menu segment Menu selection using codes Depending on the menu you enter either single digit or multi digit codes You can use on the numeric keypad to change the item and to invoke the configuration option Accessing system administration Users can access system administration by entering a user name ID and password authen tication Depending on the active password ...

Page 1060: ...ount codes 14 Set up station 15 CO call privileges 16 Incoming calls 17 Networking 18 Traffic restriction 19 Displays 20 ISDN parameters 21 Analog CO interface 22 System settings 23 Code 24 Door relay 25 Announcement Music 26 Relays 27 Sensors HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 only 28 Edit CDB 29 System details 30 Remote service 31 Call distribution 32 Paging 33 Attendant 34 DISA 35 ...

Page 1061: ...es 11 3 3 Incoming calls 0 no 1 yes 11 3 4 Call duration 0 no 1 yes 11 3 5 Output MSN 0 no 1 yes 11 3 6 Call charge display 1 Amount 2 Pulses 11 3 7 Outgoing without connection 0 no 1 yes 11 4 Call charge factor Enter 0 to 10000 11 5 ISDN factor Enter 0 to 10000 11 6 Currency alphanumeric entry of max 3 characters not for U S 11 7 Call log 0 no 1 yes 11 8 CDRA call detail recording attendant pay p...

Page 1062: ...r Machine 14 11 5 External MOH 14 11 6 P O T MW LED 14 11 7 PhoneMail 6 digits 14 11 8 Door station with pulsed loop 14 11 9 Memo 14 11 10 Modem 14 12 Station name alphanumeric entry of up to 16 characters optiset E mem ory and optiPoint 600 office only 14 13 Override 0 denied 1 allowed 14 14 Associated Dialing 0 denied 1 allowed 14 15 DISA 0 denied 1 allowed 14 16 Call waiting rejection 0 off 1 o...

Page 1063: ...l Service Manual A 5 System Programming Codes Expert Mode Codes 14 20 Override do not disturb 0 no 1 yes 14 21 Missed Calls List 0 no 1 yes 14 22 MCID 0 denied 1 allowed 14 23 Call FWD external 0 denied 1 allowed 14 25 Data compression 0 no 1 yes Table A 3 Expert Mode Codes Code Function ...

Page 1064: ... Norwegian 24 Turkish 25 Telekom German 26 Polish 27 Hungarian 28 Russian 29 Greek 30 Slovenian 31 Serbo Croatian 32 Estonian 33 Latvian 34 Lithuanian 35 Chinese 36 Slovakian 37 Catalonian 38 German 2 39 English 2 40 Romanian 41 Bulgarian 42 Macedonian 43 Serbian cyr 44 Serbian lat 14 27 Do not Disturb 0 off 1 on 14 28 Telephone lock intercept 0 no 1 yes 14 29 Dialing method 1 DTMF 2 DP 14 30 opti...

Page 1065: ...nter new data 0 No trunk access except by system speed dialing 1 Incoming only 2 7 Allowed list Allowed list 1 6 8 13 Denied list Denied list 1 6 14 Full access 15 2 Direct trunk access night specify reference station Enter new data 0 No trunk access except by system speed dialing 1 Incoming only 2 7 Allowed list Allowed list 1 6 8 13 Denied list Denied list 1 6 14 Full access 15 3 Allowed lists 1...

Page 1066: ...t 1 En bloc sending 15 8 Switched trunk authorization 15 9 Toll restriction private 16 Incoming calls 16 10 Internal station numbers 16 10 1 Station 16 10 1 1 Boards 16 10 1 2 Change station number 16 10 1 3 Find station number 16 10 2 Groups 16 11 DID numbers internal station number is displayed enter new station number 16 12 Intercept position day enter new destination group or Stn no max 6 digi...

Page 1067: ... stations that are not the host master telephone in another group 16 16 Call allocation day select slot trunk and assign station no 16 17 Call allocation night select slot trunk and assign station no 16 18 Call forwarding no answer 16 18 1 Select call destination list and destination index 1 4 Call destination lists up to and including V1 2 70 V3 0 or later 500 for HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 376 for ...

Page 1068: ...ll other systems 16 18 5 Number of rings 1 to 15 for station group 16 18 6 Night bell location for station group 16 18 7 Night bell mode 1 Immediate connect 2 After timeout 16 18 8 Call forwarding CF on busy 0 Do not forward call 1 Forward call 16 19 Ring cadence 0 Ring type 1 1 Ring type 2 2 Ring type 3 16 20 DTMF DID 0 denied 1 allowed 16 21 Ringback protection Brazil 0 off 1 on 17 Networking 17...

Page 1069: ...ons 0 no 1 yes 17 23 2 Station number destination system 17 23 3 System number destination system 17 24 Station number type 1 Internal 2 DID 3 Internal DID 18 Traffic restriction 18 1 Configure exec sec groups select group enter 1 Exec 1 2 Exec 2 3 Sec 1 4 Sec 2 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Group 1 16 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 Group 1 10 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Group 1 4 18 2 Hotline 18 2 1 Hotline desti...

Page 1070: ...messages select message no 0 to 9 and enter alphanumeric text up to 24 characters optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only 19 13 Enter 4 digit time in the format HHMM hour minute 19 14 Enter 6 digit date in the format DDMMYY day month year 19 15 Call duration 0 off 1 on 19 16 Name Call numbers 0 Calling ID only 1 Name 2 Name and calling ID 19 17 Automatic recall 1 Caller 2 Transferred destin...

Page 1071: ...rNet 1 6 CorNet 2 7 ECMA QSIG 8 ISO QSIG 20 4 2 S2M port configuration select slot port and determine connection type not for U S 1 Euro CO PP 2 CorNet 1 3 CorNet 2 4 ECMA QSIG 5 ISO QSIG 20 4 3 S0 bus MSN for verification purposes only 20 4 4 Call forwarding PMP 20 4 4 1 Multiple subscriber numbers select index 1 to 10 20 4 4 2 MSN trunks select index 1 to 10 20 5 US parameters for U S only 20 5 ...

Page 1072: ...4 AT T 4ESS 15 Siemens Custom 16 Siemens Custom OSA 17 Siemens NI2 18 Siemens NI2 OSA 19 MCI DEX600 20 MCI DMS250 21 BELL DMS100 22 BELL DMS100 TNS 23 Nortel DMS100 24 Nortel DMS100 TNS 25 SPRINT DMS250 26 Westinghouse 27 FTS DMS250 28 FTS 5ESS 29 GENERIC NI2 30 GENERIC NI2 OSA 31 QSIG 32 IDA P 20 5 2 12 Frame line encod select slot 0 ESF B8ZS Normal 1 SF ZCS Inverted 20 5 2 13 Inwats parameter 20...

Page 1073: ...800 19 ULTRA 800 20 WICN INWATS 21 MEG 22 MCI PRISIM WATS 23 SPR ULTRA WATS 24 WICN OUTWATS 25 ACCU SDS 26 LDS WC TSAA 27 INTER 800 28 MULTIQUEST 29 MCI 900 30 SDS56 31 SDS64C 32 SDS64R 33 DMS100 PV 34 DMS100 INWATS 35 DMS100 OUTWATS 36 DMS100 FX 37 5ESS INWATS 38 WATS MSB 39 DMS100 TIE 40 NI2 INWATS 41 NI2 OUTWATS 42 NI2 FX 43 NI2 TIE 44 NI2 HOTEL 45 NI2 SCOCS 46 CALL BY CALL 1 47 CALL BY CALL 2 ...

Page 1074: ...NWATS 20 MEG 21 MCI PRISIM WATS 22 SPR ULTRA WATS 23 WICN OUTWATS 24 ACCU SDS 25 LDS WC TSAA 26 INTER 800 27 MULTIQUEST 28 MCI 900 29 SDS56 30 SDS64C 31 SDS64R 32 DMS100 PV 33 DMS100 INWATS 34 DMS100 OUTWATS 35 DMS100 FX 36 5ESS INWATS 37 WATS MSB 38 DMS100 TIE 39 NI2 INWATS 40 NI2 OUTWATS 41 NI2 FX 42 NI2 TIE 43 NI2 HOTEL 44 NI2 SCOCS 20 5 2 16 CBC access code 20 5 3 S0 bus MSN select slot port 2...

Page 1075: ...No pause 1 1 s 2 3 s 3 6 s 4 9 s 21 3 Trunk call pause select trunk group 1 6 s 2 13 s 21 4 Line Length select slot and trunk 0 Short 1 Long 21 5 Charge data module select slot trunk 0 off 1 on 21 6 Silent reversal 0 no 1 yes 21 7 Port status 0 on 1 Off SW 2 Off HW 3 Off HW SW 21 8 Allocated without extension 22 System settings 22 11 Music on Hold MOH 0 Off 1 No ring tone 2 Ring tone 3 An nounceme...

Page 1076: ...ivate 22 15 Caller list mode 1 Only external 2 External and Internal 3 External ring call 22 16 Applications 22 16 1 Call distribution 0 no 1 yes 22 17 Tones 22 17 1 Conference Warning tone 0 off 1 on 22 17 2 Call pickup Warning tone 0 off 1 on 22 18 Transfer key Retrieve 1 Press once 2 Press twice 22 19 Class of service 22 19 1 Night answer Pos 1 5 enter station 22 19 2 Central telephone lock 22 ...

Page 1077: ...1 yes Status 1 U S Status 0 Rest of World ROW 22 37 Advisory call 0 off 1 on 22 38 Trace stop facility 22 38 1 Stop trace 22 38 1 01 Assistant 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 09 HW 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 12 Processor 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 15 APSXF 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 16 General 0 inactive 1 active error 19 cannot be set to inactive 22 38 1 20 CP 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 21 DH 0 i...

Page 1078: ...1 UCD permanently available 0 inactive 1 active 23 Code 23 1 Substitute code code 75 23 2 Substitute code code 76 23 3 Trunk access code select slot and trunk and enter new code 23 4 Route code Select route followed by position 1 10 for code and enter new code Route 1 8 HiPath 3350HiPath 3300 Route 1 16 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 23 5 Attendant code 23 5 1 Attendant code DID 2...

Page 1079: ...prior to answer select slot and trunk 25 4 External MOH Only enter analog line module stations 26 Relays 26 1 Type select relay 1 to 4 and assign function 11 Manual on and off 12 Off after timeout 13 Door opener 14 Speaker amplifier starting contact for amplifier 15 Busy display 16 Music on hold 17 Call charge pulse 18 Second bell 19 Station active 20 Announcement 26 2 Switching time Select relay ...

Page 1080: ...enter 1 to 255 27 8 Block time select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 0 to 255 27 9 Sensor text select sensor 1 to 4 enter alphanumeric text of up 16 char acters optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only 28 Edit CDB HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 only 28 1 Print CDB data 28 2 Save CDB data 28 2 1 CDB to MMC 28 2 2 CDB from MMC 29 System details 29 1 System 29 1 1 System type for...

Page 1081: ... 5 Announcement Beyer 29 3 2 Software version for each option 1 to 16 for verification purposes only 29 3 3 Reset options 29 4 Boards 29 4 1 Board type select slot 11 TMS2 12 TMST1 digital 13 TIEL 14 TMDID 15 TML8W 16 TMOM 17 TMGL8 18 TLA2 19 TLA4 20 TLA8 21 TS2 22 TMGL2 23 TMGL4 24 TMQ2 25 TMQ4 26 TST1 digital 27 STMD 28 STLS2 29 STLS4 30 SLA16 31 SLMO8 32 SLMO24 33 SLMC8 CMI V1 34 4SLA 35 8SLA T...

Page 1082: ...SLA16N 46 SLA24N 47 TMAMF 48 CR8 49 SLU4 Octopus E 10 50 SLU2 Octopus E 10 51 HXGM HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 52 HXGS HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 53 IVMS8 54 IVML8 55 IVML24 56 SLAS16 57 TMCAS 58 SLUC8 UP0 E interfaces on CBCC CBRC CBCP 59 SLUC4 UP0 E interfaces on SBSCO 60 SLUC2 UP0 E interfaces on SBSCS 61 SLAS4N 62 SLAS8N 63 IVMP8 64 HXGM3 65 HXGS3 66 SLC16N 67 STMD2 68 STLS2N ...

Page 1083: ...LMA8 74 SLMA3 75 SLMA2 76 SLMO8_HP4K 77 STMD3 78 SLCN 79 STMI2 80 IVMN8 81 IVMNL 82 TM2LP 83 TMDID_HP4K 84 TMC16 85 DIU2U 86 EVM2 87 TS2 88 STMD3 feeding 29 4 2 xx Reset board for board no see 29 4 1 29 4 3 0 9 Board status 29 4 4 Lock release card 29 5 Country initialization 29 5 1 Variable password 29 5 1 00 to 99 See Select country code 29 5 2 Fixed password Table A 3 Expert Mode Codes Code Fun...

Page 1084: ...m 16 Italy 17 Spain 18 Portugal 19 Switzerland 20 Austria 21 International 22 Ireland 23 Belgium 24 Brazil 25 South Africa 26 China 28 India 29 Czech Republic 30 Denmark 31 Australia 32 Argentina 33 Philippines 35 Brazil 2 36 Singapore 37 Hungary 38 Malaysia 40 Indonesia 41 Russia 42 Thailand 46 Poland 47 Greece 49 Sweden 50 Norway 51 Turkey 52 U S 53 Pakistan 54 Hong Kong 55 New Zealand 56 Taiwan...

Page 1085: ... Logon DID with code 3 Callback 30 4 Reset password 30 5 Integrated modem 30 5 1 Station number remote service max 6 digits 30 5 2 DID number remote service 30 5 3 CAID admin for U S only 30 6 Digital modem 30 6 1 Station number remote service max 6 digits 30 6 2 DID number remote service 30 6 3 CAID admin for U S only 30 7 Callback connection 30 7 1 Destination select position 1 6 30 7 2 Password...

Page 1086: ...elect group 0 off 1 on 31 2 5 Max waiting calls select group 31 3 Wrap up time 0 no wrap up time 1 20 wrap up x 30s 31 4 Call priority external select slot trunk 31 5 Call priority internal 32 Paging 32 1 PSE port slot and trunk 32 2 Radio paging type only HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 1 standard 2 en hanced 32 3 Protocol 1 ESPA 4 4 5 2 ESPA 4 4 3 32 4 Operating mode 32 4 1 Mode urgent 32 4 2 Mode norma...

Page 1087: ...Security mode 0 After timeout 1 After 34 4 CAID admin for U S only 35 Least cost routing LCR optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office only 35 1 LCR on or off 0 off 1 on 35 2 Digit transmission 0 Digit by digit 1 En bloc sending 35 3 Dial rule 35 3 1 Name select line 35 3 2 Format select line 35 3 3 Type select line 0 undefined 1 main network supplier 2 1 level 3 2 level 4 CN 5 DICS 6 PRI 35 4 Aut...

Page 1088: ...lay and Tone 35 8 Dial plan 35 8 1 Dialed digits select line 35 8 2 Assign route table select line 35 8 3 Account Codes 0 no 1 yes 35 8 4 CO call privileges personal calls 0 no 1 yes 35 8 5 Toll restriction 0 no 1 yes 35 8 6 Emergency 36 HiPath Cordless Office 36 1 Log on CMI unit select device 1 inactive 36 2 CMI code select device 36 3 CMI number select device changes not possible 36 4 Reset cor...

Page 1089: ...er station has call detail recording authoriza tion 54 1 CDR at station 54 1 1 Edit CDRS 54 1 2 Print CDRS 54 2 CDR per trunk 54 2 1 Edit CDRT 54 2 2 Print CDRT 54 4 Call charge factor 54 5 ISDN factor 54 6 Currency designation 54 7 Call log 54 8 CDRA pay phone 55 Station name 56 Text messages 57 Advisory messages 58 Select language 59 Group names 60 Account codes 60 1 Account code list 60 2 Check...

Page 1090: ...codes fm 61 Hotline 61 1 Hotline destinations 61 2 Hotline station 61 2 1 Hotline mode 0 Off 1 Hotline 2 Code blue 61 2 2 Hotline assignment 61 3 Hotline timeout 62 Codes remote service 63 Codes Cordless 99 Access The bolded messages appear in optiset E memory and optiPoint 600 office telephones only Table A 3 Expert Mode Codes Code Function ...

Page 1091: ... locking of features Table B 1 contains a description of the various types of workpoint clients Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with ...

Page 1092: ... DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Logon mode for handset 942 Code Stn no 942 H DIG CMI X Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI ...

Page 1093: ...l calls 2 Ex calls only 3 nt calls only Call forward ing off 1 761 1 V T RH U1 Fea ture key Fea ture key AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work po...

Page 1094: ...LAP Type Stn no 75501 501 V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Only for MULAP members Call forward ing off for each MULAP 501 MULAP 76501 501 V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Only for MULAP members Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI m...

Page 1095: ... 403 403 V T U2 Fea ture key AN DIG ENT CMI IPSC X RK BS Only for logged on stations Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI...

Page 1096: ...ture menu Local feature menu DIG CMI IPSC X RK BS Associated di aling 67 Stn Stn no 7567 67 U H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Only for authorized stations Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clien...

Page 1097: ...ff indi vidual 66 Code 7666 66 U T RH BR U1 Fea ture key Fea ture key AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients wi...

Page 1098: ...U1 DIG CMI IPSC X Only for WpC with speakerphone Hands free an swerback off 96 V T RH U1 DIG CMI IPSC X Only for WpC with speakerphone Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work poi...

Page 1099: ...DIG ENT X WA RG RK BS GS Relocate Re activation load configura tion 9419 only TDM WpC without display 9419 DIG ENT X WA RG RK BS GS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point ...

Page 1100: ...ing Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoint clients optiClient 130 V5 0 phone optiCli ent130 V5 0 easy Com optiCli ent130 V5 0 office...

Page 1101: ... num bering plan AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Group calls can be programmed on DSS key Group call join 85 7585 85 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All group calls join 85 Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients withou...

Page 1102: ...e menu Local feature menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Without dialing call number in ringing state Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients...

Page 1103: ... IPSC RH BR WA RG BS RK Status as prior to conference call Dialog menu pro vides further op tions for ending conference Call charge display for own station GET 65 V H DIG IPSC X Deletion only by system administra tor Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoin...

Page 1104: ...d in the CDR Trunkqueuing manual V BS AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RH BR RG RK GS Activation by pressing a key if enabled in the CDR Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli...

Page 1105: ...tral data base IPSC Only for mobile call numbers Night answer on 44 or Stn no 75 44 V U T RH U1 Fea ture key AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Standard night service with Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analo...

Page 1106: ... no 7545 45 AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoint clients optiCl...

Page 1107: ... quests 58 CCBS local S0 WpC function ality 58 U T RH U1 Local feature menu Local feature menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RH BR WA GS RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work ...

Page 1108: ...ne Ring transfer on 502 MULAP 75502 502 V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Only for member of the executive MULAP groups Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM wo...

Page 1109: ...menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All hunt groups join 85 Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP...

Page 1110: ...n code for 75 75 75 ALL Substitution code for 76 76 76 ALL Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP ...

Page 1111: ...IG IPSC X Only for attendant if enabled Internal phonebook 54 V RH BR GS Private local di rectory on PC LDAP interface DIG IPSC Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ...

Page 1112: ...ating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoint clients optiClient 130 V5 0 phone optiCli ent130 V5 0 easy Com optiCli ent130 V5 0 offi...

Page 1113: ...group 57 7557 57 V RH BR GS U AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC WA RG RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phon...

Page 1114: ...no or 75943 943 U H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Only for authorized stations Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Sup ported work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mo...

Page 1115: ...rted work point clients see abbre via tions in Table B 1 Locking of feature Note TDMworkpoint clients without display CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoint clients optiClient 130 V5 0 phone optiCli ent130 V5 0 easy Com optiCli ent130 V5 0 office Code procedure Code Code Key Menu Code Code via lo...

Page 1116: ...ode optiset E standard optiset E advance plus comfort optiset E advance conference conference optiset E memory DIG analog workpoint clients DP and DTMF terminals AN S0 workpoint clients ISDN terminals S0 IP workpoint clients System clients optiClient 130 optiPoint 400 standard 3 0 optiPoint 400 economy 3 0 optiPoint 410 entry without display optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoi...

Page 1117: ...al B 27 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features CMI mobile phones Gigaset 1000 CMI CMI feature mobile phones Gigaset 3000 Comfort Gigaset 3000 Micro Gigaset 4000 Comfort Gigaset 4000 Micro Description of the Different Workpoint Client Groups Workpoint client group Description examples Abbreviation ...

Page 1118: ...Codes for Activating Deactivating Features P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 B 28 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual fcodes fm ...

Page 1119: ...erecting firewalls is provided on each component Firewalls en sure that customer intranets are protected from external access Information on applications that can be used in HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 can be found in the relevant product documentation Topic HiPath 3000 page C 2 HiPath 5000 page C 3 HiPath ComScendo Service page C 5 HiPath FM Managed Systems page C 7 HG 1500 page C 8 optiClient 130 V5 0...

Page 1120: ...ible Clients Application Config urable Telnet TCP 23 Administration via Assistant T No TFTP UDP 69 X APS transfer via TFTP HiPath 5000 network No ADM TCP 7000 Feature Server HiPath 5000 net work Yes CSTA TCP 7001 HiPath 5000 net work No SYNC TCP 7024 Feature Server HiPath 5000 net work Yes FCT TCP 7100 Feature Server HiPath 5000 net work Yes SNMP Get Set UDP 161 SNMP browser HiPath FM No Resource ...

Page 1121: ...stry entry HiPath FM Server UDP 161 X Managed sys tem SNMP Get Set FM property files HiPath FM Server UDP 162 or 3162 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 eCS PCS SNMP Traps FM property files HiPath FM Server RMI 3042 defined port range 3050 3065 HiPath FM Cli ent Communication from Client to Hi Path FM Server FM property files HiPath FM Server Socket propri etary...

Page 1122: ...int 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 FTP Server No DNS UDP 53 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 ADS name resolu tion No DHCP UDP 67 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 PC IP address alloca tion No Table C 2 HiPath 5000 IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used Service Application Proto col Server Port Connect With Oth er Servers Possi...

Page 1123: ...iPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 Netmeeting AP 1120 Voice over IP connection control Yes H 323 Dy namic Ports TCP 12250 12950 X HG 1500 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 Netmeeting AP 1120 Voice over IP connection control for voice channels media channels Yes VOPTISET TCP 4060 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoin...

Page 1124: ...P 2048 XTracer Online Trace Tool No HTTP TCP 8085 Web Based Man agement No SSL TCP 443 No TFTP UDP 69 X APS transfer via TFTP HiPath 5000 No ADM TCP 7000 Feature Server HiPath 5000 Yes CSTA TCP 7001 HiPath 5000 No SYNC TCP 7024 Feature Server HiPath 5000 Yes FCT TCP 7100 Feature Server HiPath 5000 Yes SNMP Get Set UDP 161 SNMP browser HiPath FM No Resource Manager TCP 9000 HiPath 3000 5000 Network...

Page 1125: ...iPathServer for communication with systems to be managed port 8170 and 9170 added for detect ing TelasWeb PCM No HTTP Com munication Server TCP 80 280 8085 8080 8170 8888 9170 HiPath FM Cli ent Launch of detect ed http services on systems to be managed No Telnet TCP 23 HiPath FM Server Telnet integra tion of systems to be managed HDMS 3 6 Not required for HTS 6 0 scenari os No SNMP Ser vice UDP 16...

Page 1126: ...ptiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 Netmeeting AP 1120 Voice over IP connection con trol Yes H 323 Dy namic Ports TCP 12250 12950 X HG 1500 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 Netmeeting AP 1120 Voice over IP connection con trol for voice channels media channels Yes RTP RTCP UDP 29100 29131 X HG 1500 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 o...

Page 1127: ...Office IP accounting No SNMP Get Set UDP 161 SNMP browser HiPath FM SNMP browser HiPath FM No SNMP Traps UDP 162 X optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 600 optiClient 130 Sending receiv ing SNMP error messages No DSL Diag nostics Serv er UDP 12200 DSL Status Tool DSL status dis play No Call Address Resolution CAR TCP 12062 X HG 1500 Call number serv er call monitoring can be activat...

Page 1128: ... CLI with restricted func tionality Telnet is disabled in secure mode No TFTP UDP 69 X APS transfer CDB backup via TFTP No Online Trace Report TCP 2048 XTrace Online Trace Tool No HTTP TCP 8085 Web Based Man agement No SSL TCP 443 No Table C 5 HG 1500 IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used Service Application Proto col Server Port Connect With Oth er Servers Possible Cli ents Application Config urable...

Page 1129: ... 245 TCP program mable Default 12000 program mable Default 12100 Depending on the partner configuration optiClient 130 PBX Feature Proto col CorNetTC TCP program mable Default 1023 program mable programmable Default 4060 optiClient 130 PBX VoIP payload optiClient 130 send receive RTP UDP program mable Default 29100 program mable Default 29131 Depending on the partner configuration optiClient 130 P...

Page 1130: ...HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual portnos fm optiClient 130 V5 0 Directory Ac cess LDAP TCP 1023 programmable Default 389 optiClient 130 LDAP Server Table C 6 optiClient 130 V5 0 IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used Service Application Protocol Layer 7 Protocol Layer 4 Local port Remote port Interface from to ...

Page 1131: ...ort number not the port numbers derived from the Port Base Number Note The workpoint client may have to be restarted after a port number has been changed Table C 7 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 office Used IP Protocols and Port Numbers Function Default port Note UDP TCP H 225 0 RAS Port Area 1719 H 225 0 Call Signaling Port Area 1720 H 245 ...

Page 1132: ...TP 69 Not configurable LDAP 389 389 WAP 2948 2948 WAP Push Not configurable 9200 9200 WAP Connectionless Session Service Service Agent Request Port 5100 SA base port The default value is 5100 Auto Discovery 5100 SA base port 0 CTI Service 5105 5105 SA base port 5 Debug Port 5110 5110 SA base port 10 Terminal Emulator Port 5115 5115 SA base port 15 Signaling Emulator Port 5120 5120 SA base port 20 ...

Page 1133: ...Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 office SIP TLS 5601 Table C 7 optiPoint 400 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 office Used IP Protocols and Port Numbers Function Default port Note UDP TCP ...

Page 1134: ...Proto col Server Port Connect With Oth er Servers Possible Cli ents Application Config urable H 323 H 225 Q931 TCP 1720 X HG 1500 Voice over IP connection con trol No H 323 H 245 TCP 1024 65535 X HG 1500 Voice over IP connection con trol for voice channels media channels No RTP RTCP UDP 5004 5130 X HG 1500 Voice over IP transmission of voice packets RTP Port 5004 5006 5008 5130 RTCP RTP port 1 No ...

Page 1135: ... Table C 9 Middleware for Call Control IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used Service Application Proto col Server Port Connect With Oth er Servers Possible Cli ents Application Config urable TAPI 120 TCP X TAPI Service Provider No TAPI 170 V2 TCP 8503 TAPI Service Provider No CMD TCP 8000 node ID presently 8001 8064 7700 TAPI 120 CSTA Message Dispatcher Via user inter face CSP TCP 8000 8800 CSTA Serv...

Page 1136: ...IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 C 18 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual portnos fm Middleware for Call Control ...

Page 1137: ...ditional power supply may be needed The following values are for orientation only and can vary depending on the traffic flow Topic HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement page D 2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Board Power Requirement page D 4 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement page D 6 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement page D 8 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement page D 10 HiPath 3300 Board Power Req...

Page 1138: ... output a maximum of 110 W is available at the 48 V output You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the connected workpoint clients of a system cabinet exceeds the maximum possible LUNA2 output Section D 8 contains a sample calculation Table D 2 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V CBSAP S30810 Q2314...

Page 1139: ...er Requirements HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement STMD3 S30810 Q2217 X10 4 0 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 16 3 TM2LP S30810 Q2159 Xxxx 1 8 TMC16 S30810 Q2485 X 1 3 TMDID S30810 Q2452 X 2 3 6 6 TMEW2 S30810 Q2292 X100 1 3 3 1 Table D 2 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V ...

Page 1140: ...rds used and the connected workpoint clients of a system cabinet exceeds the maximum possible UPSM output Section D 8 contains a sample calculation Table D 4 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBCPR including sub boards S30810 Q2936 X 8 5 GEE8 S30817 Q664 xxxx 1 0 H...

Page 1141: ...S30810 Q2520 X 1 0 TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A200 1 81 16 91 TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Not Available TMDID8 S30810 Q2507 X 1 41 23 81 TMGL8 S30810 Q2703 X 1 61 2 11 TML8W S30817 Q626 Axxx Bxxx 1 0 TMST1 S30810 Q2920 X 3 0 TMS2 S30810 Q2915 X 3 0 1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0 8 Erlang Table D 4 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5...

Page 1142: ...d workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC D with or without EPSU2 Section D 8 contains a sample calculation Table D 6 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBCC including submod ules S30810 Q2935 A301 7 0 0 5 GEE12 S30817 Q951 Axxx 0 5 GEE16 S30817 Q951 Axxx ...

Page 1143: ...x 0 1 TLA4 S30817 Q923 Axxx 0 2 TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx 0 4 TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A400 1 81 16 91 TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Not Available TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X 4 71 0 11 TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X 3 8 TST1 S30810 Q2919 X 0 8 TS2 S30810 Q2913 X300 0 9 V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 0 3 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 0 7 0 7 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 1 3 1 3 16SLA S30810 Q2923 X 2 5 2 5 1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0 8 Erlang Tab...

Page 1144: ...ou must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the connected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the PSUP or the UPSC D with or without EPSU2 Section D 8 contains a sample calculation Table D 8 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBCC i...

Page 1145: ...t TLA4 S30817 Q923 Axxx 0 2 TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx 0 4 TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X 4 71 0 11 TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X 3 8 V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 0 3 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 0 7 0 7 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 1 3 1 3 16SLA S30810 Q2923 X 2 5 2 5 1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0 8 Erlang Table D 8 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V ...

Page 1146: ...ment of the boards used and the connected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC DR with or without EPSU2 R Section D 8 contains a sample calculation Table D 10 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBRC including submod ules S30810 Q2935 Z301 7 0 0 5 HXGR3 ...

Page 1147: ...1 X900 40 0 140 0 You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the connected workpoint clients exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC DR with or without EPSU2 R A sample calculation is shown in Section D 8 Table D 12 HiPath 3300 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H548...

Page 1148: ...int Clients Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements Workpoint Client Net Power Requirement in W from 48 V input optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S 0 01 optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy S optiPoint 410 standard optiPoint 410 standard S optiPoint 410 advance optiPoint 410 advance S optiPoint 420 economy optiPoint 420 economy S optiPoint 420 economy pl...

Page 1149: ...r U S 0 7 optiPoint 500 basic 0 7 optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 standard SL For U S Only 0 7 optiPoint 500 advance 0 72 optiPoint key module 0 05 optiPoint BLF 0 02 optiPoint Analog Adapter 0 003 optiPoint ISDN Adapter 0 7 optiPoint Phone Adapter 0 18 optiPoint Acoustic Adapter 0 25 optiPoint Recorder Adapter 0 3 optiPoint 600 office 0 02 Table D 13 Workpoint Clients Key Modules and Adapter...

Page 1150: ...2 optiset E analog adapter 0 03 optiset E contact adapter 0 7 optiset E control adapters 0 34 optiset E data adapter 0 76 optiset E headset adapter 0 03 optiset E headset plus adapter 0 23 optiset E ISDN adapter 0 05 optiset E phone adapter 0 06 Analog telephone 40 mA for short trunk in active status 0 3 1 A local power supply is used for Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and the pre802 3af ...

Page 1151: ...ut 2 Determine secondary power requirement at the 48 V output Using the specified values check whether the total power requirement exceeds the maximum possible output of the power supply unit at the 5 V output or at the 48 V output If this is the case you have the following options HiPath 3800 The number of LUNA2 power supply units can be increased HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 with UPSM For multipl...

Page 1152: ... maximum nominal output of the 48 V output can be increased from 53 W to 140 W by using the EPSU2 R external power supply unit HiPath 3300 with USPSC DR Due to build up of heat the 5 V output format can only be loaded with a maximum of 20 W A maximum nominal output of 40 W is possible by using the EPSU2 R external power sup ply unit In addition the maximum nominal output of the 48 V output increas...

Page 1153: ... boards components used 0 50 W 1 x CBCC 2 80 W 1 x HXGS3 including ventilator kit 0 00 W 1 x TS2 0 00 W 3 x SLU8 1 30 W 1 x 8SLA 0 00 W 1 x SLC16N 24 00 W 12 x BS3 1 power requirement of connected work point clients key modules and adapt ers 0 56 W 1 x optiset E memory 4 32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance 0 85 W 1 x optiset E advance confer ence conference 8 40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic 2 40 W 8 x op...

Page 1154: ...mine overall secondary power requirement 2 Identifying primary power requirement power requirements of the boards components used power requirement of connected workpoint clients analog and digital telephones key modules and adapters overall secondary power requirement overall secondary power requirement requirements of power supply units UPSM 30 W PSUP UPSC D UPSC DR 12 W respectively requirement...

Page 1155: ...cluding ventilator kit 0 90 W 1 x TS2 2 40 W 3 x SLU8 2 60 W 1 x 8SLA 5 00 W 1 x SLC16N 24 00 W 12 x BS3 1 power requirement of connected work point clients key modules and adapt ers 0 56 W 1 x optiset E memory 4 32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance 0 85 W 1 x optiset E advance confer ence conference 8 40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic 2 40 W 8 x optiPoint 500 entry 0 00 W 2 x Hicom Attendant BLF 0 00 W 2 x...

Page 1156: ...Identifying System Power Requirements P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 D 20 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual power_calc fm Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement ...

Page 1157: ... Figure 3 11 CUP Backplane S30777 Q751 X 3 47 Figure 3 12 CUPR Backplane S30777 Q751 Z 3 47 Figure 3 13 DBSAP S30807 Q6722 X 3 48 Figure 3 14 DBSAP on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet 3 49 Figure 3 15 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Procedure for LAN Connection 3 52 Figure 3 16 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Adapter Cable C39195 Z7213 A1 3 52 Figure 3 17 LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath ...

Page 1158: ...e 3 45 HXGM3 Interfaces 3 102 Figure 3 46 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Connector for Backplane 3 104 Figure 3 47 HXGM3 LAN Adapter Cable for Backplane for U S only 3 105 Figure 3 48 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X 3 108 Figure 3 49 HXGR3 S30810 K2943 Z 3 108 Figure 3 50 HXGS3 HXGR3 Interfaces 3 109 Figure 3 51 HXGS3 Installation of the Fan Kit in HiPath 3550 3 113 Figure 3 52 HXGS3 Securing Clips for Fan Kit 3 114 Figu...

Page 1159: ... for U S SLMO24 S30810 Q2901 X100 S30810 Q2901 X 3 206 Figure 3 82 SLU8 Interfaces S30817 Q922 A301 3 212 Figure 3 83 SLU8R Interfaces S30817 K922 Z301 3 213 Figure 3 84 STLS2 Not for U S STLS4 Interfaces S30817 Q924 B313 A313 3 214 Figure 3 85 Sample Pin Assignments in MW Jacks Not for U S 3 217 Figure 3 86 Wiring and Ranges for S0 Bus Jacks Not for U S 3 218 Figure 3 87 MWxx Jack Pin Assignment ...

Page 1160: ...AS in HiPath 3550 3 290 Figure 3 120 TMDID for U S only S30810 Q2452 X Front Panel 3 296 Figure 3 121 TMDID8 for U S only S30810 Q2507 X 3 300 Figure 3 122 TMEW2 Front Panel S30810 Q2292 X100 3 304 Figure 3 123 TMGL4 For U S Only Interfaces S30810 Q2918 X 3 307 Figure 3 124 TMGL4R for U S only S30810 K2918 Z 3 309 Figure 3 125 TMGL8 for U S only S30810 K2703 Z 3 311 Figure 3 126 TML8W Not for U S ...

Page 1161: ...ure 3 158 HOPE For U S Only S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X 3 362 Figure 3 159 OPAL C39195 A7001 B130 3 364 Figure 3 160 OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 3 365 Figure 3 161 ALUM Using PFT1 PFT4 Not for U S 3 366 Figure 3 162 Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 MDFU MDFU E Not for U S 3 367 Figure 3 163 PFT1 S30777 Q539 X and PFT4 S30777 Q540 X Board Assignment 3 368 Figure 3 164 Installation Location of t...

Page 1162: ... Cabinet with Panel Mounted 4 36 Figure 4 19 HiPath 3800 Installing the LUNA2 Power Supply Unit 4 37 Figure 4 20 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 and REALS in the Basic Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted 4 38 Figure 4 21 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 in the Expansion Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted 4 38 Figure 4 22 HiPath 3800 Installing the REALS Board 4 39 Figure 4 23 SIVAPAC SIPAC Board Adapter 4 42 Fi...

Page 1163: ... 52 HiPath 3750 Installing a Two Cabinet System Stacked 4 98 Figure 4 53 HiPath 3750 Mounting the Stabilizer Feet Three Cabinet System Shown 4 99 Figure 4 54 HiPath 3750 Wall Mount Kit for U S only 4 100 Figure 4 55 HiPath 3750 Wall Mounting for a Stacked Two Cabinet System for U S only 4 101 Figure 4 56 HiPath 3750 Installing a Two Cabinet System Side By Side 4 103 Figure 4 57 HiPath 3750 Install...

Page 1164: ...C39104 Z7001 B3 4 148 Figure 4 84 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel 4 149 Figure 4 85 Stripping the Open End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel 4 150 Figure 4 86 S2M Adapter SIPAC 1 SU MW8 RJ48C C39228 A7195 A12 4 151 Figure 4 87 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X for Different Peripheral Boards 4 152 Figure 4 88 Slot Numbers and Widths in 8 Slot BC EC1 and EC2 4 155 Figure 4 89 HiPath 3750 ...

Page 1165: ...00 Manager E 8 8 Figure 8 3 Procedure for Licensing optiClient Attendant V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V6 0 8 26 Figure 8 4 Procedure for Licensing optiClient Attendant V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 28 Figure 8 5 Licensing procedure when upgrading optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 30 Figure 8 6 Procedure for Licensing when Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6 0 V7 0 on HiPath 3000 V5 0 8 32 Fig...

Page 1166: ...5 Figure 10 15 optiPoint Acoustic Adapter 10 26 Figure 10 16 Y Cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter 10 27 Figure 10 17 optiPoint Recorder Adapter 10 29 Figure 10 18 optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S Standard Key Assignment Default 10 41 Figure 10 19 optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy S Standard Key Assignment Default 10 43 Figure 10 20 optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 econ...

Page 1167: ...essional 10 87 Figure 11 1 BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X Base Station 11 4 Figure 11 2 BS3 1 BS3 S and BS3 3 in the Outdoor Cover S30122 X7469 X 11 5 Figure 11 3 Example of a Cordless Extension Connection in Networked Systems 11 11 Figure 11 4 Incorrect DECT Configuration of Networked HiPath 3000 Systems 11 12 Figure 11 5 Correct DECT Configuration when Networking HiPath 3000 Systems 11 13 Figure 11 6 Corr...

Page 1168: ...Figures P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 W 12 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual hp3hp5shLOF fm ...

Page 1169: ... 46 Table 2 15 Telephone Interface to Interface Ranges with J Y ST 2x2x0 6 0 6 mm di ameter 2 47 Table 2 16 Cable Lengths for Trunk Connection and Direct CorNet N CorNet NQ Wiring 2 47 Table 2 17 Default Numbering for HiPath 3000 5000 V6 0 2 48 Table 2 18 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards For U S and Canada Only 2 49 Table 3 1 HiPath 3000 Functional Overview of All Boards Used 3 1 Table 3 ...

Page 1170: ...Batteries V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah Batteries 3 78 Table 3 31 UPSM Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122 K5950 Y200 48 V 7 Ah 3 85 Table 3 32 DIU2U for U S only adapter cable assignment C39195 A7269 B625 3 93 Table 3 33 DIU2U For U S Only LED Statuses 3 95 Table 3 34 DIUN2 LED Statuses 3 98 Table 3 35 DIUN2 15 Pin Sub D Jack Assignment 3 99 Table 3 36 DIUN2 Assigning the System Cable S3026...

Page 1171: ...r U S 3 158 Table 3 66 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS2 2 Base Stations Connected to SLC16N Not for U S 3 159 Table 3 67 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 3 Base Stations Connected to SLC16N and BS4 connected to SLC16N not for U S 3 159 Table 3 68 EPSU2 Explanation of Indicators and Ports 3 166 Table 3 69 EP...

Page 1172: ...U S SLMO24 Cable 1 Assignment SU Xx8 3 208 Table 3 94 SLMO8 Not for U S SLMO24 Cable 2 Assignment SU Xx9 3 209 Table 3 95 SLMO24 Assignment SU Xx8 Xx9 For U S Only 3 210 Table 3 96 SLU8 Contact Assignments 3 212 Table 3 97 SLU8R Contact Assignments 3 213 Table 3 98 STLS4 Module Interface Assignments For U S Only 3 215 Table 3 99 STLS4R Contact Assignments 3 222 Table 3 100 STLSX2 STLSX4 STLSX4R S0...

Page 1173: ...only Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors Cable for Ports 1 16 3 284 Table 3 132 TMCAS Seven Segment Display H1 3 288 Table 3 133 Assignment of the TMS2 TMCAS Connection Cable C39195 A9700 B510 3 289 Table 3 134 Assignment of the TS2 TMCAS Connection Cable C39195 A9700 B511 3 290 Table 3 135 Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195 A9700 B512 3 291 Table 3 136 Assignment of the TMCAS ...

Page 1174: ...gnments 3 348 Table 3 168 ANI4R for selected countries only Contact Assignment 3 351 Table 3 169 Announcement and Music Modules 3 352 Table 3 170 EXMNA for U S only Contact Assignments 3 358 Table 3 171 GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 Not for U S Modules 3 360 Table 3 172 GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 Not for U S Contact Assignments 3 361 Table 3 173 REAL Cable and Connector Assignment 3 372 Table 3 174 REALS SIVAPAC Conne...

Page 1175: ...tering the System Number 5 9 Table 5 5 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Startup Procedure 5 11 Table 5 6 RUN LED LED Status Meaning 5 12 Table 5 7 Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type 5 15 Table 5 8 Entering the System Number 5 17 Table 5 9 Startup Procedure 5 19 Table 5 10 RUN LED LED Status Meaning 5 20 Table 5 11 Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type 5 23 Tab...

Page 1176: ...Path 3000 V6 0 11 3 Table 11 2 Technical Data for Various Base Stations 11 4 Table 11 3 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 Maximum Number of SLA16N and SLMO24 Sub scriber Line Modules Depending on the Number of Base Stations Connected to SLC16N 11 6 Table 11 4 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones De pending on the Number of BS3 1 and BS4 Base Stations Connected to CBCC or CBRC 11 7 Tab...

Page 1177: ...00 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint 600 office Used IP Protocols and Port Numbers C 13 Table C 8 HiPath AP 1120 IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used C 16 Table C 9 Middleware for Call Control IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used C 17 Table D 1 Nominal Output of the HiPath 3800 Power Supply Unit D 2 Table D 2 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement D 2 Table D 3 Nominal...

Page 1178: ...Tables P31003 H3560 S403 54 7620 09 05 X 10 HiPath 3000 V6 0 HiPath 5000 V6 0 Provisional Service Manual hp3hp5shLOT fm ...

Page 1179: ...em Program System B BC Basic Cabinet HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts BSG Add on device BSG Upright battery housing C CABLU Cabling Unit CAS Channel Associated Signaling CBCC Central Board with Coldfire Com CBCP Central Board with Coldfire Point CBCPR Central Board with Coldfire Pro CBRC Central Board Rack Com CBSAP Central Board Synergy Access Platform CCBS Completion of Calls...

Page 1180: ...Connection Unit Point CUPR Connection Unit Point Rack D DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DiffServ Differentiated Services DIU2U Digital Interface Unit 2 Universal DIUN2 Digital Interface Unit ISDN DMC Direct Media Connection DSP Digital Signal Processor E EBP Slot board EBR Extension Cabinet 19 Rack EC1 First Expansion Cabinet HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 EC2 Second Expansion Cabinet H...

Page 1181: ...XGM HiPath Xpress Gateway Medium HXGR HiPath Xpress Gateway Rack HXGS HiPath Xpress Gateway Small I IMODN Integrated Modem Card New IP Internet Protocol IVML Integrated Voice Mail Large IVMNL Integrated Voice Mail New Large IVMP Integrated Voice Mail Point IVMPR Integrated Voice Mail Point Rack IVMS Integrated Voice Mail Small IVMSR Integrated Voice Mail Small Rack L LDAP Lightweight Directory Acc...

Page 1182: ...on Adapter Long Rack P PCM Personal Call Manager PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDM1 PMC DSP modules PDS Permanent Data Service PFT Power Failure Transfer PSE Paging system PSUP Power Supply Unit Point Q QoS Quality of Service R RDT Remote Data Transfer REAL Relay and Trunk Failure Transfer REALS Relay and ALUM power failure transfer for SAPP RJ Registered Jack RLF Real License File RSA Resilience Serv...

Page 1183: ...nd Trunk Line S0 Rack STLSX Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX STLSXR Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX Rack STMD Subscriber And Trunk Module Digital S0 STRB Control Relay Module STRBR Control Relay Module Rack T TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface TIEL Tie Line Ear Mouth TLA Trunk Line Analog TLAR Trunk Line Analog Rack TM2LP Trunk Module Loop Procedure TMAMF Trunk Module Anal...

Page 1184: ...MST1 Trunk Modules S1 T1 TS2 Trunk Module S2M TS2R Trunk Module S2M Rack TW Twin Wire U UAE Universal socket UPSC D Uninterruptible Power Supply Com DECT UPSC DR Uninterruptible Power Supply Com DECT Rack UPSM Uninterruptible Power Supply Modular UPSMres Uninterruptible Power Supply Modular Reset Signal V VPN Virtual Private Network W WAP Wireless Application Protocol WpC Workpoint Client ...

Page 1185: ...k traffic TIEL 3 250 TMEW2 3 303 Analog modem 12 73 ANI4 for selected countries only 3 346 contact assignments 3 348 installation instructions 3 349 interfaces 3 346 LED statuses 3 346 ANI4R for selected countries only 3 350 contact assignment 3 351 figure 3 350 interfaces 3 350 Announcement and music modules 3 352 APPCU adapter 3 139 3 142 APS stamp 12 15 APS Transfer 12 12 APS transfer 12 11 Arc...

Page 1186: ...d adapters 10 33 Capacity limits HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 2 22 CAR tables 6 9 CAS protocol 3 136 3 285 3 321 3 330 CBCC 3 18 figure 3 20 LAN connector assignment via LIM 3 22 LED status meaning 3 19 numbering plan for HiPath 3350 3 24 numbering plan for HiPath 3550 3 23 S0 interface assignment 3 21 V 24 interface assignment 3 22 X1 to X4 contact assignments 3 21 CBCPR 3 32 figure 3 33 LAN connector...

Page 1187: ...igure 3 48 Delay 13 2 Deployment and Licensing Service 10 58 Determining system information 12 18 Diagnosis options 12 23 DiffServ code point 13 4 Digital modem 12 73 Direct media connection DMC 2 29 Disposal of electrical electronic devices 1 11 DIU2U for U S only 3 93 front panel 3 94 LED statuses 3 95 LEDs 3 94 DIUN2 3 96 assigning the system cable 3 99 front panel 3 97 LED statuses 3 98 switch...

Page 1188: ...ing equipment A 28 relays A 21 remote service A 27 sensors A 21 speed dialing system A 3 system details A 22 system settings A 17 traffic restriction A 11 Extension connection 11 10 External power supply EPSU2 3 164 External power supply EPSU2 R 9 18 F Fan connection in ECR 9 21 Fan kit for HXGS3 in HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 3 112 Feature Server 6 6 trace files 12 30 Ferrite for HiPath 3550 HiPath 3...

Page 1189: ...rd for U S only 3 362 hicom pds 6 51 12 4 HiPath 3000 2 3 HiPath 3000 upgrading HW SW 9 29 HiPath 3300 as a gateway 7 8 design and dimensions 2 12 installation 4 165 numbering plan 3 31 startup 5 19 system environment 2 18 HiPath 3350 design and dimensions 2 9 installation 4 165 numbering plan 3 24 startup 5 19 system environment 2 16 HiPath 3500 as a gateway 7 6 design and dimensions 2 11 install...

Page 1190: ...o base stations 3 160 system configuration 11 3 system numbers 10 91 tech base station data 11 4 HiPath Entry Voice Mail EVM 3 355 HiPath Fault Management 12 44 installing 6 31 HiPath Inventory Manager 12 18 analysis 12 46 installing 6 36 HiPath License Management 6 46 8 2 HiPath Manager PCM 6 56 HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor 12 30 HiPath Software Manager analysis 12 46 APS transfer 12 16 backi...

Page 1191: ...em overview HiPath 3550 4 183 tools and resources 4 165 unpacking the components 4 170 visual inspection 4 187 Installation HiPath 3700 4 85 checking the grounding 4 138 connecting the cable 4 139 connection cable BC EC 4 141 grounding 4 136 installation site 4 130 installing subboards 4 153 loading the system software 4 153 mounting the patch panel 4 135 mounting the system cabinet 4 131 procedur...

Page 1192: ...able for the MDFU E 4 70 visual inspection 4 83 Installing HiPath ComScendo Service 6 22 Installing subboards 4 81 Integrated modem IMODN 3 50 12 73 IP network requirements 13 2 IP protocols C 1 ISDN Message Decoder 12 29 ISDN routing HG 1500 2 29 IVML8 IVML24 3 115 figure 3 117 LAN adapter 3 119 LED statuses 3 118 lockout switch 3 117 packing protection covering 3 116 IVMNL IVMN8 3 120 front pane...

Page 1193: ... E 4 67 4 92 4 127 MMC 3 65 replacing 12 11 Mobile telephones 10 85 check login status 10 93 logging on to the system 10 91 Multimedia card 3 65 N Network Analysis 13 6 Network termination NT cable set for Spain Portugal HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 3 334 Power supply S2M HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 3 333 Power supply S2M HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 3 324 S0 connection 3 236 S2M conenction HiPath 3750 HiPath 3...

Page 1194: ...onfigurations 10 64 connection and startup 10 58 connection options 10 59 optiPoint 410 display module 10 62 optiPoint 420 advance S 10 56 optiPoint 420 economy plus S 10 52 optiPoint 420 economy S 10 50 optiPoint 420 standard S 10 54 optiPoint self labeling key module 10 61 using optiPoint 500 adapters 10 65 optiPoint 500 10 4 accessories 10 71 adapter configurations 10 30 add on device configura...

Page 1195: ... 385 Port numbers C 1 Power failure transfer 3 369 Power plug for U S only HiPath 3800 4 24 Power requirement boards workpoint cli ents adapter D 1 Power supply external applications 3 369 3 371 3 373 HiPath 3350 3 67 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 3 77 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 3 72 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 3 83 HiPath 3800 3 56 NT HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 3 333 NT HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 3 324 Presence Man...

Page 1196: ...A16N SLA24N 3 145 cable and connector assignment 3 147 connection conditions 3 151 LED statuses 3 146 switches and LEDs 3 145 SLC16N not for U S 3 152 base station power supply 3 157 cable connector assignment 3 155 distribution to HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 cabinets 3 156 figures 3 153 LED statuses 3 153 lockout switch function 3 153 SLCN not for U S 3 169 base station power supply 3 175 cable and c...

Page 1197: ...interfaces 3 225 connecting ISDN telephones 3 226 interfaces 3 224 S0 interface assignment 3 224 STMD3 3 228 cable and connector assignment 3 229 front panel 3 228 LED statuses 3 229 LEDs 3 228 STMD8 3 234 cable and connector assignment 3 241 figure 3 234 LED statuses 3 235 point to multipoint connection 3 237 point to point connection 3 237 S0 bus to station 3 239 S0 bus wiring for U S only 3 243...

Page 1198: ... TM2LP 3 269 cable and connector assignment 3 270 front panel 3 269 LED statuses 3 270 LEDs 3 269 TMAMF 3 276 cable and connector assignment 3 279 DSP diagnosis trace 3 277 figure 3 276 LED statuses 3 278 TMC16 3 280 cable and connector assignment 3 281 front panel 3 280 LED statuses 3 281 LEDs 3 280 TMCAS 3 285 in HiPath 3550 3 290 in HiPath 3750 HiPath 3700 3 289 seven segment display H1 3 288 s...

Page 1199: ...tion 3 333 S2M trunk connection 3 333 TS2R not for U S 3 330 interface assignments 3 332 interfaces 3 331 NT cable set for Spain Portugal 3 334 NT connection 3 333 S2M trunk connection 3 333 TST1 for U S only 3 328 contact assignment 3 329 figure 3 328 U Uninterruptible power supply unit HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 see UPSC DR 3 77 Uninterruptible power supply unit HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 see UPSC D 3...

Page 1200: ...e assignment 3 387 V 24 connector assignment 3 385 V 24 interfaces HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 3 384 V 24 interfaces HiPath 3700 4 140 V 24 interfaces HiPath 3750 4 115 V24 1 not for U S 3 384 figure 3 384 Version hub 12 15 Voice over IP 10 38 W Web based management WBM 3 100 3 106 3 244 6 6 Workpoint client power requirement D 1 Workpoint clients 10 1 ...

Page 1201: ......

Page 1202: ... development of the products An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract The trademarks used are owned by Siemens AG or their respective owners The device conforms to the EU directive 1999 5 EG as attested by the CE mark This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certi fied environmental management system ISO 1...

Reviews:

No comments